Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Science of Fingerprints:
Classification and Uses
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: The Science of Fingerprints: Classification and Uses
Author: United States. Federal Bureau of Investigation
Contributor: J. Edgar Hoover
Release date: August 10, 2006 [eBook #19022]
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/19022
Credits: Produced by Jason Isbell, Linda Cantoni, and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SCIENCE
OF FINGERPRINTS: CLASSIFICATION AND USES ***
Classification and Uses
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: The Science of Fingerprints: Classification and Uses
Author: United States. Federal Bureau of Investigation
Contributor: J. Edgar Hoover
Release date: August 10, 2006 [eBook #19022]
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/19022
Credits: Produced by Jason Isbell, Linda Cantoni, and the Online
Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SCIENCE
OF FINGERPRINTS: CLASSIFICATION AND USES ***
Page 4
THE
SCIENCE
SCIENCE
Page 5
OF
FINGERPRINTS
FINGERPRINTS
Page 6
Classification and Uses
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF JUSTICE
FEDERAL BUREAU OF INVESTIGATION
John Edgar Hoover, Director
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF JUSTICE
FEDERAL BUREAU OF INVESTIGATION
John Edgar Hoover, Director
Page 7
INTRODUCTION
This booklet concerning the study of fingerprints has been prepared by the
Federal Bureau of Investigation for the use of interested law enforcement
officers and agencies, particularly those which may be contemplating the
inauguration of fingerprint identification files. It is based on many years'
experience in fingerprint identification work out of which has developed the
largest collection of classified fingerprints in the world. Inasmuch as this
publication may serve as a general reference on classification and other
phases of fingerprint identification work, the systems utilized in the
Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation are set forth
fully. The problem of pattern interpretation, in particular, is discussed in
detail.
Criminal identification by means of fingerprints is one of the most potent
factors in obtaining the apprehension of fugitives who might otherwise
escape arrest and continue their criminal activities indefinitely. This type of
identification also makes possible an accurate determination of the number
of previous arrests and convictions which, of course, results in the
imposition of more equitable sentences by the judiciary, inasmuch as the
individual who repeatedly violates the law finds it impossible to pose
successfully as a first, or minor, offender. In addition, this system of
identification enables the prosecutor to present his case in the light of the
offender's previous record. It also provides the probation officers, parole
board, and the Governor with definite information upon which to base their
judgment in dealing with criminals in their jurisdictions.
From earliest times fingerprinting, because of its peculiar adaptability to the
field, has been associated in the lay mind with criminal identification to the
detriment of the other useful phases of the science. However, the Civil File
of the Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation
contains three times as many fingerprints as the Criminal File. These civil
fingerprints are an invaluable aid in identifying amnesia victims, missing
persons and unknown deceased. In the latter category the victims of major
disasters may be quickly and positively identified if their fingerprints are on
This booklet concerning the study of fingerprints has been prepared by the
Federal Bureau of Investigation for the use of interested law enforcement
officers and agencies, particularly those which may be contemplating the
inauguration of fingerprint identification files. It is based on many years'
experience in fingerprint identification work out of which has developed the
largest collection of classified fingerprints in the world. Inasmuch as this
publication may serve as a general reference on classification and other
phases of fingerprint identification work, the systems utilized in the
Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation are set forth
fully. The problem of pattern interpretation, in particular, is discussed in
detail.
Criminal identification by means of fingerprints is one of the most potent
factors in obtaining the apprehension of fugitives who might otherwise
escape arrest and continue their criminal activities indefinitely. This type of
identification also makes possible an accurate determination of the number
of previous arrests and convictions which, of course, results in the
imposition of more equitable sentences by the judiciary, inasmuch as the
individual who repeatedly violates the law finds it impossible to pose
successfully as a first, or minor, offender. In addition, this system of
identification enables the prosecutor to present his case in the light of the
offender's previous record. It also provides the probation officers, parole
board, and the Governor with definite information upon which to base their
judgment in dealing with criminals in their jurisdictions.
From earliest times fingerprinting, because of its peculiar adaptability to the
field, has been associated in the lay mind with criminal identification to the
detriment of the other useful phases of the science. However, the Civil File
of the Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation
contains three times as many fingerprints as the Criminal File. These civil
fingerprints are an invaluable aid in identifying amnesia victims, missing
persons and unknown deceased. In the latter category the victims of major
disasters may be quickly and positively identified if their fingerprints are on
Page 8
file, thus providing a humanitarian benefit not usually associated with
fingerprint records.
The regular contributors who voluntarily submit fingerprints to the Federal
Bureau of Investigation play a most important role in the drama of
identification. Their action expands the size of the fingerprint files, thereby
increasing the value of the files to all law enforcement agencies. Mutual
cooperation and efficiency are resultant by-products.
The use of fingerprints for identification purposes is based upon distinctive
ridge outlines which appear on the bulbs on the inside of the end joints of
the fingers and thumbs. These ridges have definite contours and appear in
several general pattern types, each with general and specific variations of
the pattern, dependent on the shape and relationship of the ridges. The
outlines of the ridges appear most clearly when inked impressions are taken
upon paper, so that the ridges are black against a white background. This
result is achieved by the ink adhering to the friction ridges. Impressions
may be made with blood, dirt, grease or any other foreign matter present on
the ridges, or the saline substance emitted by the glands through the ducts
or pores which constitute their outlets. The background or medium may be
paper, glass, porcelain, wood, cloth, wax, putty, silverware, or any smooth,
nonporous material.
Of all the methods of identification, fingerprinting alone has proved to be
both infallible and feasible. Its superiority over the older methods, such as
branding, tattooing, distinctive clothing, photography, and body
measurements (Bertillon system), has been demonstrated time after time.
While many cases of mistaken identification have occurred through the use
of these older systems, to date the fingerprints of no two individuals have
been found to be identical.
The background and history of the science of fingerprints constitute an
eloquent drama of human lives, of good and of evil. Nothing, I think, has
played a part more exciting than that enacted by the fascinating loops,
whorls, and arches etched on the fingers of a human being.
fingerprint records.
The regular contributors who voluntarily submit fingerprints to the Federal
Bureau of Investigation play a most important role in the drama of
identification. Their action expands the size of the fingerprint files, thereby
increasing the value of the files to all law enforcement agencies. Mutual
cooperation and efficiency are resultant by-products.
The use of fingerprints for identification purposes is based upon distinctive
ridge outlines which appear on the bulbs on the inside of the end joints of
the fingers and thumbs. These ridges have definite contours and appear in
several general pattern types, each with general and specific variations of
the pattern, dependent on the shape and relationship of the ridges. The
outlines of the ridges appear most clearly when inked impressions are taken
upon paper, so that the ridges are black against a white background. This
result is achieved by the ink adhering to the friction ridges. Impressions
may be made with blood, dirt, grease or any other foreign matter present on
the ridges, or the saline substance emitted by the glands through the ducts
or pores which constitute their outlets. The background or medium may be
paper, glass, porcelain, wood, cloth, wax, putty, silverware, or any smooth,
nonporous material.
Of all the methods of identification, fingerprinting alone has proved to be
both infallible and feasible. Its superiority over the older methods, such as
branding, tattooing, distinctive clothing, photography, and body
measurements (Bertillon system), has been demonstrated time after time.
While many cases of mistaken identification have occurred through the use
of these older systems, to date the fingerprints of no two individuals have
been found to be identical.
The background and history of the science of fingerprints constitute an
eloquent drama of human lives, of good and of evil. Nothing, I think, has
played a part more exciting than that enacted by the fascinating loops,
whorls, and arches etched on the fingers of a human being.
Page 9
J. EDGAR HOOVER,
Director.
Director.
Page 10
CONTENTS
Chapter Page
Introduction iii
I. The Identification Division of the FBI 1
II. Types of Patterns and Their Interpretation 5
III. Questionable Patterns 71
IV. The Classification Formula and Extensions 87
V. Classification of Scarred Patterns—Amputation—Missing at Birth 98
VI. Filing Sequence 103
VII. Searching and Referencing 109
VIII. How To Take Inked Fingerprints 114
IX. Problems in the Taking of Inked Fingerprints 118
X. Problems and Practices in Fingerprinting the Dead 131
XI. Establishment of a Local Fingerprint Identification Bureau 160
XII. Latent Impressions 173
XIII. Powdering and Lifting Latent Impressions 175
XIV. Chemical Development of Latent Impressions 177
XV. The Use of the Fingerprint Camera 184
XVI. Preparation of Fingerprint Charts for Court Testimony 190
XVII. Unidentified Latent Fingerprint File 194
Chapter Page
Introduction iii
I. The Identification Division of the FBI 1
II. Types of Patterns and Their Interpretation 5
III. Questionable Patterns 71
IV. The Classification Formula and Extensions 87
V. Classification of Scarred Patterns—Amputation—Missing at Birth 98
VI. Filing Sequence 103
VII. Searching and Referencing 109
VIII. How To Take Inked Fingerprints 114
IX. Problems in the Taking of Inked Fingerprints 118
X. Problems and Practices in Fingerprinting the Dead 131
XI. Establishment of a Local Fingerprint Identification Bureau 160
XII. Latent Impressions 173
XIII. Powdering and Lifting Latent Impressions 175
XIV. Chemical Development of Latent Impressions 177
XV. The Use of the Fingerprint Camera 184
XVI. Preparation of Fingerprint Charts for Court Testimony 190
XVII. Unidentified Latent Fingerprint File 194
Page 11
CHAPTER I
Page 12
The Identification Division of the FBI
The FBI Identification Division was established in 1924 when the records
of the National Bureau of Criminal Investigation and the Leavenworth
Penitentiary Bureau were consolidated in Washington, D.C. The original
collection of only 810,000 fingerprint cards has expanded into many
millions. The establishment of the FBI Identification Division resulted from
the fact that police officials of the Nation saw the need for a centralized
pooling of all fingerprint cards and all arrest records.
The Federal Bureau of Investigation offers identification service free of
charge for official use to all law enforcement agencies in this country and to
foreign law enforcement agencies which cooperate in the International
Exchange of Identification Data. Through this centralization of records it is
now possible for an officer to have available a positive source of
information relative to the past activities of an individual in his custody. It
is the Bureau's present policy to give preferred attention to all arrest
fingerprint cards since it is realized that speed is essential in this service.
In order that the FBI Identification Division can provide maximum service
to all law enforcement agencies, it is essential that standard fingerprint
cards and other forms furnished by the FBI be utilized. Fingerprints must be
clear and distinct and complete name and descriptive data required on the
form should be furnished in all instances. Fingerprints should be submitted
promptly since delay might result in release of a fugitive prior to
notification to the law enforcement agency seeking his apprehension.
When it is known to a law enforcement agency that a subject under arrest is
an employee of the U.S. Government or a member of the Armed Forces, a
notation should be placed in the space for "occupation" on the front of the
fingerprint card. Data such as location of agency or military post of
assignment may be added beside the space reserved for the photograph on
the reverse side of the card.
The FBI Identification Division was established in 1924 when the records
of the National Bureau of Criminal Investigation and the Leavenworth
Penitentiary Bureau were consolidated in Washington, D.C. The original
collection of only 810,000 fingerprint cards has expanded into many
millions. The establishment of the FBI Identification Division resulted from
the fact that police officials of the Nation saw the need for a centralized
pooling of all fingerprint cards and all arrest records.
The Federal Bureau of Investigation offers identification service free of
charge for official use to all law enforcement agencies in this country and to
foreign law enforcement agencies which cooperate in the International
Exchange of Identification Data. Through this centralization of records it is
now possible for an officer to have available a positive source of
information relative to the past activities of an individual in his custody. It
is the Bureau's present policy to give preferred attention to all arrest
fingerprint cards since it is realized that speed is essential in this service.
In order that the FBI Identification Division can provide maximum service
to all law enforcement agencies, it is essential that standard fingerprint
cards and other forms furnished by the FBI be utilized. Fingerprints must be
clear and distinct and complete name and descriptive data required on the
form should be furnished in all instances. Fingerprints should be submitted
promptly since delay might result in release of a fugitive prior to
notification to the law enforcement agency seeking his apprehension.
When it is known to a law enforcement agency that a subject under arrest is
an employee of the U.S. Government or a member of the Armed Forces, a
notation should be placed in the space for "occupation" on the front of the
fingerprint card. Data such as location of agency or military post of
assignment may be added beside the space reserved for the photograph on
the reverse side of the card.
Page 13
Many instances have been observed where an individual is fingerprinted by
more than one law enforcement agency for the same arrest. This duplicate
submission of fingerprints can be eliminated by placing a notation on the
first set of fingerprints sent to the FBI requesting copies of the record for
other interested law enforcement agencies, thereby eliminating submission
of fingerprints by the latter agencies.
If a photograph is available at the time fingerprints are submitted to the FBI
Identification Division, it should be identified on the reverse side with the
individual's complete name, name of the department submitting, the
department's number, and it should be securely pasted in the space provided
on the fingerprint card. If a photograph is to be submitted at a later date, it
should be held until the identification record or "no record" reply from the
FBI is received in order that FBI number or fingerprint classification can be
added to the reverse side of the photograph for assistance of the
Identification Division in relating it to the proper record.
The FBI number, if known, and any request for special handling, such as
collect wire or telephone reply, should be indicated on the fingerprint card
in the appropriate space. Such notations eliminate the need for an
accompanying letter of instructions.
As indicated, the FBI's service is given without cost to regularly constituted
law enforcement agencies and officers. Supplies of fingerprint cards and
self-addressed, franked envelopes will be forwarded upon the request of any
law enforcement officer. The following types of cards and forms are
available: Criminal (Form FD-249), used for both arrest and institution
records; Applicant (Form FD-258); Personal Identification (Form FD-353);
Death Sheet (Form R-88); Disposition Sheet (Form R-84); Wanted Notice
(Form 1-12); Record of Additional Arrest (Form 1-1). An order form for
identification supplies appears each month with the insert to the FBI Law
Enforcement Bulletin.
In addition to its criminal identification activities, the Bureau's
Identification Division maintains several auxiliary services. Not the least of
these is the system whereby fugitives are identified through the comparison
of fingerprints which are received currently. When a law enforcement
officer desires the apprehension of a fugitive and the fingerprints of that
more than one law enforcement agency for the same arrest. This duplicate
submission of fingerprints can be eliminated by placing a notation on the
first set of fingerprints sent to the FBI requesting copies of the record for
other interested law enforcement agencies, thereby eliminating submission
of fingerprints by the latter agencies.
If a photograph is available at the time fingerprints are submitted to the FBI
Identification Division, it should be identified on the reverse side with the
individual's complete name, name of the department submitting, the
department's number, and it should be securely pasted in the space provided
on the fingerprint card. If a photograph is to be submitted at a later date, it
should be held until the identification record or "no record" reply from the
FBI is received in order that FBI number or fingerprint classification can be
added to the reverse side of the photograph for assistance of the
Identification Division in relating it to the proper record.
The FBI number, if known, and any request for special handling, such as
collect wire or telephone reply, should be indicated on the fingerprint card
in the appropriate space. Such notations eliminate the need for an
accompanying letter of instructions.
As indicated, the FBI's service is given without cost to regularly constituted
law enforcement agencies and officers. Supplies of fingerprint cards and
self-addressed, franked envelopes will be forwarded upon the request of any
law enforcement officer. The following types of cards and forms are
available: Criminal (Form FD-249), used for both arrest and institution
records; Applicant (Form FD-258); Personal Identification (Form FD-353);
Death Sheet (Form R-88); Disposition Sheet (Form R-84); Wanted Notice
(Form 1-12); Record of Additional Arrest (Form 1-1). An order form for
identification supplies appears each month with the insert to the FBI Law
Enforcement Bulletin.
In addition to its criminal identification activities, the Bureau's
Identification Division maintains several auxiliary services. Not the least of
these is the system whereby fugitives are identified through the comparison
of fingerprints which are received currently. When a law enforcement
officer desires the apprehension of a fugitive and the fingerprints of that
Page 14
individual are available, it is necessary only that he inform the Bureau of
this fact so a wanted notice may be placed in the fugitive's record. This
insures immediate notification when the fugitive's fingerprints are next
received.
The fugitive service is amplified by the Bureau's action in transmitting a
monthly bulletin to all law enforcement agencies which forward
fingerprints for its files. In this bulletin are listed the names, descriptions,
and fingerprint classifications of persons wanted for offenses of a more
serious character. This information facilitates prompt identifications of
individuals arrested for any offense or otherwise located by those receiving
the bulletin.
Missing-persons notices are posted in the Identification files so that any
incoming record on the missing person will be noted. Notices are posted
both by fingerprint card and by name, or by name alone if fingerprints are
not available. The full name, date, and place of birth, complete description
and photograph of a missing person should be forwarded, along with
fingerprints, if available. Upon receipt of pertinent information, the
contributing agency is advised immediately. A section on missing persons is
carried as an insert in the Law Enforcement Bulletin.
The FBI Identification Division has arranged with the identification bureaus
of many foreign countries to exchange criminal identifying data in cases of
mutual interest. Fingerprints and arrest records of persons arrested in this
country are routed to the appropriate foreign bureaus in cases when the
interested agency in the United States has reason to believe an individual in
custody may have a record in or be wanted by the other nation. Similarly,
fingerprints are referred to the Federal Bureau of Investigation by foreign
bureaus when it seems a record may be disclosed by a search of the
Bureau's records. Numerous identifications, including a number of
fugitives, have been effected in this manner, and it is believed that the
complete development of this project will provide more effective law
enforcement throughout the world. When the facts indicate an individual
may have a record in another country, and the contributor submits an extra
set of his fingerprints, they are transmitted by this Bureau to the proper
authorities.
this fact so a wanted notice may be placed in the fugitive's record. This
insures immediate notification when the fugitive's fingerprints are next
received.
The fugitive service is amplified by the Bureau's action in transmitting a
monthly bulletin to all law enforcement agencies which forward
fingerprints for its files. In this bulletin are listed the names, descriptions,
and fingerprint classifications of persons wanted for offenses of a more
serious character. This information facilitates prompt identifications of
individuals arrested for any offense or otherwise located by those receiving
the bulletin.
Missing-persons notices are posted in the Identification files so that any
incoming record on the missing person will be noted. Notices are posted
both by fingerprint card and by name, or by name alone if fingerprints are
not available. The full name, date, and place of birth, complete description
and photograph of a missing person should be forwarded, along with
fingerprints, if available. Upon receipt of pertinent information, the
contributing agency is advised immediately. A section on missing persons is
carried as an insert in the Law Enforcement Bulletin.
The FBI Identification Division has arranged with the identification bureaus
of many foreign countries to exchange criminal identifying data in cases of
mutual interest. Fingerprints and arrest records of persons arrested in this
country are routed to the appropriate foreign bureaus in cases when the
interested agency in the United States has reason to believe an individual in
custody may have a record in or be wanted by the other nation. Similarly,
fingerprints are referred to the Federal Bureau of Investigation by foreign
bureaus when it seems a record may be disclosed by a search of the
Bureau's records. Numerous identifications, including a number of
fugitives, have been effected in this manner, and it is believed that the
complete development of this project will provide more effective law
enforcement throughout the world. When the facts indicate an individual
may have a record in another country, and the contributor submits an extra
set of his fingerprints, they are transmitted by this Bureau to the proper
authorities.
Page 15
In very rare cases persons without hands are arrested. A file on footprints is
maintained in the Identification Division on such individuals.
In view of the fact that many individuals in the underworld are known only
by their nicknames, the Identification Division has for years maintained a
card-index file containing in alphabetical order the nicknames appearing on
fingerprint cards. When requesting a search of the nickname file, it is
desired that all possible descriptive data be furnished.
The Latent Fingerprint Section handles latent print work. Articles of
evidence submitted by law enforcement agencies are processed for the
development of latent impressions in the Latent Fingerprint Section. In
addition, photographs, negatives, and lifts of latents are scrutinized for
prints of value for identification purposes. Photographs of the prints of
value are always prepared for the FBI's files and are available for
comparisons for an indefinite period. Should the law enforcement agency
desire additional comparisons it needs only advise the FBI Identification
Division, attention Latent Fingerprint Section, and either name or submit
the prints of the new suspect. It is not necessary to resubmit the evidence.
When necessary, a fingerprint expert will testify in local court as to his
findings. Should a department have any special problems involving the
development or preservation of fingerprints at a crime scene, the experts are
available for suggestions. In connection with the Latent Fingerprint Section
there is maintained a general appearance file of many confidence game
operators. Searches in this file will be made upon request. In furnishing data
on a suspect, the agency should make sure that complete descriptive data is
sent in. Photographs and other material on individuals who may be identical
with those being sought will be furnished to the interested departments.
During the years many persons have voluntarily submitted their fingerprints
to the Identification Division for possible use in the case of an emergency.
These cards are not filed with the criminal fingerprints but are maintained
separately. Such prints should be taken on the standard fingerprint form
entitled "Personal Identification" (Form FD-353). No answer is given to
Personal Identification fingerprint cards.
The fingerprint records of the FBI Identification Division are used liberally
not only by police agencies to obtain previous fingerprint histories and to
maintained in the Identification Division on such individuals.
In view of the fact that many individuals in the underworld are known only
by their nicknames, the Identification Division has for years maintained a
card-index file containing in alphabetical order the nicknames appearing on
fingerprint cards. When requesting a search of the nickname file, it is
desired that all possible descriptive data be furnished.
The Latent Fingerprint Section handles latent print work. Articles of
evidence submitted by law enforcement agencies are processed for the
development of latent impressions in the Latent Fingerprint Section. In
addition, photographs, negatives, and lifts of latents are scrutinized for
prints of value for identification purposes. Photographs of the prints of
value are always prepared for the FBI's files and are available for
comparisons for an indefinite period. Should the law enforcement agency
desire additional comparisons it needs only advise the FBI Identification
Division, attention Latent Fingerprint Section, and either name or submit
the prints of the new suspect. It is not necessary to resubmit the evidence.
When necessary, a fingerprint expert will testify in local court as to his
findings. Should a department have any special problems involving the
development or preservation of fingerprints at a crime scene, the experts are
available for suggestions. In connection with the Latent Fingerprint Section
there is maintained a general appearance file of many confidence game
operators. Searches in this file will be made upon request. In furnishing data
on a suspect, the agency should make sure that complete descriptive data is
sent in. Photographs and other material on individuals who may be identical
with those being sought will be furnished to the interested departments.
During the years many persons have voluntarily submitted their fingerprints
to the Identification Division for possible use in the case of an emergency.
These cards are not filed with the criminal fingerprints but are maintained
separately. Such prints should be taken on the standard fingerprint form
entitled "Personal Identification" (Form FD-353). No answer is given to
Personal Identification fingerprint cards.
The fingerprint records of the FBI Identification Division are used liberally
not only by police agencies to obtain previous fingerprint histories and to
Page 16
ascertain whether persons arrested are wanted elsewhere, but by prosecutors
to whom the information from the Bureau's files may prove to be valuable
in connection with the prosecution of a case. These records are likewise of
frequent value to the judge for his consideration in connection with the
imposition of sentence. Obviously, the ends of justice may be served most
equitably when the past fingerprint record of the person on trial can be
made known to the court, or information may be furnished to the effect that
the defendant is of hitherto unblemished reputation.
It should be emphasized that FBI identification records are for the
OFFICIAL use of law enforcement and governmental agencies and misuse
of such records by disseminating them to unauthorized persons may result
in cancellation of FBI identification services.
to whom the information from the Bureau's files may prove to be valuable
in connection with the prosecution of a case. These records are likewise of
frequent value to the judge for his consideration in connection with the
imposition of sentence. Obviously, the ends of justice may be served most
equitably when the past fingerprint record of the person on trial can be
made known to the court, or information may be furnished to the effect that
the defendant is of hitherto unblemished reputation.
It should be emphasized that FBI identification records are for the
OFFICIAL use of law enforcement and governmental agencies and misuse
of such records by disseminating them to unauthorized persons may result
in cancellation of FBI identification services.
Page 17
CHAPTER II
Page 18
Types of Patterns and Their Interpretation
Types of patterns
Fingerprints may be resolved into three large general groups of patterns,
each group bearing the same general characteristics or family resemblance.
The patterns may be further divided into sub-groups by means of the
smaller differences existing between the patterns in the same general group.
These divisions are as follows:
I. ARCH II. LOOP III. WHORL
a. Plain arch. a. Radial loop. a. Plain whorl.
b. Tented arch. b. Ulnar loop. b. Central pocket loop.
c. Double loop.
d. Accidental whorl.
Illustrations 1 to 10 are examples of the various types of fingerprint
patterns.
Types of patterns
Fingerprints may be resolved into three large general groups of patterns,
each group bearing the same general characteristics or family resemblance.
The patterns may be further divided into sub-groups by means of the
smaller differences existing between the patterns in the same general group.
These divisions are as follows:
I. ARCH II. LOOP III. WHORL
a. Plain arch. a. Radial loop. a. Plain whorl.
b. Tented arch. b. Ulnar loop. b. Central pocket loop.
c. Double loop.
d. Accidental whorl.
Illustrations 1 to 10 are examples of the various types of fingerprint
patterns.
Page 19
Page 20
[Figs. 1-10]
Interpretation
Before pattern definition can be understood, it is necessary to understand
the meaning of a few technical terms used in fingerprint work.
The pattern area is the only part of the finger impression with which we are
concerned in regard to interpretation and classification. It is present in all
patterns, of course, but in many arches and tented arches it is impossible to
define. This is not important, however, as the only patterns in which we
need to define the pattern area for classification purposes are loops and
whorls. In these two pattern types the pattern area may be defined as
follows:
The pattern area is that part of a loop or whorl in which appear the cores,
deltas, and ridges with which we are concerned in classifying.
The pattern areas of loops and whorls are enclosed by type lines.
Type lines may be defined as the two innermost ridges which start parallel,
diverge, and surround or tend to surround the pattern area.
Figure 11 is a typical loop. Lines A and B, which have been emphasized in
this sketch, are the type lines, starting parallel, diverging at the line C and
Interpretation
Before pattern definition can be understood, it is necessary to understand
the meaning of a few technical terms used in fingerprint work.
The pattern area is the only part of the finger impression with which we are
concerned in regard to interpretation and classification. It is present in all
patterns, of course, but in many arches and tented arches it is impossible to
define. This is not important, however, as the only patterns in which we
need to define the pattern area for classification purposes are loops and
whorls. In these two pattern types the pattern area may be defined as
follows:
The pattern area is that part of a loop or whorl in which appear the cores,
deltas, and ridges with which we are concerned in classifying.
The pattern areas of loops and whorls are enclosed by type lines.
Type lines may be defined as the two innermost ridges which start parallel,
diverge, and surround or tend to surround the pattern area.
Figure 11 is a typical loop. Lines A and B, which have been emphasized in
this sketch, are the type lines, starting parallel, diverging at the line C and
Page 21
surrounding the pattern area, which is emphasized in figure 12 by
eliminating all the ridges within the pattern area.
[Figs. 11-12]
Figures 72 through 101 should be studied for the location of type lines.
Type lines are not always two continuous ridges. In fact, they are more
often found to be broken. When there is a definite break in a type line, the
ridge immediately outside of it is considered as its continuation, as shown
by the emphasized ridges in figure 13.
[Fig. 13]
eliminating all the ridges within the pattern area.
[Figs. 11-12]
Figures 72 through 101 should be studied for the location of type lines.
Type lines are not always two continuous ridges. In fact, they are more
often found to be broken. When there is a definite break in a type line, the
ridge immediately outside of it is considered as its continuation, as shown
by the emphasized ridges in figure 13.
[Fig. 13]
Page 22
Sometimes type lines may be very short. Care must be exercised in their
location. Notice the right type line in figure 14.
[Fig. 14]
When locating type lines it is necessary to keep in mind the distinction
between a divergence and a bifurcation (fig. 15).
[Fig. 15]
location. Notice the right type line in figure 14.
[Fig. 14]
When locating type lines it is necessary to keep in mind the distinction
between a divergence and a bifurcation (fig. 15).
[Fig. 15]
Page 23
A bifurcation is the forking or dividing of one line into two or more
branches.
A divergence is the spreading apart of two lines which have been running
parallel or nearly parallel.
According to the narrow meaning of the words in fingerprint parlance, a
single ridge may bifurcate, but it may not be said to diverge. Therefore,
with one exception, the two forks of a bifurcation may never constitute type
lines. The exception is when the forks run parallel after bifurcating and then
diverge. In such a case the two forks become the two innermost ridges
required by the definition. In illustration 16, the ridges marked "A—A" are
type lines even though they proceed from a bifurcation. In figure 17,
however, the ridges A—A are not the type lines because the forks of the
bifurcation do not run parallel with each other. Instead, the ridges marked
"T" are the type lines.
[Fig. 16]
branches.
A divergence is the spreading apart of two lines which have been running
parallel or nearly parallel.
According to the narrow meaning of the words in fingerprint parlance, a
single ridge may bifurcate, but it may not be said to diverge. Therefore,
with one exception, the two forks of a bifurcation may never constitute type
lines. The exception is when the forks run parallel after bifurcating and then
diverge. In such a case the two forks become the two innermost ridges
required by the definition. In illustration 16, the ridges marked "A—A" are
type lines even though they proceed from a bifurcation. In figure 17,
however, the ridges A—A are not the type lines because the forks of the
bifurcation do not run parallel with each other. Instead, the ridges marked
"T" are the type lines.
[Fig. 16]
Page 24
[Fig. 17]
Angles are never formed by a single ridge but by the abutting of one ridge
against another. Therefore, an angular formation cannot be used as a type
line. In figure 18, ridges A and B join at an angle. Ridge B does not run
parallel with ridge D; ridge A does not diverge. Ridges C and D, therefore,
are the type lines.
[Fig. 18]
Focal points—Within the pattern areas of loops and whorls are enclosed the
focal points which are used to classify them. These points are called delta
Angles are never formed by a single ridge but by the abutting of one ridge
against another. Therefore, an angular formation cannot be used as a type
line. In figure 18, ridges A and B join at an angle. Ridge B does not run
parallel with ridge D; ridge A does not diverge. Ridges C and D, therefore,
are the type lines.
[Fig. 18]
Focal points—Within the pattern areas of loops and whorls are enclosed the
focal points which are used to classify them. These points are called delta
Page 25
and core.
The delta is that point on a ridge at or in front of and nearest the center of
the divergence of the type lines.
It may be:
● A bifurcation
● An abrupt ending ridge
● A dot
● A short ridge
● A meeting of two ridges
● A point on the first recurving ridge located nearest to the center and in
front of the divergence of the type lines.
The concept of the delta may perhaps be clarified by further exposition.
Webster furnishes the following definition: "(1) Delta is the name of the
fourth letter of the Greek alphabet (equivalent to the English D) from the
Phoenician name for the corresponding letter. The Greeks called the alluvial
deposit at the mouth of the Nile, from its shape, the Delta of the Nile. (2) A
tract of land shaped like the letter "delta," especially when the land is
alluvial, and enclosed within two or more mouths of a river, as the Delta of
the Ganges, of the Nile, of the Mississippi" (fig. 19).
The delta is that point on a ridge at or in front of and nearest the center of
the divergence of the type lines.
It may be:
● A bifurcation
● An abrupt ending ridge
● A dot
● A short ridge
● A meeting of two ridges
● A point on the first recurving ridge located nearest to the center and in
front of the divergence of the type lines.
The concept of the delta may perhaps be clarified by further exposition.
Webster furnishes the following definition: "(1) Delta is the name of the
fourth letter of the Greek alphabet (equivalent to the English D) from the
Phoenician name for the corresponding letter. The Greeks called the alluvial
deposit at the mouth of the Nile, from its shape, the Delta of the Nile. (2) A
tract of land shaped like the letter "delta," especially when the land is
alluvial, and enclosed within two or more mouths of a river, as the Delta of
the Ganges, of the Nile, of the Mississippi" (fig. 19).
Page 26
[Fig. 19]
When the use of the word "delta" in physical geography is fully grasped, its
fitness as applied in fingerprint work will become evident. Rivers wear
away their banks and carry them along in their waters in the form of a fine
sediment. As the rivers unite with seas or lakes, the onward sweep of the
water is lessened, and the sediment, becoming comparatively still, sinks to
the bottom where there is formed a shoal which gradually grows, as more
and more is precipitated, until at length a portion of the shoal becomes
higher than the ordinary level of the stream. There is a similarity between
the use of the word "delta" in physical geography and in fingerprints. The
island formed in front of the diverging sides of the banks where the stream
empties at its mouth corresponds to the delta in fingerprints, which is the
first obstruction of any nature at the point of divergence of the type lines in
front of or nearest the center of the divergence.
In figure 20, the dot marked "delta" is considered as the delta because it is
the first ridge or part of a ridge nearest the point of divergence of the two
type lines. If the dot were not present, point B on ridge C, as shown in the
figure, would be considered as the delta. This would be equally true
whether the ridges were connected with one of the type lines, both type
lines, or disconnected altogether. In figure 20, with the dot as the delta, the
first ridge count is ridge C. If the dot were not present, point B on ridge C
would be considered as the delta and the first count would be ridge D. The
lines X—X and Y—Y are the type lines, not X—A and Y—Z.
When the use of the word "delta" in physical geography is fully grasped, its
fitness as applied in fingerprint work will become evident. Rivers wear
away their banks and carry them along in their waters in the form of a fine
sediment. As the rivers unite with seas or lakes, the onward sweep of the
water is lessened, and the sediment, becoming comparatively still, sinks to
the bottom where there is formed a shoal which gradually grows, as more
and more is precipitated, until at length a portion of the shoal becomes
higher than the ordinary level of the stream. There is a similarity between
the use of the word "delta" in physical geography and in fingerprints. The
island formed in front of the diverging sides of the banks where the stream
empties at its mouth corresponds to the delta in fingerprints, which is the
first obstruction of any nature at the point of divergence of the type lines in
front of or nearest the center of the divergence.
In figure 20, the dot marked "delta" is considered as the delta because it is
the first ridge or part of a ridge nearest the point of divergence of the two
type lines. If the dot were not present, point B on ridge C, as shown in the
figure, would be considered as the delta. This would be equally true
whether the ridges were connected with one of the type lines, both type
lines, or disconnected altogether. In figure 20, with the dot as the delta, the
first ridge count is ridge C. If the dot were not present, point B on ridge C
would be considered as the delta and the first count would be ridge D. The
lines X—X and Y—Y are the type lines, not X—A and Y—Z.
Page 27
[Fig. 20]
In figures 21 to 24, the heavy lines A—A and B—B are type lines with the
delta at point D.
In figures 21 to 24, the heavy lines A—A and B—B are type lines with the
delta at point D.
Page 28
[Figs. 21-24]
Figure 25 shows ridge A bifurcating from the lower type line inside the
pattern area. Bifurcations are also present within this pattern at points B and
C. The bifurcation at the point marked "delta" is the only one which fulfills
all conditions necessary for its location. It should be understood that the
diverging type lines must be present in all delta formations and that
wherever one of the formations mentioned in the definition of a delta may
be, it must be located midway between two diverging type lines at or just in
front of where they diverge in order to satisfy the definition and qualify as a
delta.
[Fig. 25]
When there is a choice between two or more possible deltas, the following
rules govern:
● The delta may not be located at a bifurcation which does not open toward
the core.
In figure 26, the bifurcation at E is closer to the core than the bifurcation at
D. However, E is not immediately in front of the divergence of the type
lines and it does not open toward the core. A—A and B—B are the only
possible type lines in this sketch and it follows, therefore, that the
Figure 25 shows ridge A bifurcating from the lower type line inside the
pattern area. Bifurcations are also present within this pattern at points B and
C. The bifurcation at the point marked "delta" is the only one which fulfills
all conditions necessary for its location. It should be understood that the
diverging type lines must be present in all delta formations and that
wherever one of the formations mentioned in the definition of a delta may
be, it must be located midway between two diverging type lines at or just in
front of where they diverge in order to satisfy the definition and qualify as a
delta.
[Fig. 25]
When there is a choice between two or more possible deltas, the following
rules govern:
● The delta may not be located at a bifurcation which does not open toward
the core.
In figure 26, the bifurcation at E is closer to the core than the bifurcation at
D. However, E is not immediately in front of the divergence of the type
lines and it does not open toward the core. A—A and B—B are the only
possible type lines in this sketch and it follows, therefore, that the
Page 29
bifurcation at D must be called the delta. The first ridge count would be
ridge C.
[Fig. 26]
● When there is a choice between a bifurcation and another type of delta,
the bifurcation is selected.
A problem of this type is shown in figure 27. The dot, A, and the bifurcation
are equally close to the divergence of the type lines, but the bifurcation is
selected as the delta. The ridges marked "T" are the type lines.
ridge C.
[Fig. 26]
● When there is a choice between a bifurcation and another type of delta,
the bifurcation is selected.
A problem of this type is shown in figure 27. The dot, A, and the bifurcation
are equally close to the divergence of the type lines, but the bifurcation is
selected as the delta. The ridges marked "T" are the type lines.
Page 30
[Fig. 27]
● When there are two or more possible deltas which conform to the
definition, the one nearest the core is chosen.
Prints are sometimes found wherein a single ridge enters the pattern area
with two or more bifurcations opening toward the core. Figure 28 is an
example of this. Ridge A enters the pattern area and bifurcates at points X
and D. The bifurcation at D, which is the closer to the core, is the delta and
conforms to the rule for deltas. A—A and B—B are the type lines. A
bifurcation which does not conform to the definition should not be
considered as a delta irrespective of its distance from the core.
● When there are two or more possible deltas which conform to the
definition, the one nearest the core is chosen.
Prints are sometimes found wherein a single ridge enters the pattern area
with two or more bifurcations opening toward the core. Figure 28 is an
example of this. Ridge A enters the pattern area and bifurcates at points X
and D. The bifurcation at D, which is the closer to the core, is the delta and
conforms to the rule for deltas. A—A and B—B are the type lines. A
bifurcation which does not conform to the definition should not be
considered as a delta irrespective of its distance from the core.
Page 31
[Fig. 28]
● The delta may not be located in the middle of a ridge running between the
type lines toward the core, but at the nearer end only.
The location of the delta in this case depends entirely upon the point of
origin of the ridge running between the type lines toward the core. If the
ridge is entirely within the pattern area, the delta is located at the end nearer
the point of divergence of the type lines. Figure 29 is an example of this
kind.
[Fig. 29]
● The delta may not be located in the middle of a ridge running between the
type lines toward the core, but at the nearer end only.
The location of the delta in this case depends entirely upon the point of
origin of the ridge running between the type lines toward the core. If the
ridge is entirely within the pattern area, the delta is located at the end nearer
the point of divergence of the type lines. Figure 29 is an example of this
kind.
[Fig. 29]
Page 32
If the ridge enters the pattern area from a point below the divergence of the
type lines, however, the delta must be located at the end nearer the core.
Ridge A in figure 30 is of this type.
[Fig. 30]
In figure 31, A—A and B—B are the type lines, with the dot as the delta.
The bifurcations cannot be considered as they do not open toward the core.
[Fig. 31]
type lines, however, the delta must be located at the end nearer the core.
Ridge A in figure 30 is of this type.
[Fig. 30]
In figure 31, A—A and B—B are the type lines, with the dot as the delta.
The bifurcations cannot be considered as they do not open toward the core.
[Fig. 31]
Page 33
In figure 32, the dot cannot be the delta because line D cannot be
considered as a type line. It does not run parallel to type line A—A at any
point. The same reason prevents line E from being a type line. The end of
ridge E is the only possible delta as it is a point on the ridge nearest to the
center of divergence of the type lines. The other type line is, of course, B—
B.
[Fig. 32]
The delta is the point from which to start in ridge counting. In the loop type
pattern the ridges intervening between the delta and the core are counted.
The core is the second of the two focal points.
The core, as the name implies, is the approximate center of the finger
impression. It will be necessary to concern ourselves with the core of the
loop type only. The following rules govern the selection of the core of a
loop:
● The core is placed upon or within the innermost sufficient recurve.
● When the innermost sufficient recurve contains no ending ridge or rod
rising as high as the shoulders of the loop, the core is placed on the
shoulder of the loop farther from the delta.
considered as a type line. It does not run parallel to type line A—A at any
point. The same reason prevents line E from being a type line. The end of
ridge E is the only possible delta as it is a point on the ridge nearest to the
center of divergence of the type lines. The other type line is, of course, B—
B.
[Fig. 32]
The delta is the point from which to start in ridge counting. In the loop type
pattern the ridges intervening between the delta and the core are counted.
The core is the second of the two focal points.
The core, as the name implies, is the approximate center of the finger
impression. It will be necessary to concern ourselves with the core of the
loop type only. The following rules govern the selection of the core of a
loop:
● The core is placed upon or within the innermost sufficient recurve.
● When the innermost sufficient recurve contains no ending ridge or rod
rising as high as the shoulders of the loop, the core is placed on the
shoulder of the loop farther from the delta.
Page 34
● When the innermost sufficient recurve contains an uneven number of rods
rising as high as the shoulders, the core is placed upon the end of the center
rod whether it touches the looping ridge or not.
● When the innermost sufficient recurve contains an even number of rods
rising as high as the shoulders, the core is placed upon the end of the
farther one of the two center rods, the two center rods being treated as
though they were connected by a recurving ridge.
The shoulders of a loop are the points at which the recurving ridge
definitely turns inward or curves.
Figures 33 to 38 reflect the focal points of a series of loops. In figure 39,
there are two rods, but the rod marked "A" does not rise as high as the
shoulder line X, so the core is at B.
rising as high as the shoulders, the core is placed upon the end of the center
rod whether it touches the looping ridge or not.
● When the innermost sufficient recurve contains an even number of rods
rising as high as the shoulders, the core is placed upon the end of the
farther one of the two center rods, the two center rods being treated as
though they were connected by a recurving ridge.
The shoulders of a loop are the points at which the recurving ridge
definitely turns inward or curves.
Figures 33 to 38 reflect the focal points of a series of loops. In figure 39,
there are two rods, but the rod marked "A" does not rise as high as the
shoulder line X, so the core is at B.
Page 35
[Figs. 33-39]
Figures 40 to 45 illustrate the rule that a recurve must have no appendage
abutting upon it at a right angle between the shoulders and on the outside. If
such an appendage is present between the shoulders of a loop, that loop is
Figures 40 to 45 illustrate the rule that a recurve must have no appendage
abutting upon it at a right angle between the shoulders and on the outside. If
such an appendage is present between the shoulders of a loop, that loop is
Page 36
considered spoiled and the next loop outside will be considered to locate the
core. In each of the figures, the point C indicates the core. Appendages will
be further explained in the section concerning loops.
core. In each of the figures, the point C indicates the core. Appendages will
be further explained in the section concerning loops.
Page 37
[Figs. 40-45]
Figures 46 to 48 reflect interlocking loops at the center, while figure 49 has
two loops side by side at the center. In all these cases the two loops are
considered as one. In figure 46, when the shoulder line X—X is drawn it is
found to cross exactly at the point of intersection of the two loops. The two
loops are considered one, with one rod, the core being placed at C. In figure
47, the shoulder line X—X is above the point of intersection of the two
loops. The two are considered as one, with two rods, the core being at C. In
figure 48, the shoulder line X—X is below the point of intersection of the
loops. Again the two are treated as one, with two rods, the core being placed
at C. In figure 49, the two are treated as one, with two rods, the core being
placed at C.
Figures 46 to 48 reflect interlocking loops at the center, while figure 49 has
two loops side by side at the center. In all these cases the two loops are
considered as one. In figure 46, when the shoulder line X—X is drawn it is
found to cross exactly at the point of intersection of the two loops. The two
loops are considered one, with one rod, the core being placed at C. In figure
47, the shoulder line X—X is above the point of intersection of the two
loops. The two are considered as one, with two rods, the core being at C. In
figure 48, the shoulder line X—X is below the point of intersection of the
loops. Again the two are treated as one, with two rods, the core being placed
at C. In figure 49, the two are treated as one, with two rods, the core being
placed at C.
Page 38
[Figs. 46-49]
In figure 50, the delta is formed by a bifurcation which is not connected
with either of the type lines. The first ridge count in this instance is ridge C.
If the bifurcation were not present, the delta would be a point on ridge C
and the first ridge count would be ridge D. In figure 51, the ridge which
bifurcates is connected with the lower type line. The delta in this would be
located on the bifurcation as designated and the first ridge count would be
ridge C. Figure 52 reflects the same type of delta shown in the previous
figure in that the ridge is bifurcating from a type line and then bifurcates
again to form the delta.
In figure 50, the delta is formed by a bifurcation which is not connected
with either of the type lines. The first ridge count in this instance is ridge C.
If the bifurcation were not present, the delta would be a point on ridge C
and the first ridge count would be ridge D. In figure 51, the ridge which
bifurcates is connected with the lower type line. The delta in this would be
located on the bifurcation as designated and the first ridge count would be
ridge C. Figure 52 reflects the same type of delta shown in the previous
figure in that the ridge is bifurcating from a type line and then bifurcates
again to form the delta.
Page 39
[Figs. 50-52]
A white space must intervene between the delta and the first ridge count. If
no such interval exists, the first ridge must be disregarded. In figures 53 and
54, the first ridge beyond the delta is counted. In figure 55, it is not counted
because there is no interval between it and the delta. Notice that the ridge
running from the delta toward the core is in a straight line between them. If
it were not, of course, an interval would intervene as in figures 53 and 54.
A white space must intervene between the delta and the first ridge count. If
no such interval exists, the first ridge must be disregarded. In figures 53 and
54, the first ridge beyond the delta is counted. In figure 55, it is not counted
because there is no interval between it and the delta. Notice that the ridge
running from the delta toward the core is in a straight line between them. If
it were not, of course, an interval would intervene as in figures 53 and 54.
Page 40
[Figs. 53-55]
The loop
In fingerprints, as well as in the usual application of the word "loop," there
cannot be a loop unless there is a recurve or turning back on itself of one or
more of the ridges. Other conditions have to be considered, however. A
pattern must possess several requisites before it may be properly classified
as a loop. This type of pattern is the most numerous of all and constitutes
about 65 percent of all prints.
A loop is that type of fingerprint pattern in which one or more of the ridges
enter on either side of the impression, recurve, touch or pass an imaginary
line drawn from the delta to the core, and terminate or tend to terminate on
The loop
In fingerprints, as well as in the usual application of the word "loop," there
cannot be a loop unless there is a recurve or turning back on itself of one or
more of the ridges. Other conditions have to be considered, however. A
pattern must possess several requisites before it may be properly classified
as a loop. This type of pattern is the most numerous of all and constitutes
about 65 percent of all prints.
A loop is that type of fingerprint pattern in which one or more of the ridges
enter on either side of the impression, recurve, touch or pass an imaginary
line drawn from the delta to the core, and terminate or tend to terminate on
Page 41
or toward the same side of the impression from whence such ridge or ridges
entered.
Essentials of a loop
● A sufficient recurve.
● A delta.
● A ridge count across a looping ridge.
A sufficient recurve may be defined as that part of a recurving ridge
between the shoulders of a loop. It must be free of any appendages abutting
upon the outside of the recurve at a right angle.
Appendages—Some explanation is necessary of the importance attached to
appendages. Much care must be exercised in interpreting appendages
because they sometimes change the shape of the recurving ridge to which
they are connected. For example, a loop with an appendage abutting upon
its recurve between the shoulders and at right angles, as in illustration 56,
will appear sometimes as in illustration 57 with the recurve totally
destroyed. For further examples see figures 161 to 184.
[Figs. 56-57]
entered.
Essentials of a loop
● A sufficient recurve.
● A delta.
● A ridge count across a looping ridge.
A sufficient recurve may be defined as that part of a recurving ridge
between the shoulders of a loop. It must be free of any appendages abutting
upon the outside of the recurve at a right angle.
Appendages—Some explanation is necessary of the importance attached to
appendages. Much care must be exercised in interpreting appendages
because they sometimes change the shape of the recurving ridge to which
they are connected. For example, a loop with an appendage abutting upon
its recurve between the shoulders and at right angles, as in illustration 56,
will appear sometimes as in illustration 57 with the recurve totally
destroyed. For further examples see figures 161 to 184.
[Figs. 56-57]
Page 42
The same is true of a whorl recurve, as in figures 58 and 59.
[Figs. 58-59]
It is necessary, therefore, to consider and classify figures 56 and 58 as if
they actually appeared as in figures 57 and 59.
In figure 60, there is a ridge marked "A" which enters on one side of the
impression and, after recurving, passes an imaginary line drawn from the
core C to delta D, and terminates on the same side of the impression from
which it entered, marked "B", thus fulfilling all the conditions required in
the definition of a loop. X and Y are the type lines. It will be noted in figure
61 that there is a ridge which enters on one side of the impression, recurves,
and passes an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core. It does not
terminate on the side from which it entered but has a tendency to do so. In
this case, all the requirements of the loop have been met, and consequently
it is classified as such.
[Figs. 58-59]
It is necessary, therefore, to consider and classify figures 56 and 58 as if
they actually appeared as in figures 57 and 59.
In figure 60, there is a ridge marked "A" which enters on one side of the
impression and, after recurving, passes an imaginary line drawn from the
core C to delta D, and terminates on the same side of the impression from
which it entered, marked "B", thus fulfilling all the conditions required in
the definition of a loop. X and Y are the type lines. It will be noted in figure
61 that there is a ridge which enters on one side of the impression, recurves,
and passes an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core. It does not
terminate on the side from which it entered but has a tendency to do so. In
this case, all the requirements of the loop have been met, and consequently
it is classified as such.
Page 43
[Fig. 60]
[Fig. 61]
Figure 62 shows a ridge entering on one side of the impression, recurving,
and passing beyond an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core,
although opposite from the pattern shown in figure 61. After passing the
imaginary line, the recurving ridge does not terminate on the side of the
impression from which it entered, but it has a tendency to do so, and the
pattern is, therefore, a loop.
[Fig. 61]
Figure 62 shows a ridge entering on one side of the impression, recurving,
and passing beyond an imaginary line drawn from the delta to the core,
although opposite from the pattern shown in figure 61. After passing the
imaginary line, the recurving ridge does not terminate on the side of the
impression from which it entered, but it has a tendency to do so, and the
pattern is, therefore, a loop.
Page 44
[Fig. 62]
In figure 63, a ridge enters on one side of the impression and then recurves,
containing two rods within it, each of which rises as high as the shoulder of
the loop. From our study of cores, we know that the top of the rod more
distant from the delta is the core, but the recurving ridge does not pass the
imaginary line. For that reason the pattern is not classified as a loop, but is
given the preferential classification of a tented arch due to the lack of one of
the loop requisites. The proper location of the core and delta is of extreme
importance, for an error in the location of either might cause this pattern to
be classified as a loop.
[Fig. 63]
In figure 63, a ridge enters on one side of the impression and then recurves,
containing two rods within it, each of which rises as high as the shoulder of
the loop. From our study of cores, we know that the top of the rod more
distant from the delta is the core, but the recurving ridge does not pass the
imaginary line. For that reason the pattern is not classified as a loop, but is
given the preferential classification of a tented arch due to the lack of one of
the loop requisites. The proper location of the core and delta is of extreme
importance, for an error in the location of either might cause this pattern to
be classified as a loop.
[Fig. 63]
Page 45
Figure 64 reflects a similar condition.
[Fig. 64]
In figure 65, there is a looping ridge A which enters on one side of the
impression. The ridges B and C are the type lines. As determined by rules
already stated, the location of the core and the location of the delta are
shown, and if an imaginary line were placed on the core and delta, the
recurving ridge A would cross it. This is another figure showing a ridge
which does not terminate on the side of the impression from which it
entered but tends to do so, and, therefore, is considered as a loop.
[Fig. 65]
[Fig. 64]
In figure 65, there is a looping ridge A which enters on one side of the
impression. The ridges B and C are the type lines. As determined by rules
already stated, the location of the core and the location of the delta are
shown, and if an imaginary line were placed on the core and delta, the
recurving ridge A would cross it. This is another figure showing a ridge
which does not terminate on the side of the impression from which it
entered but tends to do so, and, therefore, is considered as a loop.
[Fig. 65]
Page 46
In figure 66, we have a print which is similar in many respects to the one
described in the preceding paragraph, but here the recurving ridge A
continues and tends to terminate on the opposite side of the impression
from which it entered. For this reason the pattern is not a loop, but a tented
arch. The recurving ridge must touch or pass the imaginary line between
delta and core and at least tend to pass out toward the side from which it
entered, so that a ridge count of at least one can be obtained.
[Fig. 66]
Figure 67 shows a ridge which enters on one side of the impression and,
after flowing toward the center, turns or loops on itself and terminates on
the same side from whence it entered. This pattern would be classified as a
loop. This pattern should be distinguished from the pattern appearing in
figure 139. Careful study of the pattern in figure 67 reveals that the core is
located at C and the delta D. The imaginary line between these points will
be crossed by the ridge forming a loop. In figure 139, the core is located on
the recurve and an imaginary line between the delta and the core does not
cross a looping ridge. Figure 139 is thus classified as a tented arch, as will
be seen later.
described in the preceding paragraph, but here the recurving ridge A
continues and tends to terminate on the opposite side of the impression
from which it entered. For this reason the pattern is not a loop, but a tented
arch. The recurving ridge must touch or pass the imaginary line between
delta and core and at least tend to pass out toward the side from which it
entered, so that a ridge count of at least one can be obtained.
[Fig. 66]
Figure 67 shows a ridge which enters on one side of the impression and,
after flowing toward the center, turns or loops on itself and terminates on
the same side from whence it entered. This pattern would be classified as a
loop. This pattern should be distinguished from the pattern appearing in
figure 139. Careful study of the pattern in figure 67 reveals that the core is
located at C and the delta D. The imaginary line between these points will
be crossed by the ridge forming a loop. In figure 139, the core is located on
the recurve and an imaginary line between the delta and the core does not
cross a looping ridge. Figure 139 is thus classified as a tented arch, as will
be seen later.
Page 47
[Fig. 67]
Figure 68 shows at the center of the print a ridge which forms a pocket. It
will be noticed that ridge A does not begin on the edge of the print, but this
is of no significance. The ridge A within the pattern area recurves or loops,
passing the imaginary line between the delta and the core, and tends to
terminate toward the same side of the impression from whence it entered.
This is a loop pattern possessing all of the requirements.
[Fig. 68]
Figure 68 shows at the center of the print a ridge which forms a pocket. It
will be noticed that ridge A does not begin on the edge of the print, but this
is of no significance. The ridge A within the pattern area recurves or loops,
passing the imaginary line between the delta and the core, and tends to
terminate toward the same side of the impression from whence it entered.
This is a loop pattern possessing all of the requirements.
[Fig. 68]
Page 48
In figures 69 and 70, it will be observed that there is a ridge entering on one
side of the pattern which recurves and then turns back on itself. These
patterns are different from any others which have been shown in this respect
but are classified as loops. In each of the patterns the core and delta are
marked "C" and "D". The reader should trace the type lines in order to
ascertain why the delta is located at point D, and then apply the delta rule.
[Fig. 69]
[Fig. 70]
side of the pattern which recurves and then turns back on itself. These
patterns are different from any others which have been shown in this respect
but are classified as loops. In each of the patterns the core and delta are
marked "C" and "D". The reader should trace the type lines in order to
ascertain why the delta is located at point D, and then apply the delta rule.
[Fig. 69]
[Fig. 70]
Page 49
Figure 71 is an example of loops as they appear on the rolled impression
portion of a fingerprint card.
[Fig. 71]
[Enlarge]
Ridge counting
The number of ridges intervening between the delta and the core is known
as the ridge count. The technical employees of the Federal Bureau of
Investigation count each ridge which crosses or touches an imaginary line
drawn from the delta to the core. Neither delta nor core is counted. A red
line upon the reticule of the fingerprint glass is used to insure absolute
accuracy. In the event there is a bifurcation of a ridge exactly at the point
where the imaginary line would be drawn, two ridges are counted. Where
the line crosses an island, both sides are counted. Fragments and dots are
counted as ridges only if they appear to be as thick and heavy as the other
portion of a fingerprint card.
[Fig. 71]
[Enlarge]
Ridge counting
The number of ridges intervening between the delta and the core is known
as the ridge count. The technical employees of the Federal Bureau of
Investigation count each ridge which crosses or touches an imaginary line
drawn from the delta to the core. Neither delta nor core is counted. A red
line upon the reticule of the fingerprint glass is used to insure absolute
accuracy. In the event there is a bifurcation of a ridge exactly at the point
where the imaginary line would be drawn, two ridges are counted. Where
the line crosses an island, both sides are counted. Fragments and dots are
counted as ridges only if they appear to be as thick and heavy as the other
Page 50
ridges in the immediate pattern. Variations in inking and pressure must, of
course, be considered.
Figures 72 to 97 and figures 98 to 101 show various loop patterns. The
reader should examine each one carefully in order to study the cores and
deltas and to verify the count which has been placed below each pattern.
course, be considered.
Figures 72 to 97 and figures 98 to 101 show various loop patterns. The
reader should examine each one carefully in order to study the cores and
deltas and to verify the count which has been placed below each pattern.
Page 51
Page 52
Page 53
Page 54
Page 55
[Figs. 72-101]
Figure 102 is a sketch reflecting the various types of ridges which the
classifier will encounter when engaging in counting loop patterns.
Figure 102 is a sketch reflecting the various types of ridges which the
classifier will encounter when engaging in counting loop patterns.
Page 56
[Fig. 102]
In figure 103, the lighter lines are caused by the splitting or fraying of the
ridges. Sometimes ingrained dirt will cause a similar condition between the
ridges. These lines are not considered ridges and should not be counted.
In figure 103, the lighter lines are caused by the splitting or fraying of the
ridges. Sometimes ingrained dirt will cause a similar condition between the
ridges. These lines are not considered ridges and should not be counted.
Page 57
[Fig. 103]
In figure 104, the dot is not the delta because it is not as thick and heavy as
the other ridges and might not be present if the finger were not perfectly
inked and printed.
[Fig. 104]
When the core is located on a spike which touches the inside of the
innermost recurving ridge, the recurve is included in the ridge count only
when the delta is located below a line drawn at right angles to the spike.
Figures 105 and 106 are examples of this rule.
In figure 104, the dot is not the delta because it is not as thick and heavy as
the other ridges and might not be present if the finger were not perfectly
inked and printed.
[Fig. 104]
When the core is located on a spike which touches the inside of the
innermost recurving ridge, the recurve is included in the ridge count only
when the delta is located below a line drawn at right angles to the spike.
Figures 105 and 106 are examples of this rule.
Page 58
[Figs. 105-106]
If the delta is located in areas A, the recurving ridge is counted.
If the delta is located in areas B, the recurving ridge is not counted.
Radial and ulnar loops
The terms "radial" and "ulnar" are derived from the radius and ulna bones
of the forearm. Loops which flow in the direction of the ulna bone (toward
the little finger) are called ulnar loops and those which flow in the direction
of the radius bone are called radial loops.
For test purposes, fingers of the right hand may be placed on the
corresponding print of the right hand appearing in figure 71, and it will be
noticed that the side of each finger which is nearer to the thumb on the hand
is also nearer to the thumb on the fingerprint card. Place the fingers of the
left hand on the corresponding prints of the left hand shown in figure 71. It
will be noticed that the arrangement of the prints on the card is the reverse
of the arrangement of the fingers on the hand. The classification of loops is
based on the way the loops flow on the hand (not the card), so that on the
fingerprint card for the left hand, loops flowing toward the thumb
impression are ulnar, and loops flowing toward the little finger impression
are radial.
The plain arch
If the delta is located in areas A, the recurving ridge is counted.
If the delta is located in areas B, the recurving ridge is not counted.
Radial and ulnar loops
The terms "radial" and "ulnar" are derived from the radius and ulna bones
of the forearm. Loops which flow in the direction of the ulna bone (toward
the little finger) are called ulnar loops and those which flow in the direction
of the radius bone are called radial loops.
For test purposes, fingers of the right hand may be placed on the
corresponding print of the right hand appearing in figure 71, and it will be
noticed that the side of each finger which is nearer to the thumb on the hand
is also nearer to the thumb on the fingerprint card. Place the fingers of the
left hand on the corresponding prints of the left hand shown in figure 71. It
will be noticed that the arrangement of the prints on the card is the reverse
of the arrangement of the fingers on the hand. The classification of loops is
based on the way the loops flow on the hand (not the card), so that on the
fingerprint card for the left hand, loops flowing toward the thumb
impression are ulnar, and loops flowing toward the little finger impression
are radial.
The plain arch
Page 59
In plain arches the ridges enter on one side of the impression and flow or
tend to flow out the other with a rise or wave in the center. The plain arch is
the most simple of all fingerprint patterns, and it is easily distinguished.
Figures 107 to 118 are examples of the plain arch. It will be noted that there
may be various ridge formations such as ending ridges, bifurcations, dots
and islands involved in this type of pattern, but they all tend to follow the
general ridge contour; i.e., they enter on one side, make a rise or wave in
the center, and flow or tend to flow out the other side.
tend to flow out the other with a rise or wave in the center. The plain arch is
the most simple of all fingerprint patterns, and it is easily distinguished.
Figures 107 to 118 are examples of the plain arch. It will be noted that there
may be various ridge formations such as ending ridges, bifurcations, dots
and islands involved in this type of pattern, but they all tend to follow the
general ridge contour; i.e., they enter on one side, make a rise or wave in
the center, and flow or tend to flow out the other side.
Page 60
Page 61
[Figs. 107-118]
Figures 119 and 120 are examples of plain arches which approximate tented
arches. Also, figure 121 is a plain arch approximating a tented arch as the
rising ridge cannot be considered an upthrust because it is a continuous, and
not an ending, ridge. (See following explanation of the tented arch.)
Figures 119 and 120 are examples of plain arches which approximate tented
arches. Also, figure 121 is a plain arch approximating a tented arch as the
rising ridge cannot be considered an upthrust because it is a continuous, and
not an ending, ridge. (See following explanation of the tented arch.)
Page 62
[Figs. 119-121]
The tented arch
In the tented arch, most of the ridges enter upon one side of the impression
and flow or tend to flow out upon the other side, as in the plain arch type;
however, the ridge or ridges at the center do not. There are three types of
tented arches:
● The type in which ridges at the center form a definite angle; i.e., 90° or
less.
● The type in which one or more ridges at the center form an upthrust. An
upthrust is an ending ridge of any length rising at a sufficient degree from
the horizontal plane; i.e., 45° or more.
The tented arch
In the tented arch, most of the ridges enter upon one side of the impression
and flow or tend to flow out upon the other side, as in the plain arch type;
however, the ridge or ridges at the center do not. There are three types of
tented arches:
● The type in which ridges at the center form a definite angle; i.e., 90° or
less.
● The type in which one or more ridges at the center form an upthrust. An
upthrust is an ending ridge of any length rising at a sufficient degree from
the horizontal plane; i.e., 45° or more.
Page 63
● The type approaching the loop type, possessing two of the basic or
essential characteristics of the loop, but lacking the third.
Figures 122 to 133 are examples of the tented arch.
essential characteristics of the loop, but lacking the third.
Figures 122 to 133 are examples of the tented arch.
Page 64
Page 65
[Figs. 122-133]
Figures 122 to 124 are of the type possessing an angle.
Figures 125 to 129 reflect the type possessing an upthrust.
Figures 130 to 133 show the type approaching the loop but lacking one
characteristic.
Tented arches and some forms of the loop are often confused. It should be
remembered by the reader that the mere converging of two ridges does not
form a recurve, without which there can be no loop. On the other hand,
there are many patterns which at first sight resemble tented arches but
which on close inspection are found to be loops, as where one looping ridge
will be found in an almost vertical position within the pattern area, entirely
free from and passing in front of the delta.
Figure 134 is a tented arch. The ridge marked "A—A" in the sketch enters
on one side of the impression and flows to the other with an acute rise in the
center. Ridge C strikes into A at point B and should not be considered as a
bifurcating ridge. The ridges marked "D—D" would form a tented arch if
the rest of the pattern were absent.
Figures 122 to 124 are of the type possessing an angle.
Figures 125 to 129 reflect the type possessing an upthrust.
Figures 130 to 133 show the type approaching the loop but lacking one
characteristic.
Tented arches and some forms of the loop are often confused. It should be
remembered by the reader that the mere converging of two ridges does not
form a recurve, without which there can be no loop. On the other hand,
there are many patterns which at first sight resemble tented arches but
which on close inspection are found to be loops, as where one looping ridge
will be found in an almost vertical position within the pattern area, entirely
free from and passing in front of the delta.
Figure 134 is a tented arch. The ridge marked "A—A" in the sketch enters
on one side of the impression and flows to the other with an acute rise in the
center. Ridge C strikes into A at point B and should not be considered as a
bifurcating ridge. The ridges marked "D—D" would form a tented arch if
the rest of the pattern were absent.
Page 66
[Fig. 134]
Figure 135 is a sketch of a pattern reflecting a ridge, A—B, entering on one
side of the impression, recurving, and making its exit on the other side of
the impression. The reader should study this sketch carefully. It should be
borne in mind that there must be a ridge entering on one side of the
impression and recurving in order to make its exit on the same side from
which it entered, or having a tendency to make its exit on that side, before a
pattern can be considered for possible classification as a loop. This pattern
is a tented arch of the upthrust type. The upthrust is C. There is also an
angle at E. D cannot be termed as a delta, as the ridge to the left of D cannot
be considered a type line because it does not diverge from the ridge to the
right of D but turns and goes in the same direction.
[Fig. 135]
Figure 135 is a sketch of a pattern reflecting a ridge, A—B, entering on one
side of the impression, recurving, and making its exit on the other side of
the impression. The reader should study this sketch carefully. It should be
borne in mind that there must be a ridge entering on one side of the
impression and recurving in order to make its exit on the same side from
which it entered, or having a tendency to make its exit on that side, before a
pattern can be considered for possible classification as a loop. This pattern
is a tented arch of the upthrust type. The upthrust is C. There is also an
angle at E. D cannot be termed as a delta, as the ridge to the left of D cannot
be considered a type line because it does not diverge from the ridge to the
right of D but turns and goes in the same direction.
[Fig. 135]
Page 67
In connection with the types of tented arches, the reader is referred to the
third type. This form of tented arch, the one which approaches the loop,
may have any combination of two of the three basic loop characteristics,
lacking the third. These three loop characteristics are, to repeat:
● A sufficient recurve.
● A delta.
● A ridge count across a looping ridge.
It must be remembered that a recurve must be free of any appendage
abutting upon it at a right angle between the shoulders, and a true ridge
count is obtained only by crossing a looping ridge freely, with a white space
intervening between the delta and the ridge to be counted.
Figures 136 and 137 are tented arches having loop formations within the
pattern area but with deltas upon the loops, by reason of which it is
impossible to secure a ridge count. The type lines run parallel from the left
in figures 136 and 137. These tented arches have two of the loop
characteristics, recurve and delta, but lack the third, the ridge count.
[Figs. 136-137]
In figure 138, the reader will note the similarity to the figures 136 and 137.
The only difference is that in this figure the type lines are running parallel
from the right. It will be noted from these three patterns that the spaces
third type. This form of tented arch, the one which approaches the loop,
may have any combination of two of the three basic loop characteristics,
lacking the third. These three loop characteristics are, to repeat:
● A sufficient recurve.
● A delta.
● A ridge count across a looping ridge.
It must be remembered that a recurve must be free of any appendage
abutting upon it at a right angle between the shoulders, and a true ridge
count is obtained only by crossing a looping ridge freely, with a white space
intervening between the delta and the ridge to be counted.
Figures 136 and 137 are tented arches having loop formations within the
pattern area but with deltas upon the loops, by reason of which it is
impossible to secure a ridge count. The type lines run parallel from the left
in figures 136 and 137. These tented arches have two of the loop
characteristics, recurve and delta, but lack the third, the ridge count.
[Figs. 136-137]
In figure 138, the reader will note the similarity to the figures 136 and 137.
The only difference is that in this figure the type lines are running parallel
from the right. It will be noted from these three patterns that the spaces
Page 68
between the type lines at their divergence show nothing which could be
considered as delta formations except the looping ridges. Such patterns are
classified as tented arches because the ridge count necessary for a loop is
lacking.
[Fig. 138]
Figure 139 is an example of a tented arch. In this pattern, if the looping
ridge approached the vertical it could possibly be a one-count loop. Once
studied, however, the pattern presents no real difficulty. There are no ridges
intervening between the delta, which is formed by a bifurcation, and the
core. It will be noted that the core, in this case, is at the center of the
recurve, unlike those loops which are broadside to the delta and in which
the core is placed upon the shoulder. This pattern has a recurve and a
separate delta, but it still lacks the ridge count necessary to make it a loop.
considered as delta formations except the looping ridges. Such patterns are
classified as tented arches because the ridge count necessary for a loop is
lacking.
[Fig. 138]
Figure 139 is an example of a tented arch. In this pattern, if the looping
ridge approached the vertical it could possibly be a one-count loop. Once
studied, however, the pattern presents no real difficulty. There are no ridges
intervening between the delta, which is formed by a bifurcation, and the
core. It will be noted that the core, in this case, is at the center of the
recurve, unlike those loops which are broadside to the delta and in which
the core is placed upon the shoulder. This pattern has a recurve and a
separate delta, but it still lacks the ridge count necessary to make it a loop.
Page 69
[Fig. 139]
Figures 140 and 141 are examples of tented arches. These two figures are
similar in many ways. Each of these prints has three abrupt ending ridges
but lacks a recurve; however, in figure 141 a delta is present in addition to
the three abrupt ending ridges. This condition does not exist in figure 140,
where the lower ending ridge is the delta.
[Figs. 140-141]
When interpreting a pattern consisting of two ending ridges and a delta but
lacking a recurve, do not confuse the ridge count of the tented arch with that
Figures 140 and 141 are examples of tented arches. These two figures are
similar in many ways. Each of these prints has three abrupt ending ridges
but lacks a recurve; however, in figure 141 a delta is present in addition to
the three abrupt ending ridges. This condition does not exist in figure 140,
where the lower ending ridge is the delta.
[Figs. 140-141]
When interpreting a pattern consisting of two ending ridges and a delta but
lacking a recurve, do not confuse the ridge count of the tented arch with that
Page 70
of the ridge count for the loop. The ridge count of the tented arch is merely
a convention of fingerprinting, a fiction designed to facilitate a scientific
classification of tented arches, and has no connection with a loop. To obtain
a true ridge count there must be a looping ridge which is crossed freely by
an imaginary line drawn between the delta and the core. The ridge count
referred to as such in connection with the tented arches possessing ending
ridges and no recurve is obtained by imagining that the ending ridges are
joined by a recurve only for the purpose of locating the core and obtaining a
ridge count. If this point is secure in the mind of the classifier, little
difficulty will be encountered.
Figures 140 and 141, then, are tented arches because they have two of the
characteristics of a loop, delta and ridge count, but lack the third, the
recurve.
Figure 142 is a loop formation connected with the delta but having no ridge
count across a looping ridge. By drawing an imaginary line from the core,
which is at the top of the rod in the center of the pattern, to the delta, it will
be noted that there is no recurving ridge passing between this rod and the
delta; and, therefore, no ridge count can result. This pattern is classified as a
tented arch. There must be a white space between the delta and the first
ridge counted, or it may not be counted. Figure 143 is also a tented arch
because no ridge count across a looping ridge can be obtained, the
bifurcations being connected to each other and to the loop in a straight line
between delta and core. The looping ridge is not crossed freely. No white
space intervenes between the delta and the loop. These patterns are tented
arches because they possess two of the characteristics of a loop, a delta and
a recurve, but lack the third, a ridge count across a looping ridge.
a convention of fingerprinting, a fiction designed to facilitate a scientific
classification of tented arches, and has no connection with a loop. To obtain
a true ridge count there must be a looping ridge which is crossed freely by
an imaginary line drawn between the delta and the core. The ridge count
referred to as such in connection with the tented arches possessing ending
ridges and no recurve is obtained by imagining that the ending ridges are
joined by a recurve only for the purpose of locating the core and obtaining a
ridge count. If this point is secure in the mind of the classifier, little
difficulty will be encountered.
Figures 140 and 141, then, are tented arches because they have two of the
characteristics of a loop, delta and ridge count, but lack the third, the
recurve.
Figure 142 is a loop formation connected with the delta but having no ridge
count across a looping ridge. By drawing an imaginary line from the core,
which is at the top of the rod in the center of the pattern, to the delta, it will
be noted that there is no recurving ridge passing between this rod and the
delta; and, therefore, no ridge count can result. This pattern is classified as a
tented arch. There must be a white space between the delta and the first
ridge counted, or it may not be counted. Figure 143 is also a tented arch
because no ridge count across a looping ridge can be obtained, the
bifurcations being connected to each other and to the loop in a straight line
between delta and core. The looping ridge is not crossed freely. No white
space intervenes between the delta and the loop. These patterns are tented
arches because they possess two of the characteristics of a loop, a delta and
a recurve, but lack the third, a ridge count across a looping ridge.
Page 71
[Figs. 142-143]
Figure 144 is a tented arch combining two of the types. There is an angle
formed by ridge a abutting upon ridge b. There are also the elements of the
type approaching a loop, as it has a delta and ridge count but lacks a
recurve.
[Fig. 144]
Figures 145 to 148 are tented arches because of the angles formed by the
abutting ridges at the center of the patterns.
Figure 144 is a tented arch combining two of the types. There is an angle
formed by ridge a abutting upon ridge b. There are also the elements of the
type approaching a loop, as it has a delta and ridge count but lacks a
recurve.
[Fig. 144]
Figures 145 to 148 are tented arches because of the angles formed by the
abutting ridges at the center of the patterns.
Page 72
[Figs. 145-148]
Figure 149 is a tented arch because of the upthrust present at the center of
the pattern. The presence of the slightest upthrust at the center of the
impression is enough to make a pattern a tented arch.
[Fig. 149]
An upthrust must be an ending ridge. If continuous as in figure 150, no
angle being present, the pattern is classified as a plain arch.
Figure 149 is a tented arch because of the upthrust present at the center of
the pattern. The presence of the slightest upthrust at the center of the
impression is enough to make a pattern a tented arch.
[Fig. 149]
An upthrust must be an ending ridge. If continuous as in figure 150, no
angle being present, the pattern is classified as a plain arch.
Page 73
[Fig. 150]
Figures 151 to 153 are plain arches. Figure 154 is a tented arch.
[Figs. 151-154]
Figures 151 to 153 are plain arches. Figure 154 is a tented arch.
[Figs. 151-154]
Page 74
Figure 155 is a plain arch because it is readily seen that the apparent
upthrust A is a continuation of the curving ridge B. Figure 156 is a tented
arch because ridge A is an independent upthrust, and not a continuation of
ridge B.
[Figs. 155-156]
Figures 157 and 158 are plain arches. Figure 158 cannot be said to be a
looping ridge, because by definition a loop must pass out or tend to pass out
upon the side from which it entered. This apparent loop passes out upon the
opposite side and cannot be said to tend to flow out upon the same side.
[Figs. 157-158]
In figures 159 and 160, there are ending ridges rising at about the same
degree from the horizontal plane.
upthrust A is a continuation of the curving ridge B. Figure 156 is a tented
arch because ridge A is an independent upthrust, and not a continuation of
ridge B.
[Figs. 155-156]
Figures 157 and 158 are plain arches. Figure 158 cannot be said to be a
looping ridge, because by definition a loop must pass out or tend to pass out
upon the side from which it entered. This apparent loop passes out upon the
opposite side and cannot be said to tend to flow out upon the same side.
[Figs. 157-158]
In figures 159 and 160, there are ending ridges rising at about the same
degree from the horizontal plane.
Page 75
[Figs. 159-160]
Figure 159, however, is a plain arch, while 160 is a tented arch. This
differentiation is necessary because, if the first pattern were printed
crookedly upon the fingerprint card so that the ending ridge was nearer the
horizontal plane, there would be no way to ascertain the true horizontal
plane of the pattern (if the fissure of the finger did not appear). In other
words, there would be no means of knowing that there was sufficient rise to
be called an upthrust, so that it is safe to classify the print as a plain arch
only. In figure 160, however, no matter how it is printed, the presence of a
sufficient rise could always be ascertained because of the space intervening
between the ending ridge and the ridge immediately beneath it, so that it is
safe to classify such a pattern as a tented arch. The test is, if the ridges on
both sides of the ending ridge follow its direction or flow trend, the print
may be classified as a plain arch. If, however, the ridges on only one side
follow its direction, the print is a tented arch.
An upthrust, then, must not only be an ending ridge rising at a sufficient
degree from the horizontal plane, but there must also be a space between
the ending ridge and the ridge immediately beneath it. This, however, is not
necessary for a short upthrust or spike, or any upthrust which rises
perpendicularly.
In connection with the proper classification to be assigned to those
borderline loop-tented arch cases where an appendage or spike is thrusting
out from the recurve, it is necessary to remember that an appendage or a
Figure 159, however, is a plain arch, while 160 is a tented arch. This
differentiation is necessary because, if the first pattern were printed
crookedly upon the fingerprint card so that the ending ridge was nearer the
horizontal plane, there would be no way to ascertain the true horizontal
plane of the pattern (if the fissure of the finger did not appear). In other
words, there would be no means of knowing that there was sufficient rise to
be called an upthrust, so that it is safe to classify the print as a plain arch
only. In figure 160, however, no matter how it is printed, the presence of a
sufficient rise could always be ascertained because of the space intervening
between the ending ridge and the ridge immediately beneath it, so that it is
safe to classify such a pattern as a tented arch. The test is, if the ridges on
both sides of the ending ridge follow its direction or flow trend, the print
may be classified as a plain arch. If, however, the ridges on only one side
follow its direction, the print is a tented arch.
An upthrust, then, must not only be an ending ridge rising at a sufficient
degree from the horizontal plane, but there must also be a space between
the ending ridge and the ridge immediately beneath it. This, however, is not
necessary for a short upthrust or spike, or any upthrust which rises
perpendicularly.
In connection with the proper classification to be assigned to those
borderline loop-tented arch cases where an appendage or spike is thrusting
out from the recurve, it is necessary to remember that an appendage or a
Page 76
spike abutting upon a recurve at right angles in the space between the
shoulders of a loop on the outside is considered to spoil the recurve.
If the appending ridge flows off the looping ridge smoothly in such a way
that it forms a bifurcation and not an abutment of two ridges at a right
angle, the recurve is considered as remaining intact. The test is to trace the
looping ridge toward the appendage, and if, when it is reached, the tracing
may be continued as readily upon the appendage as upon the looping ridge,
with no sudden, sharp change of direction, the recurve is sufficient. Figures
161 to 184 should be studied with this in mind.
shoulders of a loop on the outside is considered to spoil the recurve.
If the appending ridge flows off the looping ridge smoothly in such a way
that it forms a bifurcation and not an abutment of two ridges at a right
angle, the recurve is considered as remaining intact. The test is to trace the
looping ridge toward the appendage, and if, when it is reached, the tracing
may be continued as readily upon the appendage as upon the looping ridge,
with no sudden, sharp change of direction, the recurve is sufficient. Figures
161 to 184 should be studied with this in mind.
Page 77
Page 78
Page 79
[Figs. 161-184]
Figures 185 to 190 show additional examples of tented arches.
Figures 185 to 190 show additional examples of tented arches.
Page 80
[Figs. 185-190]
The reason that figure 185 is given the classification of a tented arch is
because of the presence of all the loop requirements with the exception of
one, which is the recurve. In this pattern appear three ending ridges. The
lowest ending ridge provides the delta, and the other two by the convention
explained previously, provide the ridge count. It is a tented arch, then, of the
type approaching the loop, with two of the characteristics, but lacking the
third, a recurve. Figures 186 and 187 are tented arches of the same type. A
close examination of these prints will reveal that when the imaginary line is
drawn between delta and core no ridge count across a looping ridge can be
obtained. It must be remembered that the core of a loop may not be placed
below the shoulder line. Lacking one of the three characteristics of a loop,
these patterns must be classified as tented arches. When figure 188 is
examined, it will be noticed that the recurve is spoiled by the appendage
abutting upon it between the shoulders at a right angle, so it must also be
classified with the tented arches. In figure 189, the only possible delta must
The reason that figure 185 is given the classification of a tented arch is
because of the presence of all the loop requirements with the exception of
one, which is the recurve. In this pattern appear three ending ridges. The
lowest ending ridge provides the delta, and the other two by the convention
explained previously, provide the ridge count. It is a tented arch, then, of the
type approaching the loop, with two of the characteristics, but lacking the
third, a recurve. Figures 186 and 187 are tented arches of the same type. A
close examination of these prints will reveal that when the imaginary line is
drawn between delta and core no ridge count across a looping ridge can be
obtained. It must be remembered that the core of a loop may not be placed
below the shoulder line. Lacking one of the three characteristics of a loop,
these patterns must be classified as tented arches. When figure 188 is
examined, it will be noticed that the recurve is spoiled by the appendage
abutting upon it between the shoulders at a right angle, so it must also be
classified with the tented arches. In figure 189, the only possible delta must
Page 81
be placed upon the looping ridge, thus preventing a ridge count although
delta and recurve are present. Figure 190 is assigned the classification of a
tented arch. One of the requirements of a loop type is that the ridge enters
on one side, recurves, and makes its exit on the side from which it entered.
This, of course, makes it necessary that the ridge pass between the delta and
the core. It will be noted from this figure that although this ridge passes
between the delta and the core, it does not show any tendency to make its
exit on the side from which it entered, and therefore the loop classification
is precluded, and it is a tented arch.
The whorl
The patterns to which numerical values are assigned in deriving the
"primary" in the extension of the Henry System of fingerprint classification
used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation are the whorl-type patterns,
which occur in about 30 percent of all fingerprints.
The whorl is that type of pattern in which at least two deltas are present
with a recurve in front in each. Figures 191 to 193 reflect the minimum
requirements for the whorl.
[Figs. 191-193]
It is important to note that the above definition is very general; however,
this pattern may be subdivided for extension purposes in large groups where
whorls are predominant. Even though this extension may be used, all types
of whorls are grouped together under the general classification of "Whorl"
and are designated by the letter "W".
delta and recurve are present. Figure 190 is assigned the classification of a
tented arch. One of the requirements of a loop type is that the ridge enters
on one side, recurves, and makes its exit on the side from which it entered.
This, of course, makes it necessary that the ridge pass between the delta and
the core. It will be noted from this figure that although this ridge passes
between the delta and the core, it does not show any tendency to make its
exit on the side from which it entered, and therefore the loop classification
is precluded, and it is a tented arch.
The whorl
The patterns to which numerical values are assigned in deriving the
"primary" in the extension of the Henry System of fingerprint classification
used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation are the whorl-type patterns,
which occur in about 30 percent of all fingerprints.
The whorl is that type of pattern in which at least two deltas are present
with a recurve in front in each. Figures 191 to 193 reflect the minimum
requirements for the whorl.
[Figs. 191-193]
It is important to note that the above definition is very general; however,
this pattern may be subdivided for extension purposes in large groups where
whorls are predominant. Even though this extension may be used, all types
of whorls are grouped together under the general classification of "Whorl"
and are designated by the letter "W".
Page 82
The aforementioned subdivisions are as follows: The Plain Whorl, The
Central Pocket Loop, The Double Loop, and The Accidental.
The plain whorl
The "plain whorl" consists of the simplest form of whorl construction and is
the most common of the whorl subdivisions. It is designated by the symbol
"W" for both general classification and extension purposes.
The plain whorl has two deltas and at least one ridge making a complete
circuit, which may be spiral, oval, circular, or any variant of a circle. An
imaginary line drawn between the two deltas must touch or cross at least
one of the recurving ridges within the inner pattern area. A recurving ridge,
however, which has an appendage connected with it in the line of flow
cannot be construed as a circuit. An appendage connected at that point is
considered to spoil the recurve on that side.
Figures 194 to 211 are typical examples of the plain whorl type. Figure 212
is, however, a loop, as the circuit is spoiled on one side by an appendage.
Central Pocket Loop, The Double Loop, and The Accidental.
The plain whorl
The "plain whorl" consists of the simplest form of whorl construction and is
the most common of the whorl subdivisions. It is designated by the symbol
"W" for both general classification and extension purposes.
The plain whorl has two deltas and at least one ridge making a complete
circuit, which may be spiral, oval, circular, or any variant of a circle. An
imaginary line drawn between the two deltas must touch or cross at least
one of the recurving ridges within the inner pattern area. A recurving ridge,
however, which has an appendage connected with it in the line of flow
cannot be construed as a circuit. An appendage connected at that point is
considered to spoil the recurve on that side.
Figures 194 to 211 are typical examples of the plain whorl type. Figure 212
is, however, a loop, as the circuit is spoiled on one side by an appendage.
Page 83
Page 84
Page 85
Page 86
[Figs. 194-212]
Central pocket loop
Within the whorl group, the subclassification type "central pocket loop" is
used for extension purposes only. In general classification it is designated
by the letter "W". Figures 213 to 236 are central pocket loops.
Central pocket loop
Within the whorl group, the subclassification type "central pocket loop" is
used for extension purposes only. In general classification it is designated
by the letter "W". Figures 213 to 236 are central pocket loops.
Page 87
Page 88
Page 89
Page 90
[Figs. 213-236]
The central pocket loop type of whorl has two deltas and at least one ridge
making a complete circuit, which may be spiral, oval, circular, or any
variant of a circle. An imaginary line drawn between the two deltas must
The central pocket loop type of whorl has two deltas and at least one ridge
making a complete circuit, which may be spiral, oval, circular, or any
variant of a circle. An imaginary line drawn between the two deltas must
Page 91
not touch or cross any of the recurving ridges within the inner pattern area.
A recurving ridge, however, which has an appendage connected with it in
the line of flow and on the delta side cannot be construed as a circuit. An
appendage connected at that point is considered to spoil the recurve on that
side.
In lieu of a recurve in front of the delta in the inner pattern area, an
obstruction at right angles to the line of flow will suffice.
It is necessary that the inner line of flow be fixed artificially. The inner line
of flow is determined by drawing an imaginary line between the inner delta
and the center of the innermost recurve or looping ridge.
In the central pocket loop, one or more of the simple recurves of the plain
loop type usually recurve a second time to form a pocket within the loop.
The second recurve, however, need not be a continuation of—or even
connected with—the first. It may be an independent ridge.
If no second recurve is present, an obstruction at right angles to the inner
line of flow is acceptable in lieu of it. An obstruction may be either curved
or straight. A dot, of course, may not be considered an obstruction.
The definition does not require a recurve to cross the line of flow at right
angles. The angle test needs to be applied to obstructions only.
The recurve or obstruction of the central pocket loop, as that of the plain
whorl, must be free of any appendage connected to it at the point crossed by
the line of flow and on the delta side. An appendage at that point is
considered to spoil the recurve or obstruction.
Figures 237 and 238 are also central pocket loops despite the appendages
connected to the recurves, because they are not connected at the point
crossed by the line of flow.
A recurving ridge, however, which has an appendage connected with it in
the line of flow and on the delta side cannot be construed as a circuit. An
appendage connected at that point is considered to spoil the recurve on that
side.
In lieu of a recurve in front of the delta in the inner pattern area, an
obstruction at right angles to the line of flow will suffice.
It is necessary that the inner line of flow be fixed artificially. The inner line
of flow is determined by drawing an imaginary line between the inner delta
and the center of the innermost recurve or looping ridge.
In the central pocket loop, one or more of the simple recurves of the plain
loop type usually recurve a second time to form a pocket within the loop.
The second recurve, however, need not be a continuation of—or even
connected with—the first. It may be an independent ridge.
If no second recurve is present, an obstruction at right angles to the inner
line of flow is acceptable in lieu of it. An obstruction may be either curved
or straight. A dot, of course, may not be considered an obstruction.
The definition does not require a recurve to cross the line of flow at right
angles. The angle test needs to be applied to obstructions only.
The recurve or obstruction of the central pocket loop, as that of the plain
whorl, must be free of any appendage connected to it at the point crossed by
the line of flow and on the delta side. An appendage at that point is
considered to spoil the recurve or obstruction.
Figures 237 and 238 are also central pocket loops despite the appendages
connected to the recurves, because they are not connected at the point
crossed by the line of flow.
Page 92
[Figs. 237-238]
Figure 239, although possessing a recurve, is classified as a loop because
the second delta is located on the only recurving ridge.
[Fig. 239]
Figures 240 to 244, although possessing one delta and a delta formation, are
classified as loops because the obstructions do not cross the line of flow at
right angles.
Figure 239, although possessing a recurve, is classified as a loop because
the second delta is located on the only recurving ridge.
[Fig. 239]
Figures 240 to 244, although possessing one delta and a delta formation, are
classified as loops because the obstructions do not cross the line of flow at
right angles.
Page 93
[Figs. 240-244]
Figures 245 to 254 have two deltas and one or more recurves, but they are
classified as loops because each recurve is spoiled by an appendage
connected to it at the point crossed by the line of flow.
Figures 245 to 254 have two deltas and one or more recurves, but they are
classified as loops because each recurve is spoiled by an appendage
connected to it at the point crossed by the line of flow.
Page 94
Page 95
[Figs. 245-254]
Double loop
Within the whorl group, the subclassification type "double loop" is used for
extension purposes only. In general classification it is designated by the
Double loop
Within the whorl group, the subclassification type "double loop" is used for
extension purposes only. In general classification it is designated by the
Page 96
letter "W".
The double loop consists of two separate loop formations, with two
separate and distinct sets of shoulders, and two deltas.
The word "separate," as used here, does not mean unconnected. The two
loops may be connected by an appending ridge provided that it does not
abut at right angles between the shoulders of the loop formation. The
appendage rule for the loop applies also to the double loop. An appendage
abutting upon a loop at right angles between the shoulders is considered to
spoil the loop, while an appendage which flows off smoothly is considered
to leave the recurve intact.
The fact that there must be two separate loop formations eliminates from
consideration as a double loop the "S" type core, the interlocking type core,
and the formation with one loop inside another.
The loops of a double loop do not have to conform to the requirements of
the loop. In other words, no ridge count is necessary.
It is not essential that both sides of a loop be of equal length, nor that the
two loops be of the same size. Neither is it material from which side the
loops enter.
The distinction between twinned loops and lateral pocket loops made by
Henry and adopted by other authors has been abandoned by the Federal
Bureau of Investigation because of the difficulty in locating and tracing the
loops. Both types have been consolidated under the classification "double
loop."
Figures 255 to 266 are double loops.
The double loop consists of two separate loop formations, with two
separate and distinct sets of shoulders, and two deltas.
The word "separate," as used here, does not mean unconnected. The two
loops may be connected by an appending ridge provided that it does not
abut at right angles between the shoulders of the loop formation. The
appendage rule for the loop applies also to the double loop. An appendage
abutting upon a loop at right angles between the shoulders is considered to
spoil the loop, while an appendage which flows off smoothly is considered
to leave the recurve intact.
The fact that there must be two separate loop formations eliminates from
consideration as a double loop the "S" type core, the interlocking type core,
and the formation with one loop inside another.
The loops of a double loop do not have to conform to the requirements of
the loop. In other words, no ridge count is necessary.
It is not essential that both sides of a loop be of equal length, nor that the
two loops be of the same size. Neither is it material from which side the
loops enter.
The distinction between twinned loops and lateral pocket loops made by
Henry and adopted by other authors has been abandoned by the Federal
Bureau of Investigation because of the difficulty in locating and tracing the
loops. Both types have been consolidated under the classification "double
loop."
Figures 255 to 266 are double loops.
Page 97
Page 98
Page 99
[Figs. 255-266]
Figure 267 is a plain whorl. It is not classified as a double loop as one side
of one loop forms the side of the other. Figure 268 is a plain loop. It is not a
double loop because all of the recurves of the loop on the right are spoiled
by appendages.
Figure 267 is a plain whorl. It is not classified as a double loop as one side
of one loop forms the side of the other. Figure 268 is a plain loop. It is not a
double loop because all of the recurves of the loop on the right are spoiled
by appendages.
Page 100
[Figs. 267-268]
Accidental
Within the whorl group the subdivision type "accidental" is used for
extension purposes only. In general classification it is designated by the
letter "W" and for extension purposes by the letter "X".
The accidental whorl is a pattern consisting of a combination of two
different types of pattern, with the exception of the plain arch, with two or
more deltas; or a pattern which possesses some of the requirements for two
or more different types; or a pattern which conforms to none of the
definitions. It may be a combination of loop and tented arch, loop and
whorl, loop and central pocket loop, double loop and central pocket loop, or
other such combinations. The plain arch is excluded as it is rather the
absence of pattern than a pattern. Underneath every pattern there are ridges
running from one side to the other, so that if it were not excluded every
pattern but the plain arch would be an accidental whorl.
This subclassification also includes those exceedingly unusual patterns
which may not be placed by definition into any other classes.
Figures 269 to 271 are accidentals combining a loop with a tented arch.
Figures 272 to 276 combine a loop and a plain whorl or central pocket loop.
Figure 277 combines a loop and a double loop. Figure 278 combines a loop
Accidental
Within the whorl group the subdivision type "accidental" is used for
extension purposes only. In general classification it is designated by the
letter "W" and for extension purposes by the letter "X".
The accidental whorl is a pattern consisting of a combination of two
different types of pattern, with the exception of the plain arch, with two or
more deltas; or a pattern which possesses some of the requirements for two
or more different types; or a pattern which conforms to none of the
definitions. It may be a combination of loop and tented arch, loop and
whorl, loop and central pocket loop, double loop and central pocket loop, or
other such combinations. The plain arch is excluded as it is rather the
absence of pattern than a pattern. Underneath every pattern there are ridges
running from one side to the other, so that if it were not excluded every
pattern but the plain arch would be an accidental whorl.
This subclassification also includes those exceedingly unusual patterns
which may not be placed by definition into any other classes.
Figures 269 to 271 are accidentals combining a loop with a tented arch.
Figures 272 to 276 combine a loop and a plain whorl or central pocket loop.
Figure 277 combines a loop and a double loop. Figure 278 combines a loop
Page 101
and a plain arch, so it is classified as a loop. Figure 279 combines a loop
and a tented arch.
and a tented arch.
Page 102
Page 103
[Figs. 269-279]
Some whorls may be found which contain ridges conforming to more than
one of the whorl subdivisions described. In such cases, the order of
preference (if any practical distinction need be made) should be: (1)
accidental, (2) double loop, (3) central pocket loop, (4) plain whorl.
Whorl tracing
The technique of whorl tracing depends upon the establishment of the focal
points—the deltas. Every whorl has two or more. When the deltas have
been located, the ridge emanating from the lower side or point of the
extreme left delta is traced until the point nearest or opposite the extreme
right delta is reached. The number of ridges intervening between the tracing
ridge and the right delta are then counted. If the ridge traced passes inside
of (above) the right delta, and three or more ridges intervene between the
tracing ridge and the delta, the tracing is designated as an "inner"—I (fig.
280). If the ridge traced passes outside (below) the right delta, and three or
more ridges intervene between the tracing ridge and the right delta, the
tracing is designated as an "outer"—O (fig. 281). All other tracings are
designated as "meeting"—M (figs. 282 to 287).
Some whorls may be found which contain ridges conforming to more than
one of the whorl subdivisions described. In such cases, the order of
preference (if any practical distinction need be made) should be: (1)
accidental, (2) double loop, (3) central pocket loop, (4) plain whorl.
Whorl tracing
The technique of whorl tracing depends upon the establishment of the focal
points—the deltas. Every whorl has two or more. When the deltas have
been located, the ridge emanating from the lower side or point of the
extreme left delta is traced until the point nearest or opposite the extreme
right delta is reached. The number of ridges intervening between the tracing
ridge and the right delta are then counted. If the ridge traced passes inside
of (above) the right delta, and three or more ridges intervene between the
tracing ridge and the delta, the tracing is designated as an "inner"—I (fig.
280). If the ridge traced passes outside (below) the right delta, and three or
more ridges intervene between the tracing ridge and the right delta, the
tracing is designated as an "outer"—O (fig. 281). All other tracings are
designated as "meeting"—M (figs. 282 to 287).
Page 104
Page 105
[Figs. 280-287]
Tracing begins from the left delta. In no instance is a tracing to begin on a
type line. In figure 288, tracing begins at the short ridge which is the left
delta. It is true that inasmuch as the short ridge ends immediately the type
line is next followed, but this is only because the type line is the next lower
ridge. Its status as a type line is independent and has no bearing on the fact
that it is being traced. This point is illustrated further in figure 289. This
pattern shows an inner tracing. It will be noted that the delta is at the point
on the first recurve nearest to the center of the divergence of the type lines.
It will be further noted that tracing begins at the point of delta on the left
and continues toward the right, passing inside of the right delta, with three
ridges intervening between the tracing ridge and the right delta. This shows
the tracing to be an inner tracing. If, in this case, the type line were traced
(which would be the incorrect procedure), only two ridges would intervene
between the tracing ridge and the right delta, resulting in an erroneous
meeting tracing. Figure 290 is another example of the application of this
rule. This illustration is also an inner whorl.
Tracing begins from the left delta. In no instance is a tracing to begin on a
type line. In figure 288, tracing begins at the short ridge which is the left
delta. It is true that inasmuch as the short ridge ends immediately the type
line is next followed, but this is only because the type line is the next lower
ridge. Its status as a type line is independent and has no bearing on the fact
that it is being traced. This point is illustrated further in figure 289. This
pattern shows an inner tracing. It will be noted that the delta is at the point
on the first recurve nearest to the center of the divergence of the type lines.
It will be further noted that tracing begins at the point of delta on the left
and continues toward the right, passing inside of the right delta, with three
ridges intervening between the tracing ridge and the right delta. This shows
the tracing to be an inner tracing. If, in this case, the type line were traced
(which would be the incorrect procedure), only two ridges would intervene
between the tracing ridge and the right delta, resulting in an erroneous
meeting tracing. Figure 290 is another example of the application of this
rule. This illustration is also an inner whorl.
Page 106
[Figs. 288-290]
When the ridge traced ends abruptly, and it is determined that the ridge
definitely ends, the tracing drops down to the point on the next lower ridge
immediately beneath the point where the ridge above ends, continuing from
there. Figure 291, therefore, is an outer whorl.
[Fig. 291]
In this connection it should be noted that the rule for dropping to the next
lower line applies only when the ridge definitely ends. Short breaks in a
ridge which may be due to improper inking, the presence of foreign matter
on the ridges, enlarged pores, disease, or worn ridges should not be
When the ridge traced ends abruptly, and it is determined that the ridge
definitely ends, the tracing drops down to the point on the next lower ridge
immediately beneath the point where the ridge above ends, continuing from
there. Figure 291, therefore, is an outer whorl.
[Fig. 291]
In this connection it should be noted that the rule for dropping to the next
lower line applies only when the ridge definitely ends. Short breaks in a
ridge which may be due to improper inking, the presence of foreign matter
on the ridges, enlarged pores, disease, or worn ridges should not be
Page 107
considered as definite ridge endings. The determination of what constitutes
a definite ending will depend, of course, upon the good judgment of the
classifier. When the question arises as to whether a break encountered in the
ridge tracing is a definite ending, or whether there has been interference
with a natural impression, the whole pattern should be examined to
ascertain whether such breaks are general throughout the pattern. If they are
found to be common, consideration should then be given to the possibility
that the break is not a definite ridge ending. Appropriate reference tracing
should be done in all such cases.
Whenever the ridge traced bifurcates, the rule for tracing requires that the
lower limb or branch proceeding from the bifurcation be followed. This is
illustrated in 292.
[Fig. 292]
Accidentals often possess three or more deltas. In tracing them only the
extreme deltas are considered, the tracing beginning at the extreme left
delta and proceeding toward the extreme right delta, as illustrated in figure
293.
a definite ending will depend, of course, upon the good judgment of the
classifier. When the question arises as to whether a break encountered in the
ridge tracing is a definite ending, or whether there has been interference
with a natural impression, the whole pattern should be examined to
ascertain whether such breaks are general throughout the pattern. If they are
found to be common, consideration should then be given to the possibility
that the break is not a definite ridge ending. Appropriate reference tracing
should be done in all such cases.
Whenever the ridge traced bifurcates, the rule for tracing requires that the
lower limb or branch proceeding from the bifurcation be followed. This is
illustrated in 292.
[Fig. 292]
Accidentals often possess three or more deltas. In tracing them only the
extreme deltas are considered, the tracing beginning at the extreme left
delta and proceeding toward the extreme right delta, as illustrated in figure
293.
Page 108
[Fig. 293]
In a double loop or accidental the problem of where to stop tracing is
sometimes presented. The rule is, when the tracing passes inside of the right
delta, stop at the nearest point to the right delta on the upward trend, as in
figure 294. If no upward trend is present, continue tracing until a point
opposite the right delta, or the delta itself, is reached (figs. 295 and 296).
In a double loop or accidental the problem of where to stop tracing is
sometimes presented. The rule is, when the tracing passes inside of the right
delta, stop at the nearest point to the right delta on the upward trend, as in
figure 294. If no upward trend is present, continue tracing until a point
opposite the right delta, or the delta itself, is reached (figs. 295 and 296).
Page 109
[Figs. 294-296]
Page 110
CHAPTER III
Page 111
Questionable Patterns
No matter how definite fingerprint rules and pattern definitions are made,
there will always be patterns concerning which there is doubt as to the
classification they should be given. The primary reason for this is the fact
that probably no two fingerprints will ever appear which are exactly alike.
Other reasons are differences in the degree of judgment and interpretation
of the individual classifying fingerprints, the difference in the amount of
pressure used by the person taking the prints, and the amount or kind of ink
used. Nothing can be done about faulty inking or pressure once the prints
are taken. The patterns which are questionable merely because they seem to
have characteristics of two or more types can be classified by strict
adherence to the definitions in deducing a preference. The following section
is devoted to such patterns with an explanation of each.
Figure 297 has two loop formations. The one on the left, however, has an
appendage abutting upon the shoulders of its recurve at a right angle. The
left portion of the impression, therefore, is of the tented arch type. The
combination of two different types of patterns would be classified in the
whorl group (accidental), but this impression has only the one delta. The
right portion of the pattern detail contains a true loop which fulfills all the
loop requirements, i.e., a sufficient recurve, a delta, and a ridge count across
a looping ridge. In the choice existing between a tented arch and a loop,
preference is given to the loop classification and this impression would be
classified as a loop.
No matter how definite fingerprint rules and pattern definitions are made,
there will always be patterns concerning which there is doubt as to the
classification they should be given. The primary reason for this is the fact
that probably no two fingerprints will ever appear which are exactly alike.
Other reasons are differences in the degree of judgment and interpretation
of the individual classifying fingerprints, the difference in the amount of
pressure used by the person taking the prints, and the amount or kind of ink
used. Nothing can be done about faulty inking or pressure once the prints
are taken. The patterns which are questionable merely because they seem to
have characteristics of two or more types can be classified by strict
adherence to the definitions in deducing a preference. The following section
is devoted to such patterns with an explanation of each.
Figure 297 has two loop formations. The one on the left, however, has an
appendage abutting upon the shoulders of its recurve at a right angle. The
left portion of the impression, therefore, is of the tented arch type. The
combination of two different types of patterns would be classified in the
whorl group (accidental), but this impression has only the one delta. The
right portion of the pattern detail contains a true loop which fulfills all the
loop requirements, i.e., a sufficient recurve, a delta, and a ridge count across
a looping ridge. In the choice existing between a tented arch and a loop,
preference is given to the loop classification and this impression would be
classified as a loop.
Page 112
[Fig. 297]
Figure 298, at a glance, seems to fulfill the requirements of a whorl (two
deltas and a ridge making a complete circuit). The part of the circuit in front
of the right delta, however, cannot be construed as a recurving ridge
because of the appendage abutting upon it in the line of flow. This pattern,
therefore, is a one-count loop.
[Fig. 298]
Figure 299 is a very difficult and unusual pattern. It has characteristics of
three types, the whorl, the loop, and the tented arch. It is given the
Figure 298, at a glance, seems to fulfill the requirements of a whorl (two
deltas and a ridge making a complete circuit). The part of the circuit in front
of the right delta, however, cannot be construed as a recurving ridge
because of the appendage abutting upon it in the line of flow. This pattern,
therefore, is a one-count loop.
[Fig. 298]
Figure 299 is a very difficult and unusual pattern. It has characteristics of
three types, the whorl, the loop, and the tented arch. It is given the
Page 113
preference of an accidental type of whorl (loop over a tented arch). This
pattern should be referenced both as a loop and as a tented arch.
[Fig. 299]
Figure 300 is shown for the purpose of explaining that in the whorl, as this
print is, appendages at the top of the recurve will not spoil or affect the
recurve. Hence, the impression is a good whorl of the central pocket loop
type and needs no reference.
[Fig. 300]
pattern should be referenced both as a loop and as a tented arch.
[Fig. 299]
Figure 300 is shown for the purpose of explaining that in the whorl, as this
print is, appendages at the top of the recurve will not spoil or affect the
recurve. Hence, the impression is a good whorl of the central pocket loop
type and needs no reference.
[Fig. 300]
Page 114
Figure 301 is classified as a whorl of the double loop type. There are
present two distinct loops and two deltas (the right delta is not present as
the impression was not rolled sufficiently). The pattern is unusual because
the loops are side by side and flowing in the same direction. The tracing is
an inner tracing.
[Fig. 301]
Figure 302 should present no difficulty. It is classified as a plain arch for its
ridge construction follows the rule of a plain arch, i.e., "enter one side and
flow or tend to flow to the other."
present two distinct loops and two deltas (the right delta is not present as
the impression was not rolled sufficiently). The pattern is unusual because
the loops are side by side and flowing in the same direction. The tracing is
an inner tracing.
[Fig. 301]
Figure 302 should present no difficulty. It is classified as a plain arch for its
ridge construction follows the rule of a plain arch, i.e., "enter one side and
flow or tend to flow to the other."
Page 115
[Fig. 302]
Figure 303 is a plain arch. The dot at the center is not elongated enough to
be considered an upthrust. A dot, even though as thick and heavy as the
surrounding ridges, is not considered for any purpose but ridge counting or
fixing a delta.
[Fig. 303]
Figure 304 is a pattern somewhat similar to the previous illustration. As
indicated before, dots are considered as ridges only in ridge counting and
fixing a delta. This pattern, therefore, must be classified as a plain arch,
rather than a tented arch with two ending ridges and a delta formation.
Figure 303 is a plain arch. The dot at the center is not elongated enough to
be considered an upthrust. A dot, even though as thick and heavy as the
surrounding ridges, is not considered for any purpose but ridge counting or
fixing a delta.
[Fig. 303]
Figure 304 is a pattern somewhat similar to the previous illustration. As
indicated before, dots are considered as ridges only in ridge counting and
fixing a delta. This pattern, therefore, must be classified as a plain arch,
rather than a tented arch with two ending ridges and a delta formation.
Page 116
[Fig. 304]
Figure 305, although showing an appendage upon each recurve on the left
side, is classified as a whorl of the central pocket loop type, with two deltas
and a recurve in front of each. To spoil the recurve of a whorl the
appendage must be connected to the recurve at the point of contact with the
line of flow.
[Fig. 305]
In figure 306, the impression has two equally good loop formations. As it
has but one delta, it cannot be classified as a whorl of the double loop type
nor as a loop since it would be difficult to make a preferential choice
Figure 305, although showing an appendage upon each recurve on the left
side, is classified as a whorl of the central pocket loop type, with two deltas
and a recurve in front of each. To spoil the recurve of a whorl the
appendage must be connected to the recurve at the point of contact with the
line of flow.
[Fig. 305]
In figure 306, the impression has two equally good loop formations. As it
has but one delta, it cannot be classified as a whorl of the double loop type
nor as a loop since it would be difficult to make a preferential choice
Page 117
between the two looping ridges. It is arbitrarily given the classification of a
tented arch.
[Fig. 306]
In figure 307, the difficulty lies in locating the delta. The only ridges
answering the definition of type lines (ridges running parallel and then
diverging to enclose the pattern area) have three ending ridges between
them. The type lines, the delta, and the core are located as indicated. The
pattern is classified as a six-count loop.
[Fig. 307]
tented arch.
[Fig. 306]
In figure 307, the difficulty lies in locating the delta. The only ridges
answering the definition of type lines (ridges running parallel and then
diverging to enclose the pattern area) have three ending ridges between
them. The type lines, the delta, and the core are located as indicated. The
pattern is classified as a six-count loop.
[Fig. 307]
Page 118
Figure 308 is classified as a tented arch, although it appears at first glance
to be a loop. Closer inspection shows that the looping ridge does not tend to
go out the side from which it entered but rather seems to proceed downward
ending in an abutment forming a definite angle of 90°.
[Fig. 308]
In figure 309, an impression is shown which at first appears to be a loop.
Closer inspection will show that one of the elements of the loop type is
missing, namely, a ridge count across a looping ridge; for it is to be borne in
mind that the recurve of the innermost loop should be free of appendages
abutting between the shoulders at right angles. The core, in this illustration,
therefore, is placed where the appendage of the innermost loop touches the
next ridge which is a good recurve. If an imaginary line is placed between
delta and core, it will be seen that there are no intervening ridges; hence,
there is no ridge count.
to be a loop. Closer inspection shows that the looping ridge does not tend to
go out the side from which it entered but rather seems to proceed downward
ending in an abutment forming a definite angle of 90°.
[Fig. 308]
In figure 309, an impression is shown which at first appears to be a loop.
Closer inspection will show that one of the elements of the loop type is
missing, namely, a ridge count across a looping ridge; for it is to be borne in
mind that the recurve of the innermost loop should be free of appendages
abutting between the shoulders at right angles. The core, in this illustration,
therefore, is placed where the appendage of the innermost loop touches the
next ridge which is a good recurve. If an imaginary line is placed between
delta and core, it will be seen that there are no intervening ridges; hence,
there is no ridge count.
Page 119
[Fig. 309]
Figure 310 is a pattern which contains two elements of a loop but lacks the
third. It is classified as a tented arch. Thus an impression having a delta and
a recurve, but not having a ridge count across a looping ridge, falls into this
classification.
[Fig. 310]
It will be noticed that although this pattern has the resemblance of a plain
arch, the center of the impression actually contains a partially formed loop.
A recurving ridge enters from the right side and exits in the same direction.
A delta also appears just below the recurve. In attempting to obtain a ridge
Figure 310 is a pattern which contains two elements of a loop but lacks the
third. It is classified as a tented arch. Thus an impression having a delta and
a recurve, but not having a ridge count across a looping ridge, falls into this
classification.
[Fig. 310]
It will be noticed that although this pattern has the resemblance of a plain
arch, the center of the impression actually contains a partially formed loop.
A recurving ridge enters from the right side and exits in the same direction.
A delta also appears just below the recurve. In attempting to obtain a ridge
Page 120
count, it is seen that the imaginary line drawn between the delta and the
core runs directly along the ridge emanating from the former and which is
joined onto the side of the recurving ridge. For this reason, no ridge count is
possible.
Figure 311 is a tented arch. There are three loop formations, each one of
which is spoiled by an appendage abutting upon its recurve between the
shoulders at a right angle. It cannot be classified as an accidental as the
patterns are all of the same type, i.e., tented arches. An accidental type of
whorl is a combination of two or more different types of patterns exclusive
of the plain arch.
[Fig. 311]
Figure 312 is a loop. It cannot be classified as a whorl of the double loop
type because the formation above the lower loop is too pointed and it also
has an appendage abutting upon it at a right angle.
core runs directly along the ridge emanating from the former and which is
joined onto the side of the recurving ridge. For this reason, no ridge count is
possible.
Figure 311 is a tented arch. There are three loop formations, each one of
which is spoiled by an appendage abutting upon its recurve between the
shoulders at a right angle. It cannot be classified as an accidental as the
patterns are all of the same type, i.e., tented arches. An accidental type of
whorl is a combination of two or more different types of patterns exclusive
of the plain arch.
[Fig. 311]
Figure 312 is a loop. It cannot be classified as a whorl of the double loop
type because the formation above the lower loop is too pointed and it also
has an appendage abutting upon it at a right angle.
Page 121
[Fig. 312]
Figure 313 at first glance appears to be a whorl of the double loop type.
Upon closer inspection, however, it will be noticed that there are no delta
formations other than on the recurves. There are, then, two tented arch
formations. As two patterns of the same type cannot form an accidental
whorl, the impression must be classified as a tented arch.
[Fig. 313]
Figure 314 is an accidental whorl, combining a loop and a tented arch. The
tented arch is directly beneath the innermost loop, and is of the upthrust
type.
Figure 313 at first glance appears to be a whorl of the double loop type.
Upon closer inspection, however, it will be noticed that there are no delta
formations other than on the recurves. There are, then, two tented arch
formations. As two patterns of the same type cannot form an accidental
whorl, the impression must be classified as a tented arch.
[Fig. 313]
Figure 314 is an accidental whorl, combining a loop and a tented arch. The
tented arch is directly beneath the innermost loop, and is of the upthrust
type.
Page 122
[Fig. 314]
Figure 315 consists of a loop over a dot with an apparent second delta. This
pattern must be classified as a loop, as a dot may not be considered an
upthrust unless elongated vertically.
[Fig. 315]
Even though a dot may be as thick and heavy as the surrounding ridges, it
may be considered only in ridge counting or fixing a delta.
Figure 315 consists of a loop over a dot with an apparent second delta. This
pattern must be classified as a loop, as a dot may not be considered an
upthrust unless elongated vertically.
[Fig. 315]
Even though a dot may be as thick and heavy as the surrounding ridges, it
may be considered only in ridge counting or fixing a delta.
Page 123
Figure 316 at first glance appears to be an accidental whorl, but on closer
inspection it proves to be a loop. Although there are three delta formations
present, it should be observed that recurving ridges appear in front of only
one (D-1).
[Fig. 316]
Figure 317 has the general appearance of a loop. The looping ridge A, at the
center, has an appendage B abutting upon its recurve. The abutment is at
right angles and therefore spoils the recurve. The pattern is a tented arch.
[Fig. 317]
inspection it proves to be a loop. Although there are three delta formations
present, it should be observed that recurving ridges appear in front of only
one (D-1).
[Fig. 316]
Figure 317 has the general appearance of a loop. The looping ridge A, at the
center, has an appendage B abutting upon its recurve. The abutment is at
right angles and therefore spoils the recurve. The pattern is a tented arch.
[Fig. 317]
Page 124
Figure 318 is a tented arch which approaches both the loop and the whorl
type patterns. It cannot be considered a whorl, however, as the recurve on
the left is spoiled by an appendage (figs. 58 and 59). Nor can it be a loop
because there is no ridge count across a looping ridge. The pattern, then, is
a tented arch of the type possessing two of the basic characteristics of the
loop and lacking the third. The delta and the sufficient recurve are present
but the ridge count is missing.
[Fig. 318]
Figure 319 seems at first glance to be a double loop. It will be noted,
however, that the inner delta formation would be located upon the only
looping ridge of the upper loop formation. Since the delta would be located
on the only recurve, this recurving ridge is eliminated from consideration.
The pattern is classified as a loop.
type patterns. It cannot be considered a whorl, however, as the recurve on
the left is spoiled by an appendage (figs. 58 and 59). Nor can it be a loop
because there is no ridge count across a looping ridge. The pattern, then, is
a tented arch of the type possessing two of the basic characteristics of the
loop and lacking the third. The delta and the sufficient recurve are present
but the ridge count is missing.
[Fig. 318]
Figure 319 seems at first glance to be a double loop. It will be noted,
however, that the inner delta formation would be located upon the only
looping ridge of the upper loop formation. Since the delta would be located
on the only recurve, this recurving ridge is eliminated from consideration.
The pattern is classified as a loop.
Page 125
[Fig. 319]
Figure 320 is a loop of two counts, with the delta at B. There is a ridge
making a complete circuit present, but point A cannot be used as a delta
because it answers the definition of a type line. It should be considered a
delta only if it presented an angular formation. Placing the delta upon the
recurve would spoil that recurve.
[Fig. 320]
Figure 320 is a loop of two counts, with the delta at B. There is a ridge
making a complete circuit present, but point A cannot be used as a delta
because it answers the definition of a type line. It should be considered a
delta only if it presented an angular formation. Placing the delta upon the
recurve would spoil that recurve.
[Fig. 320]
Page 126
Figure 321 shows two separate looping ridge formations appearing side by
side and upon the same side of the delta. The core in such case is placed
upon the nearer shoulder of the farther looping ridge from the delta, the two
looping ridges being considered as one loop with two rods rising as high as
the shoulder. The ridge count would be four (fig. 49).
[Fig. 321]
Figure 322 is an accidental whorl. It is classified thus because it contains
elements of three different patterns, the loop, the double loop, and the
accidental. In such case the order of preference governs. The delta at the left
is point A. The delta at the right is point C. This point becomes the delta
since it is the point nearest the center of the divergence of the type lines.
Point B is eliminated from consideration as a delta since type lines may not
proceed from a bifurcation unless they flow parallel after the bifurcation
and before diverging.
side and upon the same side of the delta. The core in such case is placed
upon the nearer shoulder of the farther looping ridge from the delta, the two
looping ridges being considered as one loop with two rods rising as high as
the shoulder. The ridge count would be four (fig. 49).
[Fig. 321]
Figure 322 is an accidental whorl. It is classified thus because it contains
elements of three different patterns, the loop, the double loop, and the
accidental. In such case the order of preference governs. The delta at the left
is point A. The delta at the right is point C. This point becomes the delta
since it is the point nearest the center of the divergence of the type lines.
Point B is eliminated from consideration as a delta since type lines may not
proceed from a bifurcation unless they flow parallel after the bifurcation
and before diverging.
Page 127
[Fig. 322]
Figure 323 is a loop. There are two delta formations but the dots cannot be
considered as obstructions crossing the line of flow at right angles. This
precludes the classification of the central pocket loop type of whorl.
[Fig. 323]
Figure 324 is a loop, the two recurving ridges have appendages and are
considered spoiled. The pattern cannot, therefore, be a whorl even though
two delta formations are present.
Figure 323 is a loop. There are two delta formations but the dots cannot be
considered as obstructions crossing the line of flow at right angles. This
precludes the classification of the central pocket loop type of whorl.
[Fig. 323]
Figure 324 is a loop, the two recurving ridges have appendages and are
considered spoiled. The pattern cannot, therefore, be a whorl even though
two delta formations are present.
Page 128
[Fig. 324]
Figure 325 is classified as a tented arch. If examined closely the pattern will
be seen to have an appendage abutting at a right angle between the
shoulders of each possible recurve. Thus no sufficient recurve is present.
[Fig. 325]
Figure 326 is a plain arch. There is present no angle which approaches a
right angle. Points A, B, and X are merely bifurcations rather than an
abutment of two ridges at an angle.
Figure 325 is classified as a tented arch. If examined closely the pattern will
be seen to have an appendage abutting at a right angle between the
shoulders of each possible recurve. Thus no sufficient recurve is present.
[Fig. 325]
Figure 326 is a plain arch. There is present no angle which approaches a
right angle. Points A, B, and X are merely bifurcations rather than an
abutment of two ridges at an angle.
Page 129
[Fig. 326]
Figure 327 is a tented arch, not because of the dot, however, as it cannot be
considered an upthrust. The tented arch is formed by the angle made when
the curving ridge above the dot abuts upon the ridge immediately under and
to the left of the dot.
[Fig. 327]
Figure 328 consists of two separate looping ridge formations in
juxtaposition upon the same side of a common delta. This pattern cannot be
called a double loop as there is no second delta formation. In order to locate
Figure 327 is a tented arch, not because of the dot, however, as it cannot be
considered an upthrust. The tented arch is formed by the angle made when
the curving ridge above the dot abuts upon the ridge immediately under and
to the left of the dot.
[Fig. 327]
Figure 328 consists of two separate looping ridge formations in
juxtaposition upon the same side of a common delta. This pattern cannot be
called a double loop as there is no second delta formation. In order to locate
Page 130
the core, the two looping ridges should be treated as one loop with two rods
in the center. The core is thus placed on the far rod (actually on the left
shoulder of the far loop), resulting in a ridge count of four (fig. 49).
[Fig. 328]
Figure 329 is a loop of three counts. It cannot be classified as a whorl as the
only recurve is spoiled by the appendage abutting upon it at the point of
contact with the line of flow.
in the center. The core is thus placed on the far rod (actually on the left
shoulder of the far loop), resulting in a ridge count of four (fig. 49).
[Fig. 328]
Figure 329 is a loop of three counts. It cannot be classified as a whorl as the
only recurve is spoiled by the appendage abutting upon it at the point of
contact with the line of flow.
Page 131
[Fig. 329]
Figure 330 is a plain arch as there is no upthrust (an upthrust must be an
ending ridge), no backward looping turn, and no two ridges abutting upon
each other at a sufficient angle.
[Fig. 330]
Figure 331 is a plain arch. The ending ridge at the center does not rise at a
sufficient angle to be considered an upthrust, and it does not quite meet the
ridge toward which it is flowing and therefore forms no angle.
Figure 330 is a plain arch as there is no upthrust (an upthrust must be an
ending ridge), no backward looping turn, and no two ridges abutting upon
each other at a sufficient angle.
[Fig. 330]
Figure 331 is a plain arch. The ending ridge at the center does not rise at a
sufficient angle to be considered an upthrust, and it does not quite meet the
ridge toward which it is flowing and therefore forms no angle.
Page 132
[Fig. 331]
Figure 332 is a plain arch. There are two ending ridges, but no separate
delta formation is present.
[Fig. 332]
Figure 333 is a plain arch. The rising ridge at the center is curved at the top
forming no angle, and does not constitute an upthrust because it is not an
ending ridge.
[Fig. 333]
Figure 332 is a plain arch. There are two ending ridges, but no separate
delta formation is present.
[Fig. 332]
Figure 333 is a plain arch. The rising ridge at the center is curved at the top
forming no angle, and does not constitute an upthrust because it is not an
ending ridge.
[Fig. 333]
Page 133
Figure 334 is a whorl of the double loop type. Two loops and two deltas are
present. It is unusual because the loops are juxtaposed instead of one
flowing over the other, and one delta is almost directly over the other. The
tracing is a meeting tracing.
[Fig. 334]
Figure 335 is a tented arch. Although there is a looping ridge, no ridge
count can be obtained. The core is placed upon the end of the ridge abutting
upon the inside of the loop, and so the imaginary line crosses no looping
ridge, which is necessary.
present. It is unusual because the loops are juxtaposed instead of one
flowing over the other, and one delta is almost directly over the other. The
tracing is a meeting tracing.
[Fig. 334]
Figure 335 is a tented arch. Although there is a looping ridge, no ridge
count can be obtained. The core is placed upon the end of the ridge abutting
upon the inside of the loop, and so the imaginary line crosses no looping
ridge, which is necessary.
Page 134
[Fig. 335]
Figure 336 is a plain arch. The ending ridge at the center cannot be
considered an upthrust because it does not deviate from the general
direction of flow of the ridges on either side. No angle is present as the
ending ridge does not abut upon the curving ridge which envelopes it.
[Fig. 336]
Figure 337 is a plain arch because the dot cannot be considered a delta as it
is not as thick and heavy as the surrounding ridges.
Figure 336 is a plain arch. The ending ridge at the center cannot be
considered an upthrust because it does not deviate from the general
direction of flow of the ridges on either side. No angle is present as the
ending ridge does not abut upon the curving ridge which envelopes it.
[Fig. 336]
Figure 337 is a plain arch because the dot cannot be considered a delta as it
is not as thick and heavy as the surrounding ridges.
Page 135
[Fig. 337]
Figure 338 is a tented arch consisting of two ending ridges and a delta. The
short ending ridge is considered a ridge because it is slightly elongated and
not a mere dot.
[Fig. 338]
In figure 339, the only question involved is where to stop tracing. The rule
is: when tracing on a ridge with an upward trend, stop at the point on the
upward trend which is nearest to the right delta. X is the point in this
pattern.
Figure 338 is a tented arch consisting of two ending ridges and a delta. The
short ending ridge is considered a ridge because it is slightly elongated and
not a mere dot.
[Fig. 338]
In figure 339, the only question involved is where to stop tracing. The rule
is: when tracing on a ridge with an upward trend, stop at the point on the
upward trend which is nearest to the right delta. X is the point in this
pattern.
Page 136
[Fig. 339]
In figure 340, the question involved is also one of tracing. In this pattern,
the tracing is not on a ridge with an upward trend. The tracing, therefore, is
continued until a point nearest to the right delta, or the right delta itself, is
reached. This tracing is a meeting tracing.
[Fig. 340]
There are a few constantly recurring patterns which, though not
questionable or doubtful as they appear, present a peculiarly difficult
In figure 340, the question involved is also one of tracing. In this pattern,
the tracing is not on a ridge with an upward trend. The tracing, therefore, is
continued until a point nearest to the right delta, or the right delta itself, is
reached. This tracing is a meeting tracing.
[Fig. 340]
There are a few constantly recurring patterns which, though not
questionable or doubtful as they appear, present a peculiarly difficult
Page 137
problem in classifying. The patterns referred to are usually double loops,
though accidental whorls and loops sometimes present the same problems.
The difficulty arises when a loop is so elongated that the recurve does not
appear until near the edge of a fully rolled impression or an impression that
is rolled unusually far, as in figures 341 to 344.
though accidental whorls and loops sometimes present the same problems.
The difficulty arises when a loop is so elongated that the recurve does not
appear until near the edge of a fully rolled impression or an impression that
is rolled unusually far, as in figures 341 to 344.
Page 138
[Figs. 341-344]
Figure 341, if classified as it appears, would be an accidental whorl. Figures
342 and 343 would be double loops, and illustration 344, a loop. It will be
observed that these prints are rolled more fully than normal. If, however, the
next time the prints are taken, they are not rolled quite so far, the patterns
would require a very different classification, and would show no indication
of any need for referencing to their true classification. The result would be a
failure to establish an identification with the original prints. The only way
in which such an error may be avoided is to classify such impressions as
they would appear if not so fully rolled, and to conduct a reference search in
the classification which would be given to the prints when rolled to the
fullest extent. Applying this rule, illustration 341 is a tented arch, referenced
to a whorl. Figures 342 and 343 are loops, referenced to whorls. Figure 344
is a plain arch, referenced to a loop.
No set rule can possibly be devised to enable a classifier to know with
certainty where to draw the line when it is doubtful which classification
should be given such a print. Individual judgment is the only standard. The
test is: if the pattern, in the opinion of the classifier, is rolled to only a
normal width, it should be classified as it appears. If it seems to be rolled to
a width beyond the normal degree, it should be classified as if rolled only to
the normal degree. Age, weight, size of fingers (as seen in the plain
impressions), heaviness of the ridges, and experience of the technician in
taking fingerprints are all factors in arriving at the correct conclusion. The
necessity for exercising the utmost care in dealing with this type of pattern
cannot be too highly emphasized.
The patterns in figures 345 and 346 also have a second loop near the edge
of the impression. In these two patterns, however, the second loop is very
near the delta and consequently will almost invariably appear even though
not rolled to the fullest extent. The foregoing rule is not applied to this type
of impression. Both are classified as a whorl and referenced to a loop to
take care of the rare contingency of nonappearance.
Figure 341, if classified as it appears, would be an accidental whorl. Figures
342 and 343 would be double loops, and illustration 344, a loop. It will be
observed that these prints are rolled more fully than normal. If, however, the
next time the prints are taken, they are not rolled quite so far, the patterns
would require a very different classification, and would show no indication
of any need for referencing to their true classification. The result would be a
failure to establish an identification with the original prints. The only way
in which such an error may be avoided is to classify such impressions as
they would appear if not so fully rolled, and to conduct a reference search in
the classification which would be given to the prints when rolled to the
fullest extent. Applying this rule, illustration 341 is a tented arch, referenced
to a whorl. Figures 342 and 343 are loops, referenced to whorls. Figure 344
is a plain arch, referenced to a loop.
No set rule can possibly be devised to enable a classifier to know with
certainty where to draw the line when it is doubtful which classification
should be given such a print. Individual judgment is the only standard. The
test is: if the pattern, in the opinion of the classifier, is rolled to only a
normal width, it should be classified as it appears. If it seems to be rolled to
a width beyond the normal degree, it should be classified as if rolled only to
the normal degree. Age, weight, size of fingers (as seen in the plain
impressions), heaviness of the ridges, and experience of the technician in
taking fingerprints are all factors in arriving at the correct conclusion. The
necessity for exercising the utmost care in dealing with this type of pattern
cannot be too highly emphasized.
The patterns in figures 345 and 346 also have a second loop near the edge
of the impression. In these two patterns, however, the second loop is very
near the delta and consequently will almost invariably appear even though
not rolled to the fullest extent. The foregoing rule is not applied to this type
of impression. Both are classified as a whorl and referenced to a loop to
take care of the rare contingency of nonappearance.
Page 139
[Figs. 345-346]
Page 140
CHAPTER IV
Page 141
The Classification Formula and Extensions
The classification formula
At this point it is necessary to mention that when prints are classified,
markings are indicated at the bottom of each finger block to reflect the type.
The following symbols are used:
The classification formula
At this point it is necessary to mention that when prints are classified,
markings are indicated at the bottom of each finger block to reflect the type.
The following symbols are used:
Page 142
● Under the index fingers the appropriate capital letters should be placed for
every pattern except the ulnar loop.
● Under all other fingers, the appropriate small letter should be placed for
every pattern except the ulnar loop and the whorl as follows:
Arch a
Tented Arch t
Radial Loop r
● Ulnar loops in any finger are designated by a diagonal line slanting in the
direction of the loop.
● Whorls in any finger are designated by the letter "W". The classification
formula may be composed of the following divisions:
1. Primary 4. Major
2. Secondary 5. Final
3. Subsecondary 6. Key
The positions in the classification line for these divisions when completely
applied are as illustrated:
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
Divisions Classification Classification Classification
20 M 1 U IOI 10
L 1 U IOI
Second
subsecondary
classification
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
Divisions Classification Classification Classification
SLM
———
every pattern except the ulnar loop.
● Under all other fingers, the appropriate small letter should be placed for
every pattern except the ulnar loop and the whorl as follows:
Arch a
Tented Arch t
Radial Loop r
● Ulnar loops in any finger are designated by a diagonal line slanting in the
direction of the loop.
● Whorls in any finger are designated by the letter "W". The classification
formula may be composed of the following divisions:
1. Primary 4. Major
2. Secondary 5. Final
3. Subsecondary 6. Key
The positions in the classification line for these divisions when completely
applied are as illustrated:
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
Divisions Classification Classification Classification
20 M 1 U IOI 10
L 1 U IOI
Second
subsecondary
classification
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
Divisions Classification Classification Classification
SLM
———
Page 143
MMS
4 O 5 U IOI 10
I 17 U IOI
The primary classification: For the purpose of obtaining the primary
classification, numerical values are assigned to each of the ten finger spaces
as shown in figure 347. Wherever a whorl appears it assumes the value of
the space in which it is found. Spaces in which types of patterns other than
whorls are present are disregarded in computing the primary.
The values are assigned as follows:
Fingers No. 1 and No. 2 16
Fingers No. 3 and No. 4 8
Fingers No. 5 and No. 6 4
Fingers No. 7 and No. 8 2
Fingers No. 9 and No. 10 1
4 O 5 U IOI 10
I 17 U IOI
The primary classification: For the purpose of obtaining the primary
classification, numerical values are assigned to each of the ten finger spaces
as shown in figure 347. Wherever a whorl appears it assumes the value of
the space in which it is found. Spaces in which types of patterns other than
whorls are present are disregarded in computing the primary.
The values are assigned as follows:
Fingers No. 1 and No. 2 16
Fingers No. 3 and No. 4 8
Fingers No. 5 and No. 6 4
Fingers No. 7 and No. 8 2
Fingers No. 9 and No. 10 1
Page 144
[Fig. 347]
[Enlarge]
In figure 347, it will be observed that the odd fingers (Nos. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9)
contain the letter D, and the even fingers (Nos. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10) contain the
letter N. The D indicates that the values of these fingers relate to the
denominator, the N that they relate to the numerator. The summation of the
numerical values of the whorl type patterns, if any, appearing in fingers 1, 3,
5, 7, 9, plus one, is the denominator of the primary. The summation of the
values of the whorls, if any, in fingers 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, plus one, is the
numerator of the primary. Where no whorl appears in a set of impressions,
the primary, therefore, would be 1 over 1. The 1 that is assigned to the
[Enlarge]
In figure 347, it will be observed that the odd fingers (Nos. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9)
contain the letter D, and the even fingers (Nos. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10) contain the
letter N. The D indicates that the values of these fingers relate to the
denominator, the N that they relate to the numerator. The summation of the
numerical values of the whorl type patterns, if any, appearing in fingers 1, 3,
5, 7, 9, plus one, is the denominator of the primary. The summation of the
values of the whorls, if any, in fingers 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, plus one, is the
numerator of the primary. Where no whorl appears in a set of impressions,
the primary, therefore, would be 1 over 1. The 1 that is assigned to the
Page 145
numerator and the denominator when no whorls appear is also added, for
consistency, to the value of the whorls when they do appear. It will be
understood why it was originally assigned to the no-whorl group when it is
considered how easily a zero might be confused with an O, which is the
symbol used for an outer whorl tracing.
To obtain the primary for the prints in figure 347, the number of whorls
appearing in the odd fingers is ascertained to be 2. Their positions are noted
(1 in No. 1 and 1 in No. 7) and the values assigned to whorls appearing in
those fingers are added together (16 plus 2 = 18). To this sum the arbitrary 1
is added, giving us the total of 19, which constitutes the denominator for this
set of prints. To get the numerator, it is ascertained that there are 3 whorls
appearing in the even fingers (2, 4 and 6), the values of which are added
together (16 plus 8 plus 4 = 28). To this sum the 1 is added, giving a
numerator of 29, and a complete primary of 29 over 19.
By the word "whorl" is meant all types of whorls, including plain whorls,
central pocket loops, double loops and accidentals. The tracing of the whorl
does not enter into the determination of the primary.
The method of obtaining the primary can probably be shown best by
illustrations. For example, assume that there is a whorl in the right index
finger only. The value of a whorl in this finger is 16. When 1 over 1 is added
the resulting primary is 17 over 1. If a whorl appears in the right thumb and
right index finger, the value is 16 over 16 plus 1 over 1 giving a primary of
17 over 17. If whorls appear in both index fingers, the value is 16 over 2 plus
1 over 1 giving a primary of 17 over 3. When whorls appear in both thumbs
and both index fingers, the primary is 21 over 19 and is obtained by the
addition 16 plus 4 plus 1 over 16 plus 2 plus 1. If whorls appear in all 10
fingers, the primary is 32 over 32 (16 plus 8 plus 4 plus 2 plus 1 plus 1 over
16 plus 8 plus 4 plus 2 plus 1 plus 1). It will be noted that the primary
classifications extend from 1 over 1 in the no-whorl group to 32 over 32 in
the all-whorl group, providing 1,024 possible combinations. This does not
mean that there are 1,024 even subdivisions of prints according to these
primaries. Just as there is a preponderance of loops when the types of
patterns are considered, there is also a preponderance of certain primaries,
notably: the 1 over 1 primary, or no-whorl group; the 17 denominator; the 19
denominator; the 28 denominator, of which the 31 over 28 group is the
largest; and the 32 denominator, including 2 large primary groups namely, 31
consistency, to the value of the whorls when they do appear. It will be
understood why it was originally assigned to the no-whorl group when it is
considered how easily a zero might be confused with an O, which is the
symbol used for an outer whorl tracing.
To obtain the primary for the prints in figure 347, the number of whorls
appearing in the odd fingers is ascertained to be 2. Their positions are noted
(1 in No. 1 and 1 in No. 7) and the values assigned to whorls appearing in
those fingers are added together (16 plus 2 = 18). To this sum the arbitrary 1
is added, giving us the total of 19, which constitutes the denominator for this
set of prints. To get the numerator, it is ascertained that there are 3 whorls
appearing in the even fingers (2, 4 and 6), the values of which are added
together (16 plus 8 plus 4 = 28). To this sum the 1 is added, giving a
numerator of 29, and a complete primary of 29 over 19.
By the word "whorl" is meant all types of whorls, including plain whorls,
central pocket loops, double loops and accidentals. The tracing of the whorl
does not enter into the determination of the primary.
The method of obtaining the primary can probably be shown best by
illustrations. For example, assume that there is a whorl in the right index
finger only. The value of a whorl in this finger is 16. When 1 over 1 is added
the resulting primary is 17 over 1. If a whorl appears in the right thumb and
right index finger, the value is 16 over 16 plus 1 over 1 giving a primary of
17 over 17. If whorls appear in both index fingers, the value is 16 over 2 plus
1 over 1 giving a primary of 17 over 3. When whorls appear in both thumbs
and both index fingers, the primary is 21 over 19 and is obtained by the
addition 16 plus 4 plus 1 over 16 plus 2 plus 1. If whorls appear in all 10
fingers, the primary is 32 over 32 (16 plus 8 plus 4 plus 2 plus 1 plus 1 over
16 plus 8 plus 4 plus 2 plus 1 plus 1). It will be noted that the primary
classifications extend from 1 over 1 in the no-whorl group to 32 over 32 in
the all-whorl group, providing 1,024 possible combinations. This does not
mean that there are 1,024 even subdivisions of prints according to these
primaries. Just as there is a preponderance of loops when the types of
patterns are considered, there is also a preponderance of certain primaries,
notably: the 1 over 1 primary, or no-whorl group; the 17 denominator; the 19
denominator; the 28 denominator, of which the 31 over 28 group is the
largest; and the 32 denominator, including 2 large primary groups namely, 31
Page 146
over 32 and 32 over 32. As a matter of fact, the 1 over 1 group, as a whole,
contains over 25 percent of the total number of prints filed in the FBI. On the
other hand, there are a number of primaries which rarely appear. It follows,
therefore, that when a print is classified in one of these larger groups it is
necessary to complete the classification to a greater extent than is necessary
in the more unusual primaries, so that the group to be searched is small
enough for convenience.
In connection with the counting of whorl values to obtain the primary, it
might be noted that when the whorls outnumber the other patterns more
speed can be achieved by counting those patterns and subtracting rather than
by adding the whorls. This procedure should not be followed until enough
experience is acquired so that it may be noted at a glance where whorls are
not present.
The experienced classifier can tell in what fingers whorls are present by a
glance at a primary classification. For example, a primary of 5 over 17 could
mean that there are whorls in the thumbs only.
contains over 25 percent of the total number of prints filed in the FBI. On the
other hand, there are a number of primaries which rarely appear. It follows,
therefore, that when a print is classified in one of these larger groups it is
necessary to complete the classification to a greater extent than is necessary
in the more unusual primaries, so that the group to be searched is small
enough for convenience.
In connection with the counting of whorl values to obtain the primary, it
might be noted that when the whorls outnumber the other patterns more
speed can be achieved by counting those patterns and subtracting rather than
by adding the whorls. This procedure should not be followed until enough
experience is acquired so that it may be noted at a glance where whorls are
not present.
The experienced classifier can tell in what fingers whorls are present by a
glance at a primary classification. For example, a primary of 5 over 17 could
mean that there are whorls in the thumbs only.
Page 147
[Fig. 348]
[Enlarge]
The secondary classification: After the primary classification, the
fingerprints are subdivided further by using a secondary classification.
Before going into detail, it should be noted that after the primary is obtained
the entire remaining portion of the classification formula is based upon the
arrangement of the impressions appearing in the right hand as the numerator
over the impressions appearing in the left hand as the denominator. The
arrangement of the even over the uneven fingers is discarded after the
primary is obtained. The secondary classification appears just to the right of
the fractional numerals which represent the primary. It is shown in the
[Enlarge]
The secondary classification: After the primary classification, the
fingerprints are subdivided further by using a secondary classification.
Before going into detail, it should be noted that after the primary is obtained
the entire remaining portion of the classification formula is based upon the
arrangement of the impressions appearing in the right hand as the numerator
over the impressions appearing in the left hand as the denominator. The
arrangement of the even over the uneven fingers is discarded after the
primary is obtained. The secondary classification appears just to the right of
the fractional numerals which represent the primary. It is shown in the
Page 148
formula by capital letters representing the basic types of patterns appearing
in the index fingers of each hand, that of the right hand being the numerator
and that of the left hand being the denominator (fig. 348). There are five
basic types of patterns which can appear.
1. Arch A
2. Tented Arch T
3. Radial Loop R
4. Ulnar Loop U
5. Whorl W
[Fig. 349]
in the index fingers of each hand, that of the right hand being the numerator
and that of the left hand being the denominator (fig. 348). There are five
basic types of patterns which can appear.
1. Arch A
2. Tented Arch T
3. Radial Loop R
4. Ulnar Loop U
5. Whorl W
[Fig. 349]
Page 149
[Enlarge]
Secondary classification (small-letter group): Prints with an arch or tented
arch in any finger or a radial loop in any except the index fingers constitute
the small-letter group of the secondary classification. Such "small letters,"
with the exception of those appearing in the index fingers, are brought up
into the classification formula in their proper relative positions immediately
adjacent to the index fingers (fig. 349). A dash is used to indicate the absence
of each small letter between the index fingers and another small letter or
between two small letters, as
1 aUa-t 1 aU-t.
and
1 R-a 1 1 U-a
Thus, if a radial loop appears in the right thumb, the small letter "r" would
be brought up in the numerator column of the classification formula and
placed just to the left of the capital letter representing the index finger.
Similarly, if an arch or tented arch or a radial loop would appear in the
middle, ring, or little finger of the hand, the small letter representing such a
pattern would be placed on the classification line to the right of the
secondary in the numerator column if the letter is present in the right hand,
and in the denominator column if in the left hand. When two or more small
letters of the same type occur immediately adjacent to each other, they are
indicated thus:
1 rU-2a 1 aTa-a.
and
1 tU3a 1 tA2at
The small-letter groups are of vital importance to the classification system,
as they are of relatively infrequent occurrence, constituting approximately 7
to 10 percent of all patterns. Generally speaking, since these patterns are of
such rare occurrence, their very presence often enables the classifier to
dispense with the usual subsecondary classification and the major division
which in the majority of cases are used in the larger groups.
The subsecondary classification (grouping of loops and whorls): In
classifying prints it is necessary to subdivide the secondary groups. This is
Secondary classification (small-letter group): Prints with an arch or tented
arch in any finger or a radial loop in any except the index fingers constitute
the small-letter group of the secondary classification. Such "small letters,"
with the exception of those appearing in the index fingers, are brought up
into the classification formula in their proper relative positions immediately
adjacent to the index fingers (fig. 349). A dash is used to indicate the absence
of each small letter between the index fingers and another small letter or
between two small letters, as
1 aUa-t 1 aU-t.
and
1 R-a 1 1 U-a
Thus, if a radial loop appears in the right thumb, the small letter "r" would
be brought up in the numerator column of the classification formula and
placed just to the left of the capital letter representing the index finger.
Similarly, if an arch or tented arch or a radial loop would appear in the
middle, ring, or little finger of the hand, the small letter representing such a
pattern would be placed on the classification line to the right of the
secondary in the numerator column if the letter is present in the right hand,
and in the denominator column if in the left hand. When two or more small
letters of the same type occur immediately adjacent to each other, they are
indicated thus:
1 rU-2a 1 aTa-a.
and
1 tU3a 1 tA2at
The small-letter groups are of vital importance to the classification system,
as they are of relatively infrequent occurrence, constituting approximately 7
to 10 percent of all patterns. Generally speaking, since these patterns are of
such rare occurrence, their very presence often enables the classifier to
dispense with the usual subsecondary classification and the major division
which in the majority of cases are used in the larger groups.
The subsecondary classification (grouping of loops and whorls): In
classifying prints it is necessary to subdivide the secondary groups. This is
Page 150
accomplished by grouping according to the ridge counts of loops and the
ridge tracings of whorls. The first of the groups filed in order, which it will
be necessary to so subdivide, would ordinarily be the
1R
1R
group where no small letters appear. The Federal Bureau of Investigation,
however, has found it necessary to extend this division to many of the small-
letter groups which become cumbersome. The subsecondary is placed on the
classification line just to the right of the secondary. Ridge counts are
translated into small and large, represented by symbols I and O. The whorl
tracings are brought up as I, M, or O denoting inner, meeting or outer ridge
tracings of the whorl types. Only six fingers may be involved in the
subsecondary—numbers 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, and 9.
A ridge count of 1 to 9, inclusive, in the index fingers is brought up into the
subsecondary formula as I. A count of 10 or more is brought up as O. In the
middle fingers a count of from 1 to 10, inclusive, is brought up as I, and 11
or more is O. In the ring fingers a count of from 1 to 13 is brought up as I,
and 14 or more is O. A loop subsecondary could appear in the classification
formula as
OIO.
IIO
Analyzing this example of a subsecondary, one will know that in the index,
middle, and ring fingers of the right hand there are counts of over 9, under
11, and over 13, while in the left hand there are in the index, middle, and
ring fingers, counts of under 10, under 11, over 13, respectively. The
subsecondary classification, therefore, relates to the groupings of the prints,
and no difficulty should be experienced in ascertaining whether the I and O
arrangement in the subsecondary relates to loops or whorls when analyzing a
classification, because this information can be obtained from the primary
classification. Figure 350 is an example illustrating the subsecondary in
addition to other divisions of the classification formula.
ridge tracings of whorls. The first of the groups filed in order, which it will
be necessary to so subdivide, would ordinarily be the
1R
1R
group where no small letters appear. The Federal Bureau of Investigation,
however, has found it necessary to extend this division to many of the small-
letter groups which become cumbersome. The subsecondary is placed on the
classification line just to the right of the secondary. Ridge counts are
translated into small and large, represented by symbols I and O. The whorl
tracings are brought up as I, M, or O denoting inner, meeting or outer ridge
tracings of the whorl types. Only six fingers may be involved in the
subsecondary—numbers 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, and 9.
A ridge count of 1 to 9, inclusive, in the index fingers is brought up into the
subsecondary formula as I. A count of 10 or more is brought up as O. In the
middle fingers a count of from 1 to 10, inclusive, is brought up as I, and 11
or more is O. In the ring fingers a count of from 1 to 13 is brought up as I,
and 14 or more is O. A loop subsecondary could appear in the classification
formula as
OIO.
IIO
Analyzing this example of a subsecondary, one will know that in the index,
middle, and ring fingers of the right hand there are counts of over 9, under
11, and over 13, while in the left hand there are in the index, middle, and
ring fingers, counts of under 10, under 11, over 13, respectively. The
subsecondary classification, therefore, relates to the groupings of the prints,
and no difficulty should be experienced in ascertaining whether the I and O
arrangement in the subsecondary relates to loops or whorls when analyzing a
classification, because this information can be obtained from the primary
classification. Figure 350 is an example illustrating the subsecondary in
addition to other divisions of the classification formula.
Page 151
[Fig. 350]
[Enlarge]
The chart, figure 351, will illustrate the manner in which the ridge counts are
translated into the symbols I and O so they may be grouped and sequenced
with the whorl tracings I, M and O.
[Enlarge]
The chart, figure 351, will illustrate the manner in which the ridge counts are
translated into the symbols I and O so they may be grouped and sequenced
with the whorl tracings I, M and O.
Page 152
[Fig. 351]
[Enlarge]
The major division: The major division is placed just to the left of the
primary in the classification formula. Where whorls appear in the thumbs the
major division reflects the whorl tracings just as the subsecondary does. For
example, a major division of I over M in the primary 5 over 17 would reflect
an inner-traced whorl over a meeting-traced whorl in the thumbs. Where
loops appear in the thumbs, however, a table is used to translate the ridge
counts into the small, medium, or large groups, designated by the letters S,
M, L. An expanding table is used for the right thumb when large-count loops
appear in the left thumb, as shown in the chart (fig. 351). This table is used
because it affords a more equitable distribution of prints as a whole, for
filing purposes within the groups indicated.
Table for major divisions of loops:
Left thumb denominator Right thumb numerator
[Enlarge]
The major division: The major division is placed just to the left of the
primary in the classification formula. Where whorls appear in the thumbs the
major division reflects the whorl tracings just as the subsecondary does. For
example, a major division of I over M in the primary 5 over 17 would reflect
an inner-traced whorl over a meeting-traced whorl in the thumbs. Where
loops appear in the thumbs, however, a table is used to translate the ridge
counts into the small, medium, or large groups, designated by the letters S,
M, L. An expanding table is used for the right thumb when large-count loops
appear in the left thumb, as shown in the chart (fig. 351). This table is used
because it affords a more equitable distribution of prints as a whole, for
filing purposes within the groups indicated.
Table for major divisions of loops:
Left thumb denominator Right thumb numerator
Page 153
{ 1 to 11, inclusive, S (small).
1 to 11, inclusive, S (small) { 12 to 16, inclusive, M (medium).
{ 17 or more ridges, L (large).
{ 1 to 11, inclusive, S (small).
12 to 16, inclusive, M (medium) { 12 to 16, inclusive, M (medium).
{ 17 or more ridges, L (large).
{ 1 to 17, inclusive, S (small).
17 or more ridges, L (large) { 18 to 22, inclusive, M (medium).
{ 23 or more ridges, L (large).
The fingerprint card appearing in figure 352 shows a major division of L
over L, which is obtained by counting the ridges (24 in the right thumb and
18 in the left thumb) which, according to the table, is translated into L in
both thumbs.
The final: It is, of course, desirable to have a definite sequence or order of
filing the prints within the subdivided groups. This order is attained through
the use of the final, which is based upon the ridge count of the loop in the
right little finger. It is indicated at the extreme right of the numerator in the
classification. Note figure 352. If a loop does not appear in the right little
finger, a loop in the left little finger may be used. It is then indicated at the
extreme right of the denominator (fig. 353). If no loops appear in the little
fingers, a whorl may be used to obtain a final, counting from left delta to
core if in the right hand and from right delta to core if in the left hand. If
there are two or more cores (usually applies to accidental whorls), the ridge
count is made from left delta (right hand) or right delta (left hand) to the core
which is the least number of ridges distant from that delta. An exception is
made in the case of the double loop. The double loop is counted from the
delta to the core of the upright loop. Where loops of a double loop are
horizontal, the nearest core is used. Should both little fingers be a or t, no
final is used. The use of a whorl in a little finger for a final is required only
in connection with a large group or collection of prints, such as the 32 over
32 primary.
1 to 11, inclusive, S (small) { 12 to 16, inclusive, M (medium).
{ 17 or more ridges, L (large).
{ 1 to 11, inclusive, S (small).
12 to 16, inclusive, M (medium) { 12 to 16, inclusive, M (medium).
{ 17 or more ridges, L (large).
{ 1 to 17, inclusive, S (small).
17 or more ridges, L (large) { 18 to 22, inclusive, M (medium).
{ 23 or more ridges, L (large).
The fingerprint card appearing in figure 352 shows a major division of L
over L, which is obtained by counting the ridges (24 in the right thumb and
18 in the left thumb) which, according to the table, is translated into L in
both thumbs.
The final: It is, of course, desirable to have a definite sequence or order of
filing the prints within the subdivided groups. This order is attained through
the use of the final, which is based upon the ridge count of the loop in the
right little finger. It is indicated at the extreme right of the numerator in the
classification. Note figure 352. If a loop does not appear in the right little
finger, a loop in the left little finger may be used. It is then indicated at the
extreme right of the denominator (fig. 353). If no loops appear in the little
fingers, a whorl may be used to obtain a final, counting from left delta to
core if in the right hand and from right delta to core if in the left hand. If
there are two or more cores (usually applies to accidental whorls), the ridge
count is made from left delta (right hand) or right delta (left hand) to the core
which is the least number of ridges distant from that delta. An exception is
made in the case of the double loop. The double loop is counted from the
delta to the core of the upright loop. Where loops of a double loop are
horizontal, the nearest core is used. Should both little fingers be a or t, no
final is used. The use of a whorl in a little finger for a final is required only
in connection with a large group or collection of prints, such as the 32 over
32 primary.
Page 154
[Fig. 352]
[Enlarge]
The key: The key is obtained by counting the ridges of the first loop
appearing on the fingerprint card (beginning with the right thumb), exclusive
of the little fingers which are never considered for the key as they are
reserved for the final. The key, no matter where found, is always placed to
the extreme left of the numerator of the classification formula (fig. 353).
[Enlarge]
The key: The key is obtained by counting the ridges of the first loop
appearing on the fingerprint card (beginning with the right thumb), exclusive
of the little fingers which are never considered for the key as they are
reserved for the final. The key, no matter where found, is always placed to
the extreme left of the numerator of the classification formula (fig. 353).
Page 155
[Fig. 353]
[Enlarge]
Extensions
The second subsecondary classification: When a group of fingerprints
becomes so large that it is cumbersome and unwieldy, even though fully
extended, it can be subdivided further by using a second subsecondary
division, which is brought up into the classification formula directly above
the subsecondary, and for which the symbols S, M and L are used. The
following table is used:
[Enlarge]
Extensions
The second subsecondary classification: When a group of fingerprints
becomes so large that it is cumbersome and unwieldy, even though fully
extended, it can be subdivided further by using a second subsecondary
division, which is brought up into the classification formula directly above
the subsecondary, and for which the symbols S, M and L are used. The
following table is used:
Page 156
Index Middle Ring
1 to 5, inclusive, S. 1 to 8, inclusive, S. 1 to 10, inclusive, S.
6 to 12, inclusive, M.9 to 14, inclusive, M. 11 to 18, inclusive, M.
13 or more, L. 15 or more, L. 19 or more, L.
If this table is referred to, a study of figure 352 will demonstrate the use of
the second subsecondary.
WCDX extension: In the extension used in the Federal Bureau of
Investigation for the large whorl groups, the type of whorl is designated by
the symbols W, C, D, or X for the index fingers and w, c, d, or x for all other
fingers, according to its classification as defined in figure 354. These
symbols are used for subclassification purposes only and are brought up into
the classification formula directly above the subsecondary in their respective
positions, the right hand being the numerator, the left hand being the
denominator.
[Fig. 354]
[Enlarge]
1 to 5, inclusive, S. 1 to 8, inclusive, S. 1 to 10, inclusive, S.
6 to 12, inclusive, M.9 to 14, inclusive, M. 11 to 18, inclusive, M.
13 or more, L. 15 or more, L. 19 or more, L.
If this table is referred to, a study of figure 352 will demonstrate the use of
the second subsecondary.
WCDX extension: In the extension used in the Federal Bureau of
Investigation for the large whorl groups, the type of whorl is designated by
the symbols W, C, D, or X for the index fingers and w, c, d, or x for all other
fingers, according to its classification as defined in figure 354. These
symbols are used for subclassification purposes only and are brought up into
the classification formula directly above the subsecondary in their respective
positions, the right hand being the numerator, the left hand being the
denominator.
[Fig. 354]
[Enlarge]
Page 157
Special loop extension: In the all-loop group
(1R-U)
(1R-U),
the following special loop extension may be used, utilizing the ridge counts
in fingers Nos. 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, and, if necessary, No. 10:
Ridge Counts Value
1 to 4, inclusive 1
5 to 8, inclusive 2
9 to 12, inclusive 3
13 to 16, inclusive 4
17 to 20, inclusive 5
21 to 24, inclusive 6
25 and over 7
The resulting values in this extension are brought up into the classification
formula directly above the subsecondary in their respective positions, the
right hand being the numerator, the left hand being the denominator.
In addition to the extensions already mentioned, fingerprint groups may be
divided into male and female, and by age (either by year or by arbitrarily
setting an age limit, beyond which a print bearing such an age would be filed
separately in a "Reference" or a "Presumptive Dead" file).
In the files of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, all prints bearing an age
of 55 through 74 are filed in the "Reference" group and all prints bearing an
age of 75 years or more are filed in the "Presumptive Dead" file. Persons 75
years of age or older, in regard to crime, may be considered as generally
inactive and thus are filed as "Presumptive Dead." Such a group provides for
removing from the other files the cards concerning those of whom no notice
is ever received as to death.
A separate file should be maintained for deceased persons, for possible
future reference.
A separate file should be maintained for all prints bearing amputations and
which have an unequivocal statement or marking from the contributor to that
(1R-U)
(1R-U),
the following special loop extension may be used, utilizing the ridge counts
in fingers Nos. 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, and, if necessary, No. 10:
Ridge Counts Value
1 to 4, inclusive 1
5 to 8, inclusive 2
9 to 12, inclusive 3
13 to 16, inclusive 4
17 to 20, inclusive 5
21 to 24, inclusive 6
25 and over 7
The resulting values in this extension are brought up into the classification
formula directly above the subsecondary in their respective positions, the
right hand being the numerator, the left hand being the denominator.
In addition to the extensions already mentioned, fingerprint groups may be
divided into male and female, and by age (either by year or by arbitrarily
setting an age limit, beyond which a print bearing such an age would be filed
separately in a "Reference" or a "Presumptive Dead" file).
In the files of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, all prints bearing an age
of 55 through 74 are filed in the "Reference" group and all prints bearing an
age of 75 years or more are filed in the "Presumptive Dead" file. Persons 75
years of age or older, in regard to crime, may be considered as generally
inactive and thus are filed as "Presumptive Dead." Such a group provides for
removing from the other files the cards concerning those of whom no notice
is ever received as to death.
A separate file should be maintained for deceased persons, for possible
future reference.
A separate file should be maintained for all prints bearing amputations and
which have an unequivocal statement or marking from the contributor to that
Page 158
effect.
Permanent scars also may be utilized for this purpose, giving three more
groupings: those prints having permanent scars in the right hand, those
having a scar in the left, and those in which scars appear in both hands. A
separate file may be maintained for mutilated prints whether or not the
permanent-scar division is used. This is usually composed of prints so badly
mutilated, or so mutilated about the cores and deltas, that intentional
mutilation is suspected.
Permanent scars also may be utilized for this purpose, giving three more
groupings: those prints having permanent scars in the right hand, those
having a scar in the left, and those in which scars appear in both hands. A
separate file may be maintained for mutilated prints whether or not the
permanent-scar division is used. This is usually composed of prints so badly
mutilated, or so mutilated about the cores and deltas, that intentional
mutilation is suspected.
Page 159
CHAPTER V
Page 160
Classification of Scarred Patterns—Amputations—
Missing at Birth
Classification of scarred patterns
Emphasis should be placed upon the necessity for fully referencing all
scarred patterns. In connection with their proper classification, the following
rules should be observed:
● When an impression is so scarred that neither the general type of pattern
nor the ridge tracing or count can be determined with reasonable accuracy,
the impression should be given both the general type value and the
subclassification value of the corresponding finger of the other hand.
● When an impression is partially scarred, i.e., large scars about the core so
that the general type cannot be determined with reasonable accuracy, but
the ridges allow reasonably accurate subclassifications by ridge tracings or
counting, the impression should be given the primary value of the pattern of
the corresponding finger and the subclassification value as indicated by the
ridges of partially scarred impressions.
● When an impression is partially scarred and the general type of pattern can
be determined with reasonable accuracy, but the ridges cannot be traced or
counted so as to fall within the proper subsecondary classification, the
impression should be given the ridge count or tracing value of the
corresponding finger of the other hand, if the corresponding finger is of the
same general type. If the corresponding finger is not of the same general
type, the scarred impression should be given the probable value and
referenced to all other possibilities.
● When an impression is so scarred that neither the general type of pattern
nor the ridge tracing or count can be determined with reasonable accuracy,
and it so happens that the corresponding finger of the other hand is similarly
Missing at Birth
Classification of scarred patterns
Emphasis should be placed upon the necessity for fully referencing all
scarred patterns. In connection with their proper classification, the following
rules should be observed:
● When an impression is so scarred that neither the general type of pattern
nor the ridge tracing or count can be determined with reasonable accuracy,
the impression should be given both the general type value and the
subclassification value of the corresponding finger of the other hand.
● When an impression is partially scarred, i.e., large scars about the core so
that the general type cannot be determined with reasonable accuracy, but
the ridges allow reasonably accurate subclassifications by ridge tracings or
counting, the impression should be given the primary value of the pattern of
the corresponding finger and the subclassification value as indicated by the
ridges of partially scarred impressions.
● When an impression is partially scarred and the general type of pattern can
be determined with reasonable accuracy, but the ridges cannot be traced or
counted so as to fall within the proper subsecondary classification, the
impression should be given the ridge count or tracing value of the
corresponding finger of the other hand, if the corresponding finger is of the
same general type. If the corresponding finger is not of the same general
type, the scarred impression should be given the probable value and
referenced to all other possibilities.
● When an impression is so scarred that neither the general type of pattern
nor the ridge tracing or count can be determined with reasonable accuracy,
and it so happens that the corresponding finger of the other hand is similarly
Page 161
scarred, both patterns are given the arbitrary value of whorls with meeting
tracings.
In figure 355, the pattern is entirely obliterated. It could have been a small
whorl, a small ulnar or radial loop, an arch, or a tented arch. If the opposite
finger were an arch or tented arch or whorl, this impression would be
classified as arch, tented arch, or whorl (with the same tracing). If the
opposite finger were a small-count loop, this would be classified as a loop of
the same count. If the opposite finger were a large-count loop, this
impression would be given the count of the opposite finger even though it
could never have had that count. If the opposite finger were scarred in the
same fashion or were amputated or missing, both impressions would be
classified as whorls with meeting tracings.
[Fig. 355]
In figure 356, the general type of the pattern could have been loop (ulnar if
in the right hand) or whorl. If the opposite finger were a whorl this would be
classified as a whorl, and with the same tracing. If a radial loop were
opposite, this would be classified as an ulnar loop (if in the right hand). The
ridge count can be obtained with a fair degree of accuracy. If an arch or
tented arch were opposite, this impression would be classified as a loop
because it looks as if it had been a loop.
tracings.
In figure 355, the pattern is entirely obliterated. It could have been a small
whorl, a small ulnar or radial loop, an arch, or a tented arch. If the opposite
finger were an arch or tented arch or whorl, this impression would be
classified as arch, tented arch, or whorl (with the same tracing). If the
opposite finger were a small-count loop, this would be classified as a loop of
the same count. If the opposite finger were a large-count loop, this
impression would be given the count of the opposite finger even though it
could never have had that count. If the opposite finger were scarred in the
same fashion or were amputated or missing, both impressions would be
classified as whorls with meeting tracings.
[Fig. 355]
In figure 356, the general type of the pattern could have been loop (ulnar if
in the right hand) or whorl. If the opposite finger were a whorl this would be
classified as a whorl, and with the same tracing. If a radial loop were
opposite, this would be classified as an ulnar loop (if in the right hand). The
ridge count can be obtained with a fair degree of accuracy. If an arch or
tented arch were opposite, this impression would be classified as a loop
because it looks as if it had been a loop.
Page 162
[Fig. 356]
In figure 357, the ridge count cannot be determined accurately but it would
be classified as a loop, no matter what the opposite finger might be. If the
opposite finger were a loop with a count of from 6 to 17, this impression
would be given that count. If the count of the opposite loop were less or
more than 6 to 17, the count for this finger would be given I or O in the
subsecondary classification depending upon whether the opposite finger was
I or O, but would not be given less than 6 nor more than 17 counts as its
possibility is limited to those counts.
In figure 357, the ridge count cannot be determined accurately but it would
be classified as a loop, no matter what the opposite finger might be. If the
opposite finger were a loop with a count of from 6 to 17, this impression
would be given that count. If the count of the opposite loop were less or
more than 6 to 17, the count for this finger would be given I or O in the
subsecondary classification depending upon whether the opposite finger was
I or O, but would not be given less than 6 nor more than 17 counts as its
possibility is limited to those counts.
Page 163
[Fig. 357]
A pattern with a scar similar to either scar in figures 358 and 359 would
always be given a loop as it could be seen readily that there was no
possibility of its having been any other type of pattern.
[Figs. 358-359]
Classification of amputations and fingers missing at birth
When one or more amputations appear upon a fingerprint card, it may be
filed separately from those having no amputations in order to facilitate
searching. It is to be noted that before it may be filed in the amputation
A pattern with a scar similar to either scar in figures 358 and 359 would
always be given a loop as it could be seen readily that there was no
possibility of its having been any other type of pattern.
[Figs. 358-359]
Classification of amputations and fingers missing at birth
When one or more amputations appear upon a fingerprint card, it may be
filed separately from those having no amputations in order to facilitate
searching. It is to be noted that before it may be filed in the amputation
Page 164
group, the card must contain a definite and unequivocal statement or
marking by the contributor to the effect that a certain finger or fingers have
been amputated or were missing at birth. This prevents the appearance on
later cards of impressions of fingers thought to have been amputated but
which in reality were merely injured and bandaged when previous prints
were submitted.
If one finger is amputated, it is given a classification identical with that of
the opposite finger, including pattern and ridge count, or tracing, and
referenced to every other possible classification.
If two or more fingers are amputated, they are given classifications identical
with the fingers opposite, with no additional references.
If two amputated fingers are opposite each other, both are given the
classification of whorls with meeting tracings.
When a fingerprint card bearing a notation of fingers missing at birth is
classified, the missing fingers should be treated as amputations in that they
are given the identical classifications of the opposite fingers and are filed in
the amputation group. As these fingers are missing from a prenatal cause,
they would have always received the identical classification of the opposite
finger on any previous occasion.
If all 10 fingers are amputated or missing at birth, the classification will be
M 32 W MMM.
M 32 W MMM
If both hands are amputated or missing at birth, the footprints should be
taken as they, too, bear friction ridges with definite patterns. A footprint file
is maintained by the FBI for identification purposes in instances where the
subject has all fingers amputated or missing at birth.
Partially amputated fingers often present very complex problems and careful
consideration should be given to them. The question often arises as to the
appropriate groups in which they should be filed, i.e., amputations or
nonamputations. As no definite rule may be applied, it is a matter of
experience and judgment as to their preferred classification.
marking by the contributor to the effect that a certain finger or fingers have
been amputated or were missing at birth. This prevents the appearance on
later cards of impressions of fingers thought to have been amputated but
which in reality were merely injured and bandaged when previous prints
were submitted.
If one finger is amputated, it is given a classification identical with that of
the opposite finger, including pattern and ridge count, or tracing, and
referenced to every other possible classification.
If two or more fingers are amputated, they are given classifications identical
with the fingers opposite, with no additional references.
If two amputated fingers are opposite each other, both are given the
classification of whorls with meeting tracings.
When a fingerprint card bearing a notation of fingers missing at birth is
classified, the missing fingers should be treated as amputations in that they
are given the identical classifications of the opposite fingers and are filed in
the amputation group. As these fingers are missing from a prenatal cause,
they would have always received the identical classification of the opposite
finger on any previous occasion.
If all 10 fingers are amputated or missing at birth, the classification will be
M 32 W MMM.
M 32 W MMM
If both hands are amputated or missing at birth, the footprints should be
taken as they, too, bear friction ridges with definite patterns. A footprint file
is maintained by the FBI for identification purposes in instances where the
subject has all fingers amputated or missing at birth.
Partially amputated fingers often present very complex problems and careful
consideration should be given to them. The question often arises as to the
appropriate groups in which they should be filed, i.e., amputations or
nonamputations. As no definite rule may be applied, it is a matter of
experience and judgment as to their preferred classification.
Page 165
In those instances in which a partially amputated finger has half or more
than half of the pattern area missing, it is given the classification of the
opposite finger. It will be filed in the amputation group under the
classification of the opposite finger and reference searches should be
conducted in all possible classifications in the nonamputation groups. If two
or more of the fingers are amputated in this manner, they are given the
classification of the opposite fingers only and are governed by the rules
concerning amputations.
Generally, a "tip amputation," or one which has less than half of the first
joint amputated, will always be printed in the future. Therefore, a partially
amputated finger with less than half of the pattern area missing is classified
as it appears and is referenced to the opposite finger. It will be filed in the
nonamputation group and reference searches should be conducted under the
classification of the opposite finger, and in the amputation group. It must be
referenced this way even though it never could have originally had the
classification of the opposite finger.
Classification of bandaged or imprinted fingers
As noted in the chapter pertaining to "Problems in the Taking of Inked
Fingerprints," an indication to the effect "recently injured, bandaged" is not
sufficient to file a fingerprint card. It is obvious that a fingerprint card
bearing these notations cannot be properly classified or filed. If the injury is
temporary, and if possible, these prints should not be taken until after
healing.
If fingers are injured to the extent that it is impossible to secure inked
impressions by special inking devices, the unprinted fingers are given
classifications identical with the classifications of the fingers opposite. If
only one finger is lacking, reference searches should be conducted in every
possible classification. If more than one finger is lacking, they should be
given the classifications of the opposite fingers, but no reference searches
should be conducted. If there are two lacking, opposite each other, they
should be classified as whorls with meeting tracings.
If, however, in the case of an injured finger, observation is made of the
ridges of the finger itself and indicated on the print, this classification should
than half of the pattern area missing, it is given the classification of the
opposite finger. It will be filed in the amputation group under the
classification of the opposite finger and reference searches should be
conducted in all possible classifications in the nonamputation groups. If two
or more of the fingers are amputated in this manner, they are given the
classification of the opposite fingers only and are governed by the rules
concerning amputations.
Generally, a "tip amputation," or one which has less than half of the first
joint amputated, will always be printed in the future. Therefore, a partially
amputated finger with less than half of the pattern area missing is classified
as it appears and is referenced to the opposite finger. It will be filed in the
nonamputation group and reference searches should be conducted under the
classification of the opposite finger, and in the amputation group. It must be
referenced this way even though it never could have originally had the
classification of the opposite finger.
Classification of bandaged or imprinted fingers
As noted in the chapter pertaining to "Problems in the Taking of Inked
Fingerprints," an indication to the effect "recently injured, bandaged" is not
sufficient to file a fingerprint card. It is obvious that a fingerprint card
bearing these notations cannot be properly classified or filed. If the injury is
temporary, and if possible, these prints should not be taken until after
healing.
If fingers are injured to the extent that it is impossible to secure inked
impressions by special inking devices, the unprinted fingers are given
classifications identical with the classifications of the fingers opposite. If
only one finger is lacking, reference searches should be conducted in every
possible classification. If more than one finger is lacking, they should be
given the classifications of the opposite fingers, but no reference searches
should be conducted. If there are two lacking, opposite each other, they
should be classified as whorls with meeting tracings.
If, however, in the case of an injured finger, observation is made of the
ridges of the finger itself and indicated on the print, this classification should
Page 166
be, insofar as it is possible, utilized. For example, a missing impression
labeled "ulnar loop of about 8 counts" by the individual taking the prints,
should be searched in the subsecondary as both I and O but should not be
referenced as a pattern other than a loop. If the finger is used as the final, or
key, it should be searched enough counts on each side of 8 to allow for
possible error in the counting by the contributor using his naked eye.
labeled "ulnar loop of about 8 counts" by the individual taking the prints,
should be searched in the subsecondary as both I and O but should not be
referenced as a pattern other than a loop. If the finger is used as the final, or
key, it should be searched enough counts on each side of 8 to allow for
possible error in the counting by the contributor using his naked eye.
Page 167
CHAPTER VI
Page 168
Filing Sequence
The sequence must be arranged properly at all times to make possible the
most accurate work. Prints are sequenced and filed in this order, according
to:
I. Primary:
1 32.
to
1 32
In the primary classification the denominator remains constant until all
numerator figures have been exhausted from 1 to 32. All prints with the
primary 1 over 1 are filed together. These are followed by 2 over 1, 3 over 1,
4 over 1, etc., until 32 over 1 is reached. The next primary is 1 over 2, then 2
over 2, etc., until 32 over 2 is reached. Eventually, through the use of each
denominator figure and the elimination of each numerator over each
denominator, the 32 over 32 primary will be reached.
Even in the smaller collections of fingerprints, it will be found that the
groups which are arranged under the individual primaries filed in sequence,
from 1 over 1 to 32 over 32, will be too voluminous for expeditious
searching.
II. Secondary:
A. Secondary small-letter group:
A r W3r.
to
A r W3r
Most intricate of all the individual sequences is the small-letter sequence. It
is less difficult if the following method is used:
1. Sequence according to the patterns in the index fingers, grouped
The sequence must be arranged properly at all times to make possible the
most accurate work. Prints are sequenced and filed in this order, according
to:
I. Primary:
1 32.
to
1 32
In the primary classification the denominator remains constant until all
numerator figures have been exhausted from 1 to 32. All prints with the
primary 1 over 1 are filed together. These are followed by 2 over 1, 3 over 1,
4 over 1, etc., until 32 over 1 is reached. The next primary is 1 over 2, then 2
over 2, etc., until 32 over 2 is reached. Eventually, through the use of each
denominator figure and the elimination of each numerator over each
denominator, the 32 over 32 primary will be reached.
Even in the smaller collections of fingerprints, it will be found that the
groups which are arranged under the individual primaries filed in sequence,
from 1 over 1 to 32 over 32, will be too voluminous for expeditious
searching.
II. Secondary:
A. Secondary small-letter group:
A r W3r.
to
A r W3r
Most intricate of all the individual sequences is the small-letter sequence. It
is less difficult if the following method is used:
1. Sequence according to the patterns in the index fingers, grouped
Page 169
A W.
to
A W
When small letters are present, there are 25 possible combinations which can
appear in the index fingers. They are as follows:
A T R U W
- - - - -
A A A A A
A T R U W
- - - - -
T T T T T
A T R U W
- - - - -
R R R R R
A T U R W
- - - - -
U U U U U
A T U R W
- - - - -
W W W W W
2. Within each group sequence:
a. The denominator, by—
(1) Count of the small letters (lesser preceding the
greater).
(2) Position of the small letters (those to the left
preceding those to the right).
(3) Type of small letter (sequence a, t, r).
b. The numerator, by—
(1) Count.
(2) Position.
(3) Type.
to
A W
When small letters are present, there are 25 possible combinations which can
appear in the index fingers. They are as follows:
A T R U W
- - - - -
A A A A A
A T R U W
- - - - -
T T T T T
A T R U W
- - - - -
R R R R R
A T U R W
- - - - -
U U U U U
A T U R W
- - - - -
W W W W W
2. Within each group sequence:
a. The denominator, by—
(1) Count of the small letters (lesser preceding the
greater).
(2) Position of the small letters (those to the left
preceding those to the right).
(3) Type of small letter (sequence a, t, r).
b. The numerator, by—
(1) Count.
(2) Position.
(3) Type.
Page 170
Thus
A T
precedes
A A
A A
precedes
rAt A3t
A A
precedes
aA Aa
A A
precedes
At Ar
aA aAa
precedes
aAr aAr
rA Ar
precedes
aA2a aA2a
aAtat aAtar
precedes
tA3r tA3r
The following table represents the full sequence of the denominator of the
group having A over A in the index fingers. The full sequence as listed may
A T
precedes
A A
A A
precedes
rAt A3t
A A
precedes
aA Aa
A A
precedes
At Ar
aA aAa
precedes
aAr aAr
rA Ar
precedes
aA2a aA2a
aAtat aAtar
precedes
tA3r tA3r
The following table represents the full sequence of the denominator of the
group having A over A in the index fingers. The full sequence as listed may
Page 171
be used as the numerator for each denominator as set out below. Following
the group with A over A in the index fingers is the group with T over A in the
index fingers, the sequence being the same otherwise. Then R over A, U
over A, A over T to rW3r over rW3r.
A tAra aA2at tA2tr
aA tArt aA2ar tAtra
tA tA2r aAata tAtrt
rA rA2a aAa2t tAt2r
Aa rAat aAatr tAr2a
At rAar aAara tArat
Ar rAta aAart tArar
aAa rA2t aAa2r tArta
aAt rAtr aAt2a tAr2t
aAr rAra aAtat tArtr
tAa rArt aAtar tA2ra
tAt rA2r aA2ta tA2rt
tAr A3a aA3t tA3r
rAa A2at aA2tr rA3a
rAt A2ar aAtra rA2at
rAr Aata aAtrt rA2ar
A2a Aa2t aAt2r rAata
Aat Aatr aAr2a rAa2t
Aar Aara aArat rAatr
Ata Aart aArar rAara
A2t Aa2r aArta rAart
Atr At2a aAr2t rAa2r
Ara Atat aArtr rAt2a
Art Atar aA2ra rAtat
A2r A2ta aA2rt rAtar
aA2a A3t aA3r rA2ta
aAat A2tr tA3a rA3t
aAar Atra tA2at rA2tr
aAta Atrt tA2ar rAtra
aA2t At2r tAata rAtrt
the group with A over A in the index fingers is the group with T over A in the
index fingers, the sequence being the same otherwise. Then R over A, U
over A, A over T to rW3r over rW3r.
A tAra aA2at tA2tr
aA tArt aA2ar tAtra
tA tA2r aAata tAtrt
rA rA2a aAa2t tAt2r
Aa rAat aAatr tAr2a
At rAar aAara tArat
Ar rAta aAart tArar
aAa rA2t aAa2r tArta
aAt rAtr aAt2a tAr2t
aAr rAra aAtat tArtr
tAa rArt aAtar tA2ra
tAt rA2r aA2ta tA2rt
tAr A3a aA3t tA3r
rAa A2at aA2tr rA3a
rAt A2ar aAtra rA2at
rAr Aata aAtrt rA2ar
A2a Aa2t aAt2r rAata
Aat Aatr aAr2a rAa2t
Aar Aara aArat rAatr
Ata Aart aArar rAara
A2t Aa2r aArta rAart
Atr At2a aAr2t rAa2r
Ara Atat aArtr rAt2a
Art Atar aA2ra rAtat
A2r A2ta aA2rt rAtar
aA2a A3t aA3r rA2ta
aAat A2tr tA3a rA3t
aAar Atra tA2at rA2tr
aAta Atrt tA2ar rAtra
aA2t At2r tAata rAtrt
Page 172
aAtr Ar2a tAa2t rAt2r
aAra Arat tAatr rAr2a
aArt Arar tAara rArat
aA2r Arta tAart rArar
tA2a Ar2t tAa2r rArta
tAat Artr tAt2a rAr2t
tAar A2ra tAtat rArtr
tAta A2rt tAtar rA2ra
tA2t A3r tA2ta rA2rt
tAtr aA3a tA3t rA3r
B. Secondary loop and whorl group:
R W.
to
R W
When no small letters are present, there are 9 possible combinations which
can appear in the index fingers. They are as follows:
R U W
- - -
R R R
R U W
- - -
U U U
R U W
- - -
W W W
At this point it is well to note that it may be preferable in some instances
where small files are concerned to use only a portion of the classification
formula in the filing sequence. In such cases, only those parts of the filing
sequence which are necessary should be used along with the final and key.
III. Subsecondary:
III to OOO.
aAra Arat tAatr rAr2a
aArt Arar tAara rArat
aA2r Arta tAart rArar
tA2a Ar2t tAa2r rArta
tAat Artr tAt2a rAr2t
tAar A2ra tAtat rArtr
tAta A2rt tAtar rA2ra
tA2t A3r tA2ta rA2rt
tAtr aA3a tA3t rA3r
B. Secondary loop and whorl group:
R W.
to
R W
When no small letters are present, there are 9 possible combinations which
can appear in the index fingers. They are as follows:
R U W
- - -
R R R
R U W
- - -
U U U
R U W
- - -
W W W
At this point it is well to note that it may be preferable in some instances
where small files are concerned to use only a portion of the classification
formula in the filing sequence. In such cases, only those parts of the filing
sequence which are necessary should be used along with the final and key.
III. Subsecondary:
III to OOO.
Page 173
III OOO
The sequence of the subsecondary is as follows:
III IIM IIO IMI IMM IMO IOI
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
III III III III III III III
IOM IOO MII MIM MIO MMI MMM
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
III III III III III III III
MMO MOI MOM MOO OII OIM OIO
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
III III III III III III III
OMI OMM OMO OOI OOM OOO OOO,
--- --- --- --- --- --- etc., to ---
III III III III III III OOO
each numerator in turn becoming the denominator for the complete sequence
of numerators as listed above.
IV. Major:
The following sequence is used when loops appear in both thumbs:
S M L S M L S M L
- - - - - - - - -
S S S M M M L L L
When whorls appear in both thumbs the sequence is:
I M O I M O I M O
- - - - - - - - -
I I I M M M O O O
When a whorl appears in the right thumb and a loop in the left, the sequence
is:
I M O I M O I M O
- - - - - - - - -
S S S M M M L L L
When a loop appears in the right thumb and a whorl in the left, the sequence
is:
The sequence of the subsecondary is as follows:
III IIM IIO IMI IMM IMO IOI
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
III III III III III III III
IOM IOO MII MIM MIO MMI MMM
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
III III III III III III III
MMO MOI MOM MOO OII OIM OIO
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
III III III III III III III
OMI OMM OMO OOI OOM OOO OOO,
--- --- --- --- --- --- etc., to ---
III III III III III III OOO
each numerator in turn becoming the denominator for the complete sequence
of numerators as listed above.
IV. Major:
The following sequence is used when loops appear in both thumbs:
S M L S M L S M L
- - - - - - - - -
S S S M M M L L L
When whorls appear in both thumbs the sequence is:
I M O I M O I M O
- - - - - - - - -
I I I M M M O O O
When a whorl appears in the right thumb and a loop in the left, the sequence
is:
I M O I M O I M O
- - - - - - - - -
S S S M M M L L L
When a loop appears in the right thumb and a whorl in the left, the sequence
is:
Page 174
S M L S M L S M L
- - - - - - - - -
I I I M M M O O O
V. Second Subsecondary:
SSS LLL.
to
SSS LLL
The sequence for filing the second subsecondary is as follows:
SSS SSM SSL SMS SMM SML
--- --- --- --- --- ---
SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS
SLS SLM SLL MSS MSM MSL
--- --- --- --- --- ---
SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS
MMS MMM MML MLS MLM MLL
--- --- --- --- --- ---
SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS
LSS LSM LSL LMS LMM LML
--- --- --- --- --- ---
SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS
LLS LLM LLL, LLL,
--- --- --- etc., to ---
SSS SSS SSS LLL
each group of the numerator becoming in turn the denominator for the
complete sequence of numerators as listed above.
VI. W C D X Extensions:
W xX3x.
to
W xX3x
The sequence is as follows: Prints with c, d, or x in any finger other than the
index fingers constitute the small-letter group. A sample of the sequence
follows:
W cWc xWd Wdx
cW cWd xWx Wxc
- - - - - - - - -
I I I M M M O O O
V. Second Subsecondary:
SSS LLL.
to
SSS LLL
The sequence for filing the second subsecondary is as follows:
SSS SSM SSL SMS SMM SML
--- --- --- --- --- ---
SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS
SLS SLM SLL MSS MSM MSL
--- --- --- --- --- ---
SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS
MMS MMM MML MLS MLM MLL
--- --- --- --- --- ---
SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS
LSS LSM LSL LMS LMM LML
--- --- --- --- --- ---
SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS
LLS LLM LLL, LLL,
--- --- --- etc., to ---
SSS SSS SSS LLL
each group of the numerator becoming in turn the denominator for the
complete sequence of numerators as listed above.
VI. W C D X Extensions:
W xX3x.
to
W xX3x
The sequence is as follows: Prints with c, d, or x in any finger other than the
index fingers constitute the small-letter group. A sample of the sequence
follows:
W cWc xWd Wdx
cW cWd xWx Wxc
Page 175
dW cWx W2c Wxd
xW dWc Wcd W2x
Wc dWd Wcx cW2c
Wd dW Wdc cWcd
Wx xWc W2d cWcx
As may be readily seen, the sequence proceeds in the same fashion as the a,
t, r, small-letter sequence.
VII. Special Loop Extension used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation:
111 777.
to
111 777
The following is a partial sequence for filing this extension:
111 112 113 114 115 116 117
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
121 122 123 124 125 126 127
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
131 132 133 134 135 136 137
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
141 142 143 144 145 146 147
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
151 152 153 154 155 156 157
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
161 162 163 164 165 166 167
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
171 172 173 174 175 176 177 777.
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- etc., to ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111 777
No matter how many of these divisions may be used, the order should
remain the same; and no matter how many of these divisions are used, each
xW dWc Wcd W2x
Wc dWd Wcx cW2c
Wd dW Wdc cWcd
Wx xWc W2d cWcx
As may be readily seen, the sequence proceeds in the same fashion as the a,
t, r, small-letter sequence.
VII. Special Loop Extension used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation:
111 777.
to
111 777
The following is a partial sequence for filing this extension:
111 112 113 114 115 116 117
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
121 122 123 124 125 126 127
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
131 132 133 134 135 136 137
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
141 142 143 144 145 146 147
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
151 152 153 154 155 156 157
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
161 162 163 164 165 166 167
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111
171 172 173 174 175 176 177 777.
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- etc., to ---
111 111 111 111 111 111 111 777
No matter how many of these divisions may be used, the order should
remain the same; and no matter how many of these divisions are used, each
Page 176
individual group should be sequenced by:
VIII. Final:
Filed in numerical sequence from 1 out. For example, assume that there are
15 prints in a group having a final of 14. All of these should be filed together
and followed by those prints in the same group having a final of 15, etc.
IX. Key:
All prints appearing in a designated final group are arranged by key in
numerical sequence from 1 out. For example, assume that there are 5 prints
in a group having a key of 14. All of these should be filed together and
followed by those prints in the same group having a key of 15, etc.
VIII. Final:
Filed in numerical sequence from 1 out. For example, assume that there are
15 prints in a group having a final of 14. All of these should be filed together
and followed by those prints in the same group having a final of 15, etc.
IX. Key:
All prints appearing in a designated final group are arranged by key in
numerical sequence from 1 out. For example, assume that there are 5 prints
in a group having a key of 14. All of these should be filed together and
followed by those prints in the same group having a key of 15, etc.
Page 177
CHAPTER VII
Page 178
Searching and Referencing
Searching
When searching a print through the fingerprint files in order to establish an
identification, it should be remembered that the fingerprint cards are filed in
such a way that all those prints having the same classification are together.
Thus, the print being searched is compared only with the groups having a
comparable classification, rather than with the whole file.
After locating the proper group classification, the searcher should fix in his
mind the one or two most outstanding characteristics of the patterns of the
current print and look for them among the prints in file. If a print is found
which has a characteristic resembling one upon the current print, the two
prints should be examined closely to determine if identical. To avoid making
an erroneous identification, the searcher should be exceedingly careful to
ascertain that the prints being compared are identical in all respects before
identifying one against the other.
To establish identity, it is necessary to locate several points of identity
among the characteristics of the prints. The number of identical
characteristics is left to the discretion of the individual but he should be
absolutely certain that the prints are identical before treating them as such.
Characteristics need not appear within the pattern area, since any ridge
formation is acceptable. Quite often excellent ridge detail appears in the
second joint of the finger. The characteristics used to establish an
identification are shown in figure 102.
The final and the key may be considered control figures for searching prints.
They limit the number of prints it is necessary to search in a group to those
prints having finals and keys closely related to the final and key of the print
being searched.
Searching
When searching a print through the fingerprint files in order to establish an
identification, it should be remembered that the fingerprint cards are filed in
such a way that all those prints having the same classification are together.
Thus, the print being searched is compared only with the groups having a
comparable classification, rather than with the whole file.
After locating the proper group classification, the searcher should fix in his
mind the one or two most outstanding characteristics of the patterns of the
current print and look for them among the prints in file. If a print is found
which has a characteristic resembling one upon the current print, the two
prints should be examined closely to determine if identical. To avoid making
an erroneous identification, the searcher should be exceedingly careful to
ascertain that the prints being compared are identical in all respects before
identifying one against the other.
To establish identity, it is necessary to locate several points of identity
among the characteristics of the prints. The number of identical
characteristics is left to the discretion of the individual but he should be
absolutely certain that the prints are identical before treating them as such.
Characteristics need not appear within the pattern area, since any ridge
formation is acceptable. Quite often excellent ridge detail appears in the
second joint of the finger. The characteristics used to establish an
identification are shown in figure 102.
The final and the key may be considered control figures for searching prints.
They limit the number of prints it is necessary to search in a group to those
prints having finals and keys closely related to the final and key of the print
being searched.
Page 179
Due to the possibility of visual misinterpretation, distortion by pressure, or
poor condition of the ridge detail of the prints in file, it is advisable to allow
a margin for such discrepancies. Except in cases where the ridge count of the
final and/or key is questionable on the print being searched, the following
procedure is used:
Of the prints within any group classification, only those prints are examined
which have a final within 2 ridge counts on each side of the final of the print
being searched. For example, if the print to be searched has a final of 17, all
prints bearing a final 15 through 19 will be compared with it.
Within the final of any group classification, only those prints are examined
which have a key within 2 ridge counts on each side of the key of the print
being searched. For example, if the print to be searched has a key of 20, all
prints bearing a key of 18 through 22 will be compared with it.
In figure 352, it will be noted that there are 17 ridge counts appearing in the
right little finger and this number is used as the final. It will also be noted
that there is a loop of 24 ridge counts in the right thumb and this number is
used as the key inasmuch as it is the first loop. In this example, the print is
searched in the group classification which has finals ranging from 15
through 19. Within this group of finals the prints which have keys ranging
from 22 through 26 are examined.
Referencing
Too much stress cannot be placed upon the necessity of referencing
questionable patterns, whether it be in the interpretation of the type of
pattern, the ridge count, or the tracing.
The factors which make it necessary are: variation in individual judgment
and eyesight, the amount of ink used, the amount of pressure used in taking
the prints, the difference in width of the rolled impressions, skin diseases,
worn ridges due to age or occupations, temporary and permanent scars,
bandaged fingers, crippled hands, and amputation.
For the highest degree of accuracy, all rolled impressions should be checked
by the plain impressions, which generally are not distorted by pressure. This
also helps prevent error caused by the reversal or mixing of the rolled
poor condition of the ridge detail of the prints in file, it is advisable to allow
a margin for such discrepancies. Except in cases where the ridge count of the
final and/or key is questionable on the print being searched, the following
procedure is used:
Of the prints within any group classification, only those prints are examined
which have a final within 2 ridge counts on each side of the final of the print
being searched. For example, if the print to be searched has a final of 17, all
prints bearing a final 15 through 19 will be compared with it.
Within the final of any group classification, only those prints are examined
which have a key within 2 ridge counts on each side of the key of the print
being searched. For example, if the print to be searched has a key of 20, all
prints bearing a key of 18 through 22 will be compared with it.
In figure 352, it will be noted that there are 17 ridge counts appearing in the
right little finger and this number is used as the final. It will also be noted
that there is a loop of 24 ridge counts in the right thumb and this number is
used as the key inasmuch as it is the first loop. In this example, the print is
searched in the group classification which has finals ranging from 15
through 19. Within this group of finals the prints which have keys ranging
from 22 through 26 are examined.
Referencing
Too much stress cannot be placed upon the necessity of referencing
questionable patterns, whether it be in the interpretation of the type of
pattern, the ridge count, or the tracing.
The factors which make it necessary are: variation in individual judgment
and eyesight, the amount of ink used, the amount of pressure used in taking
the prints, the difference in width of the rolled impressions, skin diseases,
worn ridges due to age or occupations, temporary and permanent scars,
bandaged fingers, crippled hands, and amputation.
For the highest degree of accuracy, all rolled impressions should be checked
by the plain impressions, which generally are not distorted by pressure. This
also helps prevent error caused by the reversal or mixing of the rolled
Page 180
impressions out of their proper order. For the same reason, as much of the
counting and tracing should be done in the plain impressions as it is possible
to do.
If there is any doubt as to which of two or more classifications should be
assigned to a given pattern, it is given the preferred classification and
reference searches are conducted in all other possible classifications. For
example, if on a print with the preferred classification
1A
1 Aa
it is questionable whether the left middle finger should be a plain arch, a
tented arch, or a radial loop, the print is searched in the
1A
1 Aa
group, and reference searches are conducted in the
1A
1 At
and
1A
1 Ar
groups. For further illustration, a print is given a preferred primary
classification of
1,
1
although the ridge detail on the right thumb is so formed as to resemble a
whorl. The search is completed first in the preferred
1
counting and tracing should be done in the plain impressions as it is possible
to do.
If there is any doubt as to which of two or more classifications should be
assigned to a given pattern, it is given the preferred classification and
reference searches are conducted in all other possible classifications. For
example, if on a print with the preferred classification
1A
1 Aa
it is questionable whether the left middle finger should be a plain arch, a
tented arch, or a radial loop, the print is searched in the
1A
1 Aa
group, and reference searches are conducted in the
1A
1 At
and
1A
1 Ar
groups. For further illustration, a print is given a preferred primary
classification of
1,
1
although the ridge detail on the right thumb is so formed as to resemble a
whorl. The search is completed first in the preferred
1
Page 181
1
primary classification and a reference search is then conducted in the
1
17
primary.
All ridge counts that are "line counts," i.e., when one more or one less count
would change the designation of the loop from I to O or from S to M, etc.,
must be searched in both groups. For example, in a print classified
16 M 1 U III 10,
M 1 U III
if the ridge count of the right middle finger is 10 and the count in the right
thumb is 16 (as indicated by the key), the print would be searched first as
classified, then reference searches would be conducted in the following
groups:
M 1 U IOI, L 1 U III, L 1 U IOI
and
M 1 U III M 1 U III M 1 U III
When there is doubt concerning the tracing of a whorl, it should be treated in
the same fashion. For example, if in the classification
O5U
I 17 U
doubt existed as to whether the tracing of the right thumb might not be a
meeting tracing, the print would be searched as classified, and a reference
search would be conducted in
M 5 U.
I 17 U
If there is no doubt concerning the ridge count used for the final, it is enough
to search out of the group only those prints containing a final within 2 ridge
primary classification and a reference search is then conducted in the
1
17
primary.
All ridge counts that are "line counts," i.e., when one more or one less count
would change the designation of the loop from I to O or from S to M, etc.,
must be searched in both groups. For example, in a print classified
16 M 1 U III 10,
M 1 U III
if the ridge count of the right middle finger is 10 and the count in the right
thumb is 16 (as indicated by the key), the print would be searched first as
classified, then reference searches would be conducted in the following
groups:
M 1 U IOI, L 1 U III, L 1 U IOI
and
M 1 U III M 1 U III M 1 U III
When there is doubt concerning the tracing of a whorl, it should be treated in
the same fashion. For example, if in the classification
O5U
I 17 U
doubt existed as to whether the tracing of the right thumb might not be a
meeting tracing, the print would be searched as classified, and a reference
search would be conducted in
M 5 U.
I 17 U
If there is no doubt concerning the ridge count used for the final, it is enough
to search out of the group only those prints containing a final within 2 ridge
Page 182
counts on each side of the final on the print being searched. When, however,
there is doubt concerning the ridge count of the final, the print should be
searched 2 ridge counts on each side of the two extremes of possibility. For
example, if it were possible for a final to be 6, 7, 8, or 9 ridge counts, the
print should be searched through that part of the group bearing finals of from
4 through 11.
The above explanation pertaining to the final also applies to the key.
All prints bearing amputations should be referenced to the necessary files
containing prints other than amputations for reference searches.
In instances where only one finger is amputated, reference searches are
conducted in all possible classifications, including all possible ridge counts
or tracings. For example, a print containing the classification:
AMP
4 S 1 U III 6
S 1 U III
with the right index finger amputated, the left index finger being an ulnar
loop, would be searched first in the amputation group for the classification,
then reference searches would be conducted in the following groups in the
nonamputation files:
S 1 U III S 1 T II S 17 W III
S 1 U III S 1 U III S 1 U III
S 1 U OII S 1 R III S 17 W MII
S 1 U III S 1 U III S 1 U III
S 1 A II S 1 R OII S 17 W OII
S 1 U III S 1 U III S 1 U III
there is doubt concerning the ridge count of the final, the print should be
searched 2 ridge counts on each side of the two extremes of possibility. For
example, if it were possible for a final to be 6, 7, 8, or 9 ridge counts, the
print should be searched through that part of the group bearing finals of from
4 through 11.
The above explanation pertaining to the final also applies to the key.
All prints bearing amputations should be referenced to the necessary files
containing prints other than amputations for reference searches.
In instances where only one finger is amputated, reference searches are
conducted in all possible classifications, including all possible ridge counts
or tracings. For example, a print containing the classification:
AMP
4 S 1 U III 6
S 1 U III
with the right index finger amputated, the left index finger being an ulnar
loop, would be searched first in the amputation group for the classification,
then reference searches would be conducted in the following groups in the
nonamputation files:
S 1 U III S 1 T II S 17 W III
S 1 U III S 1 U III S 1 U III
S 1 U OII S 1 R III S 17 W MII
S 1 U III S 1 U III S 1 U III
S 1 A II S 1 R OII S 17 W OII
S 1 U III S 1 U III S 1 U III
Page 183
All prints bearing unprinted or badly crippled fingers are filed in the
nonamputation files, and reference searches are conducted in the amputation
group.
For the purpose of determining if it is feasible to conduct reference searches
in all possible classifications, the method of referencing amputations is
applied to completely scarred patterns (Chapter titled "Scarred Patterns—
Amputations—Missing at Birth"). For example, a print bearing the preferred
classification:
13 O 17 W OOO 14
L 17 U OOI
with the left middle finger completely scarred, the right middle finger being
an ulnar loop with a ridge count of 13, would be searched first in the group
for that classification, then reference searches would be conducted in the
following groups:
O 17 W OOO O 17 W O 19 W OOO
L 17 U OII L 17 Ur L 17 U OOI
O 17 W O 19 W OOO
L 17 Ua L 17 U OII
O 17 W O 19 W OOO
L 17 Ut L 17 U OMI
The referencing of partial scars is a problem in which many factors are
present. A full explanation of the scars, their preferred classifications and
their references is made in the chapter, "Classification of Scarred Patterns—
Amputations—Missing at Birth."
When the age extension is utilized and a "Reference" group and a
"Presumptive Dead" file are maintained, it is suggested that a general
nonamputation files, and reference searches are conducted in the amputation
group.
For the purpose of determining if it is feasible to conduct reference searches
in all possible classifications, the method of referencing amputations is
applied to completely scarred patterns (Chapter titled "Scarred Patterns—
Amputations—Missing at Birth"). For example, a print bearing the preferred
classification:
13 O 17 W OOO 14
L 17 U OOI
with the left middle finger completely scarred, the right middle finger being
an ulnar loop with a ridge count of 13, would be searched first in the group
for that classification, then reference searches would be conducted in the
following groups:
O 17 W OOO O 17 W O 19 W OOO
L 17 U OII L 17 Ur L 17 U OOI
O 17 W O 19 W OOO
L 17 Ua L 17 U OII
O 17 W O 19 W OOO
L 17 Ut L 17 U OMI
The referencing of partial scars is a problem in which many factors are
present. A full explanation of the scars, their preferred classifications and
their references is made in the chapter, "Classification of Scarred Patterns—
Amputations—Missing at Birth."
When the age extension is utilized and a "Reference" group and a
"Presumptive Dead" file are maintained, it is suggested that a general
Page 184
allowance of 5 years be considered to allow for a discrepancy in prints
bearing the ages of 50 years or older.
In the files of the Federal Bureau of Investigation the various age groups are
as follows:
1-54 "Regular" file.
55-74 "Reference" file.
75 and over "Presumptive Dead" file.
Reference searches for the preceding groups are conducted in the following
manner:
50-54 Referenced to "Reference" file.
70-74 Referenced to "Presumptive Dead" file and "Regular" file.
75-79 Referenced to "Reference" file and "Regular" file.
80 and older Referenced to "Regular" file only.
If no age is given, it should be searched first in the regular file and reference
searches should be conducted in the "Reference" group and the "Presumptive
Dead" file.
When separate male and female files are maintained, there may be doubt as
to the sex of a subject due to a discrepancy between the sex indicated and the
name and the description and picture. In such case try to determine the sex
from the description and the size of the prints, then reference the print to the
other file. A Photostat copy can be made and placed in the other file until the
true sex can be determined.
bearing the ages of 50 years or older.
In the files of the Federal Bureau of Investigation the various age groups are
as follows:
1-54 "Regular" file.
55-74 "Reference" file.
75 and over "Presumptive Dead" file.
Reference searches for the preceding groups are conducted in the following
manner:
50-54 Referenced to "Reference" file.
70-74 Referenced to "Presumptive Dead" file and "Regular" file.
75-79 Referenced to "Reference" file and "Regular" file.
80 and older Referenced to "Regular" file only.
If no age is given, it should be searched first in the regular file and reference
searches should be conducted in the "Reference" group and the "Presumptive
Dead" file.
When separate male and female files are maintained, there may be doubt as
to the sex of a subject due to a discrepancy between the sex indicated and the
name and the description and picture. In such case try to determine the sex
from the description and the size of the prints, then reference the print to the
other file. A Photostat copy can be made and placed in the other file until the
true sex can be determined.
Page 185
CHAPTER VIII
Page 186
How To Take Inked Fingerprints
The equipment required for taking fingerprints consists of an inking plate, a
cardholder, printer's ink (heavy black paste), and a roller. This equipment is
simple and inexpensive.
In order to obtain clear, distinct fingerprints, it is necessary to spread the
printer's ink in a thin even coating on a small inking plate. A roller similar to
that used by printers in making galley proofs is best adapted for use as a
spreader. Its size is a matter determined by individual needs and preferences;
however, a roller approximately 6 inches long and 2 inches in diameter has
been found to be very satisfactory. These rollers may be obtained from a
fingerprint supply company or a printing supply house.
An inking plate may be made from a hard, rigid, scratch-resistant metal plate
6 inches wide by 14 inches long or by inlaying a block of wood with a piece
of glass one-fourth of an inch thick, 6 inches wide, and 14 inches long. The
glass plate by itself would be suitable, but it should be fixed to a base in
order to prevent breakage. The inking surface should be elevated to a
sufficient height to allow the subject's forearm to assume a horizontal
position when the fingers are being inked. For example, the inking plate may
be placed on the edge of a counter or a table of counter height. In such a
position, the operator has greater assurance of avoiding accidental strain or
pressure on the fingers and should be able to procure more uniform
impressions. The inking plate should also be placed so that the subject's
fingers which are not being printed can be made to "swing" off the table to
prevent their interfering with the inking process. A fingerprint stand such as
that shown in figure 360 may be purchased from fingerprint supply
companies. The stand is made of hardwood and measures approximately 2
feet in length, 1 foot in height and width. This stand contains a cardholder
and a chrome strip which is used as the inking plate. Two compartments
used to store blank fingerprint cards and supplies complete the stand. This
equipment should be supplemented by a cleansing fluid and necessary cloths
so that the subject's fingers may be cleaned before rolling and the inking
The equipment required for taking fingerprints consists of an inking plate, a
cardholder, printer's ink (heavy black paste), and a roller. This equipment is
simple and inexpensive.
In order to obtain clear, distinct fingerprints, it is necessary to spread the
printer's ink in a thin even coating on a small inking plate. A roller similar to
that used by printers in making galley proofs is best adapted for use as a
spreader. Its size is a matter determined by individual needs and preferences;
however, a roller approximately 6 inches long and 2 inches in diameter has
been found to be very satisfactory. These rollers may be obtained from a
fingerprint supply company or a printing supply house.
An inking plate may be made from a hard, rigid, scratch-resistant metal plate
6 inches wide by 14 inches long or by inlaying a block of wood with a piece
of glass one-fourth of an inch thick, 6 inches wide, and 14 inches long. The
glass plate by itself would be suitable, but it should be fixed to a base in
order to prevent breakage. The inking surface should be elevated to a
sufficient height to allow the subject's forearm to assume a horizontal
position when the fingers are being inked. For example, the inking plate may
be placed on the edge of a counter or a table of counter height. In such a
position, the operator has greater assurance of avoiding accidental strain or
pressure on the fingers and should be able to procure more uniform
impressions. The inking plate should also be placed so that the subject's
fingers which are not being printed can be made to "swing" off the table to
prevent their interfering with the inking process. A fingerprint stand such as
that shown in figure 360 may be purchased from fingerprint supply
companies. The stand is made of hardwood and measures approximately 2
feet in length, 1 foot in height and width. This stand contains a cardholder
and a chrome strip which is used as the inking plate. Two compartments
used to store blank fingerprint cards and supplies complete the stand. This
equipment should be supplemented by a cleansing fluid and necessary cloths
so that the subject's fingers may be cleaned before rolling and the inking
Page 187
plate cleaned after using. Denatured alcohol and commercially available
cleaning fluids are suitable for this purpose.
[Fig. 360]
The fingerprints should be taken on 8- by 8-inch cardstock, as this size has
generally been adopted by law enforcement because of facility in filing and
desirability of uniformity. Figure 361 shows fingerprints properly taken on
one of the standard personnel identification cards from the Federal Bureau of
Investigation. From this illustration, it is evident there are two types of
impressions involved in the process of taking fingerprints. The upper 10
prints are taken individually—thumb, index, middle, ring, and little fingers
of each hand in the order named. These are called "rolled" impressions, the
fingers being rolled from side to side in order to obtain all available ridge
detail. The smaller impressions at the bottom of the card are taken by
simultaneously printing all of the fingers of each hand and then the thumb
without rolling. These are called "plain" or "fixed" impressions and are used
as a check upon the sequence and accuracy of the rolled impressions. Rolled
impressions must be taken carefully in order to insure that an accurate
fingerprint classification can be obtained by examination of the various
patterns. It is also necessary that each focal point (cores and all deltas) be
cleaning fluids are suitable for this purpose.
[Fig. 360]
The fingerprints should be taken on 8- by 8-inch cardstock, as this size has
generally been adopted by law enforcement because of facility in filing and
desirability of uniformity. Figure 361 shows fingerprints properly taken on
one of the standard personnel identification cards from the Federal Bureau of
Investigation. From this illustration, it is evident there are two types of
impressions involved in the process of taking fingerprints. The upper 10
prints are taken individually—thumb, index, middle, ring, and little fingers
of each hand in the order named. These are called "rolled" impressions, the
fingers being rolled from side to side in order to obtain all available ridge
detail. The smaller impressions at the bottom of the card are taken by
simultaneously printing all of the fingers of each hand and then the thumb
without rolling. These are called "plain" or "fixed" impressions and are used
as a check upon the sequence and accuracy of the rolled impressions. Rolled
impressions must be taken carefully in order to insure that an accurate
fingerprint classification can be obtained by examination of the various
patterns. It is also necessary that each focal point (cores and all deltas) be
Page 188
clearly printed in order that accurate ridge counts and tracings may be
obtained.
[Fig. 361]
[Enlarge]
In preparing to take a set of fingerprints, a small daub of ink should be
placed on the inking glass or slab and thoroughly rolled until a very thin,
even film covers the entire surface. The subject should stand in front of and
at forearm's length from the inking plate. In taking the rolled impressions,
the side of the bulb of the finger is placed upon the inking plate and the
finger is rolled to the other side until it faces the opposite direction. Care
should be exercised so the bulb of each finger is inked evenly from the tip to
below the first joint. By pressing the finger lightly on the card and rolling in
exactly the same manner, a clear rolled impression of the finger surface may
obtained.
[Fig. 361]
[Enlarge]
In preparing to take a set of fingerprints, a small daub of ink should be
placed on the inking glass or slab and thoroughly rolled until a very thin,
even film covers the entire surface. The subject should stand in front of and
at forearm's length from the inking plate. In taking the rolled impressions,
the side of the bulb of the finger is placed upon the inking plate and the
finger is rolled to the other side until it faces the opposite direction. Care
should be exercised so the bulb of each finger is inked evenly from the tip to
below the first joint. By pressing the finger lightly on the card and rolling in
exactly the same manner, a clear rolled impression of the finger surface may
Page 189
be obtained. It is better to ink and print each finger separately beginning with
the right thumb and then, in order, the index, middle, ring, and little fingers.
(Stamp pad ink, printing ink, ordinary writing ink, or other colored inks are
not suitable for use in fingerprint work as they are too light or thin and do
not dry quickly.)
If consideration is given the anatomical or bony structure of the forearm
when taking rolled impressions, more uniform impressions will be obtained.
The two principal bones of the forearm are known as the radius and the ulna,
the former being on the thumb side and the latter on the little finger side of
the arm. As suggested by its name, the radius bone revolves freely about the
ulna as a spoke of a wheel about the hub. In order to take advantage of the
natural movement in making finger impressions, the hand should be rotated
from the awkward to the easy position. This requires that the thumbs be
rolled toward and the fingers away from the center of the subject's body.
This process relieves strain and leaves the fingers relaxed upon the
completion of rolling so that they may be lifted easily from the card without
danger of slipping which smudges and blurs the prints. Figures 362 and 363
show the proper method of holding a finger for inking and printing a rolled
impression.
[Figs. 362-363]
the right thumb and then, in order, the index, middle, ring, and little fingers.
(Stamp pad ink, printing ink, ordinary writing ink, or other colored inks are
not suitable for use in fingerprint work as they are too light or thin and do
not dry quickly.)
If consideration is given the anatomical or bony structure of the forearm
when taking rolled impressions, more uniform impressions will be obtained.
The two principal bones of the forearm are known as the radius and the ulna,
the former being on the thumb side and the latter on the little finger side of
the arm. As suggested by its name, the radius bone revolves freely about the
ulna as a spoke of a wheel about the hub. In order to take advantage of the
natural movement in making finger impressions, the hand should be rotated
from the awkward to the easy position. This requires that the thumbs be
rolled toward and the fingers away from the center of the subject's body.
This process relieves strain and leaves the fingers relaxed upon the
completion of rolling so that they may be lifted easily from the card without
danger of slipping which smudges and blurs the prints. Figures 362 and 363
show the proper method of holding a finger for inking and printing a rolled
impression.
[Figs. 362-363]
Page 190
The degree of pressure to be exerted in inking and taking rolled impressions
is important, and this may best be determined through experience and
observation. It is quite important, however, that the subject be cautioned to
relax and refrain from trying to help the operator by exerting pressure as this
prevents the operator from gaging the amount needed. A method which is
helpful in effecting the relaxation of a subject's hand is that of instructing
him to look at some distant object and not to look at his hands. The person
taking the fingerprints should stand to the left of the subject when printing
the right hand, and to the right of the subject when printing the left hand. In
any case, the positions of both subject and operator should be natural and
relaxed if the best fingerprints are to be obtained.
To obtain "plain" impressions, all the fingers of the right hand should be
pressed lightly upon the inking plate, then pressed simultaneously upon the
lower right hand corner of the card in the space provided. The left hand
should be similarly printed, and the thumbs of both hands should be inked
and printed, without rolling, in the space provided. Figures 364 and 365
show the correct method of taking plain impressions of the fingers and
thumbs.
[Figs. 364-365]
is important, and this may best be determined through experience and
observation. It is quite important, however, that the subject be cautioned to
relax and refrain from trying to help the operator by exerting pressure as this
prevents the operator from gaging the amount needed. A method which is
helpful in effecting the relaxation of a subject's hand is that of instructing
him to look at some distant object and not to look at his hands. The person
taking the fingerprints should stand to the left of the subject when printing
the right hand, and to the right of the subject when printing the left hand. In
any case, the positions of both subject and operator should be natural and
relaxed if the best fingerprints are to be obtained.
To obtain "plain" impressions, all the fingers of the right hand should be
pressed lightly upon the inking plate, then pressed simultaneously upon the
lower right hand corner of the card in the space provided. The left hand
should be similarly printed, and the thumbs of both hands should be inked
and printed, without rolling, in the space provided. Figures 364 and 365
show the correct method of taking plain impressions of the fingers and
thumbs.
[Figs. 364-365]
Page 191
Page 192
CHAPTER IX
Page 193
Problems in the Taking of Inked Fingerprints
From time to time various problems arise concerning the taking of inked
impressions. It is believed that these problems can be divided into four
phases:
● Mechanical operation
● Temporary disabilities
● Permanent disabilities
● General
Mechanical operation
In order to take good fingerprints, the necessary equipment should be
maintained in a neat and orderly manner at all times.
Poor impressions are usually caused by one of the following faults:
1. The use of poor, thin, or colored ink, resulting in impressions which are
too light and faint, or in which the ink has run, obliterating the ridges. The
best results will be obtained by using heavy black printer's ink, a paste which
should not be thinned before using. This ink will dry quickly and will not
blur or smear with handling.
2. Failure to clean thoroughly the inking apparatus and the fingers of foreign
substances and perspiration, causing the appearance of false markings and
the disappearance of characteristics. Windshield cleaner, gasoline, benzine,
and alcohol are good cleansing agents, but any fluid may be used. In warm
weather each finger should be wiped dry of perspiration before printing.
3. Failure to roll the fingers fully from one side to the other and to ink the
whole area from tip to below the first fissure. The result of this is that the
From time to time various problems arise concerning the taking of inked
impressions. It is believed that these problems can be divided into four
phases:
● Mechanical operation
● Temporary disabilities
● Permanent disabilities
● General
Mechanical operation
In order to take good fingerprints, the necessary equipment should be
maintained in a neat and orderly manner at all times.
Poor impressions are usually caused by one of the following faults:
1. The use of poor, thin, or colored ink, resulting in impressions which are
too light and faint, or in which the ink has run, obliterating the ridges. The
best results will be obtained by using heavy black printer's ink, a paste which
should not be thinned before using. This ink will dry quickly and will not
blur or smear with handling.
2. Failure to clean thoroughly the inking apparatus and the fingers of foreign
substances and perspiration, causing the appearance of false markings and
the disappearance of characteristics. Windshield cleaner, gasoline, benzine,
and alcohol are good cleansing agents, but any fluid may be used. In warm
weather each finger should be wiped dry of perspiration before printing.
3. Failure to roll the fingers fully from one side to the other and to ink the
whole area from tip to below the first fissure. The result of this is that the
Page 194
focal points of the impressions (the deltas or cores) do not appear. The whole
finger surface from joint to tip and from side to side should appear.
4. The use of too much ink, obliterating or obscuring the ridges. If printer's
ink is used, just a touch of the tube end to the inking plate will suffice for
several sets of prints. It should be spread to a thin, even film by rolling.
5. Insufficient ink, resulting in ridges too light and faint to be counted or
traced.
6. Allowing the fingers to slip or twist, resulting in smears, blurs, and false-
appearing patterns. The fingers should be held lightly without too much
pressure. The subject should be warned not to try to help but to remain
passive.
The illustrations numbered 366 through 377 show the results of these faults
and show also the same fingers taken in the proper manner.
Illegible inked prints
A brief review of the problems of classifying and filing a fingerprint card in
the FBI will help to clarify the FBI's policy concerning the processing of
"bad" inked fingerprints.
The criminal fingerprint file contains the fingerprints of millions of
individuals. The complete classification formula is used. To obtain it, each
inked finger must show all the essential characteristics. Because of the
immense volume of prints it has become necessary to extend the normal
classification formula.
To illustrate this point:
dWdwc
xCdwc
O 32 W OOO 18
I 32 W III
In order to subdivide the 32 over 32 primary still further, the ridge count of
the whorl of the right little finger is used to obtain a final classification. The
extension above the normal classification formula indicates that each whorl
finger surface from joint to tip and from side to side should appear.
4. The use of too much ink, obliterating or obscuring the ridges. If printer's
ink is used, just a touch of the tube end to the inking plate will suffice for
several sets of prints. It should be spread to a thin, even film by rolling.
5. Insufficient ink, resulting in ridges too light and faint to be counted or
traced.
6. Allowing the fingers to slip or twist, resulting in smears, blurs, and false-
appearing patterns. The fingers should be held lightly without too much
pressure. The subject should be warned not to try to help but to remain
passive.
The illustrations numbered 366 through 377 show the results of these faults
and show also the same fingers taken in the proper manner.
Illegible inked prints
A brief review of the problems of classifying and filing a fingerprint card in
the FBI will help to clarify the FBI's policy concerning the processing of
"bad" inked fingerprints.
The criminal fingerprint file contains the fingerprints of millions of
individuals. The complete classification formula is used. To obtain it, each
inked finger must show all the essential characteristics. Because of the
immense volume of prints it has become necessary to extend the normal
classification formula.
To illustrate this point:
dWdwc
xCdwc
O 32 W OOO 18
I 32 W III
In order to subdivide the 32 over 32 primary still further, the ridge count of
the whorl of the right little finger is used to obtain a final classification. The
extension above the normal classification formula indicates that each whorl
Page 195
is classified as to the type; namely, plain whorl (W), double loop (D), central
pocket loop (C), and accidental (X). Accordingly, it is not enough for the
FBI Identification Division to ascertain the general whorl pattern type, but
the deltas and core must show in order to obtain the ridge tracing, the type of
whorl, and also, in some instances, the ridge count. The complete WCDX
extension is outlined in Chapter VI.
Figures 366 to 377 are some examples of improperly and properly taken
inked fingerprints.
pocket loop (C), and accidental (X). Accordingly, it is not enough for the
FBI Identification Division to ascertain the general whorl pattern type, but
the deltas and core must show in order to obtain the ridge tracing, the type of
whorl, and also, in some instances, the ridge count. The complete WCDX
extension is outlined in Chapter VI.
Figures 366 to 377 are some examples of improperly and properly taken
inked fingerprints.
Page 196
Page 197
Page 198
[Figs. 366-377]
An examination of figure 372 shows that it is a whorl. In order to classify the
ridge tracing accurately, however, so that the fingerprint card can be placed
in the correct classification, the left delta must show. The approximate ridge
tracing for the whorl in figure 372 would be Meeting. An examination of the
properly taken fingerprint in figure 373 indicates that the correct ridge
tracing is Inner. It follows that the pattern in figure 372 would not have been
placed in the proper place in file.
The correct whorl tracing is needed to obtain the complete subsecondary and
the major classifications.
It may be noted that both deltas are present in figure 374. This would enable
the technical expert to ascertain the correct ridge tracing, Outer. In the core
of the whorl, however, there is a heavy amount of ink which makes it
impossible to determine the type of whorl with any degree of accuracy. If
one were to hazard a guess, it would appear to be a plain whorl. Actually, the
correct type of whorl, a double loop, is clearly visible in figure 375.
An examination of figure 372 shows that it is a whorl. In order to classify the
ridge tracing accurately, however, so that the fingerprint card can be placed
in the correct classification, the left delta must show. The approximate ridge
tracing for the whorl in figure 372 would be Meeting. An examination of the
properly taken fingerprint in figure 373 indicates that the correct ridge
tracing is Inner. It follows that the pattern in figure 372 would not have been
placed in the proper place in file.
The correct whorl tracing is needed to obtain the complete subsecondary and
the major classifications.
It may be noted that both deltas are present in figure 374. This would enable
the technical expert to ascertain the correct ridge tracing, Outer. In the core
of the whorl, however, there is a heavy amount of ink which makes it
impossible to determine the type of whorl with any degree of accuracy. If
one were to hazard a guess, it would appear to be a plain whorl. Actually, the
correct type of whorl, a double loop, is clearly visible in figure 375.
Page 199
It can be ascertained that the pattern in figure 376 is a loop, but an accurate
ridge count cannot be obtained because the left delta does not appear. The
approximate ridge count of this loop is 14 to 16. This approximation is
sufficient for a fingerprint expert to place this loop in the "O" group of any
finger of the subsecondary. The correct ridge count of this loop is 19, and it
appears in illustration 377. The approximate ridge count is not sufficient to
place this print properly in the large files of the FBI because in certain
general complete classification formulas the accurate ridge count is needed
to obtain an extension. These extensions use a smaller grouping of ridge
counts to form a valuation table, and in this way, differ from the larger
grouping of ridge counts which form the basis of the subsecondary
classification. These extensions are called the second subsecondary and the
special loop extension and are outlined in chapter VI.
There are two additional points which illustrate the FBI's need for the delta,
ridges, and core to show clearly in loops. The first point is set forth: the
ridge count of the loop may be needed to obtain the key classification. The
key classification is an actual ridge count, and no valuation table is used to
obtain a subdivision. The key classification is used as an integral part of the
fingerprint filing system. The second point is as follows: the ridge count may
be needed to obtain the final classification. The final classification is an
actual ridge count, and no valuation table is used to obtain a subdivision.
The final classification is used as an integral part of the fingerprint filing
system.
The following are just a few examples to illustrate the completeness of the
classification formula used in the FBI fingerprint file:
12 M 9 R OIO 11
S 1 R IOI
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
6 17 aW IIO 9
1 U OII
Key Primary Small Letter Subsecondary Final
Secondary
ridge count cannot be obtained because the left delta does not appear. The
approximate ridge count of this loop is 14 to 16. This approximation is
sufficient for a fingerprint expert to place this loop in the "O" group of any
finger of the subsecondary. The correct ridge count of this loop is 19, and it
appears in illustration 377. The approximate ridge count is not sufficient to
place this print properly in the large files of the FBI because in certain
general complete classification formulas the accurate ridge count is needed
to obtain an extension. These extensions use a smaller grouping of ridge
counts to form a valuation table, and in this way, differ from the larger
grouping of ridge counts which form the basis of the subsecondary
classification. These extensions are called the second subsecondary and the
special loop extension and are outlined in chapter VI.
There are two additional points which illustrate the FBI's need for the delta,
ridges, and core to show clearly in loops. The first point is set forth: the
ridge count of the loop may be needed to obtain the key classification. The
key classification is an actual ridge count, and no valuation table is used to
obtain a subdivision. The key classification is used as an integral part of the
fingerprint filing system. The second point is as follows: the ridge count may
be needed to obtain the final classification. The final classification is an
actual ridge count, and no valuation table is used to obtain a subdivision.
The final classification is used as an integral part of the fingerprint filing
system.
The following are just a few examples to illustrate the completeness of the
classification formula used in the FBI fingerprint file:
12 M 9 R OIO 11
S 1 R IOI
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
6 17 aW IIO 9
1 U OII
Key Primary Small Letter Subsecondary Final
Secondary
Page 200
8 S 1 Ua II 6
S 1 U III
Key Major Primary Small Letter (Subsecondary Final
Secondary Extension)
SML (Second
SML Subsecondary)
5 0 5 U IOO 14
I 17 U IOO
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
245 (Special Loop
332 Extension)
14 M 1 U IOO 16
S 1 U OII
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
15 I 29 W IOO 19
I 28 W OOI
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
These several examples should help to illustrate the FBI's extended
classification formulas for classifying and filing fingerprints. The larger
collection of fingerprints must of necessity call for a more detailed analysis
of all fingerprint characteristic details. The closer examination to obtain
further fingerprint subdivisions is dependent on ten legible inked
impressions.
S 1 U III
Key Major Primary Small Letter (Subsecondary Final
Secondary Extension)
SML (Second
SML Subsecondary)
5 0 5 U IOO 14
I 17 U IOO
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
245 (Special Loop
332 Extension)
14 M 1 U IOO 16
S 1 U OII
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
15 I 29 W IOO 19
I 28 W OOI
Key Major Primary Secondary Subsecondary Final
These several examples should help to illustrate the FBI's extended
classification formulas for classifying and filing fingerprints. The larger
collection of fingerprints must of necessity call for a more detailed analysis
of all fingerprint characteristic details. The closer examination to obtain
further fingerprint subdivisions is dependent on ten legible inked
impressions.
Page 201
The identification officer will understand the problems of accurately
classifying and filing fingerprint cards. He knows there is little value in
placing a fingerprint card in the FBI's files with only an approximate or an
inaccurate classification.
Every fingerprint card filed in the FBI's file is of value to the particular law
enforcement agency which forwarded it, as well as to all other law
enforcement agencies which rely on its being correctly classified and filed.
Temporary disabilities
There are temporary disabilities affecting an individual's hand which are
sometimes beyond the control of the identification officer. These can be
fresh cuts, or wounds, bandaged fingers or finger, occupational (carpenters,
bricklayers, etc.) blisters, and excessive perspiration. Children, whose ridges
are small and fine, would also come under this heading. Extreme care should
be exercised in fingerprinting the aforementioned.
An indication on the fingerprint card to the effect "fresh cut, bandaged" is
not sufficient to file the fingerprint card. It is obvious that a fingerprint card
bearing these notations cannot be properly classified and filed. The same
situation would occur if there were a blister on an individual's finger. The
blister temporarily disfigures the ridge detail. When an injury is temporary,
the prints, if at all possible, should not be taken until after the injury has
healed.
Occupational problems (bricklayers, carpenters, etc.) are definitely a
challenge to the identification officer. In some instances, by means of
softening agents (oils and creams), it is possible to obtain legible inked
impressions. It is further suggested that in these cases a very small amount of
ink should be used on the inking plate.
Excessive perspiration can be controlled to some extent by the identification
officer. Excessive perspiration causes the inked impressions to be indistinct.
It is suggested in these cases to wipe the finger with a cloth and then
immediately ink the finger and roll it on the fingerprint card. This process
should be followed with each finger. It is also suggested that possibly the
fingers could be wiped with alcohol, benzine, or similar fluid which would
act as a drying agent.
classifying and filing fingerprint cards. He knows there is little value in
placing a fingerprint card in the FBI's files with only an approximate or an
inaccurate classification.
Every fingerprint card filed in the FBI's file is of value to the particular law
enforcement agency which forwarded it, as well as to all other law
enforcement agencies which rely on its being correctly classified and filed.
Temporary disabilities
There are temporary disabilities affecting an individual's hand which are
sometimes beyond the control of the identification officer. These can be
fresh cuts, or wounds, bandaged fingers or finger, occupational (carpenters,
bricklayers, etc.) blisters, and excessive perspiration. Children, whose ridges
are small and fine, would also come under this heading. Extreme care should
be exercised in fingerprinting the aforementioned.
An indication on the fingerprint card to the effect "fresh cut, bandaged" is
not sufficient to file the fingerprint card. It is obvious that a fingerprint card
bearing these notations cannot be properly classified and filed. The same
situation would occur if there were a blister on an individual's finger. The
blister temporarily disfigures the ridge detail. When an injury is temporary,
the prints, if at all possible, should not be taken until after the injury has
healed.
Occupational problems (bricklayers, carpenters, etc.) are definitely a
challenge to the identification officer. In some instances, by means of
softening agents (oils and creams), it is possible to obtain legible inked
impressions. It is further suggested that in these cases a very small amount of
ink should be used on the inking plate.
Excessive perspiration can be controlled to some extent by the identification
officer. Excessive perspiration causes the inked impressions to be indistinct.
It is suggested in these cases to wipe the finger with a cloth and then
immediately ink the finger and roll it on the fingerprint card. This process
should be followed with each finger. It is also suggested that possibly the
fingers could be wiped with alcohol, benzine, or similar fluid which would
act as a drying agent.
Page 202
In all the above situations, if it is not possible to accurately classify and file
the fingerprint card, the name appearing on the card will be searched in the
alphabetical files and then returned to the law-enforcement agency.
Permanent disabilities
Another phase involves permanent disabilities which can in most cases be
controlled by the identification officer. These can be lack of fingers (born
without), amputations, crippled fingers (bent, broken), deformities (webbed,
extra fingers), and old age.
With respect to lack of fingers, it should be noted that some individuals are
born without certain fingers. The notation "missing" is not satisfactory
because it does not sufficiently explain the correct situation. It is suggested
that "missing at birth" or some similar notation be made in the individual
fingerprint block on the card. A proper notation concerning this situation will
prevent the fingerprint card from being returned. Figures 378 and 379
illustrate temporary and permanent disabilities.
[Figs. 378-379]
Concerning amputations, it is suggested that a proper notation to this effect
appear in the individual fingerprint block or blocks. It is suggested that if a
portion of the first joint of a finger is amputated, the finger should be inked
the fingerprint card, the name appearing on the card will be searched in the
alphabetical files and then returned to the law-enforcement agency.
Permanent disabilities
Another phase involves permanent disabilities which can in most cases be
controlled by the identification officer. These can be lack of fingers (born
without), amputations, crippled fingers (bent, broken), deformities (webbed,
extra fingers), and old age.
With respect to lack of fingers, it should be noted that some individuals are
born without certain fingers. The notation "missing" is not satisfactory
because it does not sufficiently explain the correct situation. It is suggested
that "missing at birth" or some similar notation be made in the individual
fingerprint block on the card. A proper notation concerning this situation will
prevent the fingerprint card from being returned. Figures 378 and 379
illustrate temporary and permanent disabilities.
[Figs. 378-379]
Concerning amputations, it is suggested that a proper notation to this effect
appear in the individual fingerprint block or blocks. It is suggested that if a
portion of the first joint of a finger is amputated, the finger should be inked
Page 203
and printed. A notation concerning this fact should be made on the
fingerprint card in the individual fingerprint block.
In those cases where all of the fingers are amputated, the inked footprints
should be obtained.
The handling of crippled fingers and certain deformities can be discussed in
a group because they generally present the same problems. It is not sufficient
in all cases to indicate "broken," "bent," "crippled." If the fingers are bent or
crippled so that they are touching the palm and cannot be moved, a notation
to this effect should be on the fingerprint card in the proper individual
fingerprint block. However, it is believed that these extreme cases are rare. It
is suggested that the special inking devices used for taking the prints of
deceased individuals be used in taking inked impressions of bent or crippled
fingers.
This equipment, which will be discussed more fully in the section on
printing deceased persons, consists of spatula, small roller, and a curved
holder for the individual finger block. Figure 380 shows the spatula, roller,
and curved holder. It should be further noted in figure 380 that there are a
strip of the entire hand of the fingerprint card and also individual finger
blocks cut from the fingerprint card. Each of these types can be used in
connection with the curved holder.
fingerprint card in the individual fingerprint block.
In those cases where all of the fingers are amputated, the inked footprints
should be obtained.
The handling of crippled fingers and certain deformities can be discussed in
a group because they generally present the same problems. It is not sufficient
in all cases to indicate "broken," "bent," "crippled." If the fingers are bent or
crippled so that they are touching the palm and cannot be moved, a notation
to this effect should be on the fingerprint card in the proper individual
fingerprint block. However, it is believed that these extreme cases are rare. It
is suggested that the special inking devices used for taking the prints of
deceased individuals be used in taking inked impressions of bent or crippled
fingers.
This equipment, which will be discussed more fully in the section on
printing deceased persons, consists of spatula, small roller, and a curved
holder for the individual finger block. Figure 380 shows the spatula, roller,
and curved holder. It should be further noted in figure 380 that there are a
strip of the entire hand of the fingerprint card and also individual finger
blocks cut from the fingerprint card. Each of these types can be used in
connection with the curved holder.
Page 204
[Fig. 380]
Each crippled finger is taken as a separate unit and then the finger block
pasted on a fingerprint card. In figure 381, note the use of the spatula for
applying the ink to a bent or crippled finger; and in figure 382, observe the
use of the curved holder for taking the "rolled" impression of a bent or
crippled finger.
Each crippled finger is taken as a separate unit and then the finger block
pasted on a fingerprint card. In figure 381, note the use of the spatula for
applying the ink to a bent or crippled finger; and in figure 382, observe the
use of the curved holder for taking the "rolled" impression of a bent or
crippled finger.
Page 205
[Figs. 381-382]
Old age has been placed under permanent disability only for discussion
purposes. The problem is not encountered frequently in taking the
fingerprints of individuals who are arrested. The situation of crippled fingers
due to old age may be met, and it can be handled as previously suggested. In
Old age has been placed under permanent disability only for discussion
purposes. The problem is not encountered frequently in taking the
fingerprints of individuals who are arrested. The situation of crippled fingers
due to old age may be met, and it can be handled as previously suggested. In
Page 206
most cases the problems arise because of the very faint ridges of the
individual. It is believed that in the majority of cases, legibly inked prints
can be taken by using a very small amount of ink on the inking plate and by
using little pressure in the rolling of the fingers.
Deformities
If a subject has more than 10 fingers, as occasionally happens, the thumbs
and the next 4 fingers to them should be printed, and any fingers left over
should be printed on the other side of the card with a notation made to the
effect that they are extra fingers. When a person with more than 10 fingers
has an intentional amputation performed, it is invariably the extra finger on
the little finger side which is amputated.
It also happens, not infrequently, that a subject will have two or more fingers
webbed or grown together, as in figures 383 and 384, making it impossible
to roll such fingers on the inside. Such fingers should be rolled, however, as
completely as possible, and a notation made to the effect that they are joined.
individual. It is believed that in the majority of cases, legibly inked prints
can be taken by using a very small amount of ink on the inking plate and by
using little pressure in the rolling of the fingers.
Deformities
If a subject has more than 10 fingers, as occasionally happens, the thumbs
and the next 4 fingers to them should be printed, and any fingers left over
should be printed on the other side of the card with a notation made to the
effect that they are extra fingers. When a person with more than 10 fingers
has an intentional amputation performed, it is invariably the extra finger on
the little finger side which is amputated.
It also happens, not infrequently, that a subject will have two or more fingers
webbed or grown together, as in figures 383 and 384, making it impossible
to roll such fingers on the inside. Such fingers should be rolled, however, as
completely as possible, and a notation made to the effect that they are joined.
Page 207
[Figs. 383-384]
Split thumbs, i.e., thumbs having two nail joints, as in figure 385, are
classified as if the joint toward the outside of the hand were not present. In
other words the inner joint is used, and no consideration whatever is given to
the outer joint.
Split thumbs, i.e., thumbs having two nail joints, as in figure 385, are
classified as if the joint toward the outside of the hand were not present. In
other words the inner joint is used, and no consideration whatever is given to
the outer joint.
Page 208
[Fig. 385]
General
These problems have dealt with the mechanical or operational processes.
However, there are other problems dealing with the completing of the
descriptive information. The fingerprint card may be returned because of the
lack of information in the spaces provided, such as name, sex, race, height,
weight, etc. Any discrepancies in this information may necessitate the return
of the fingerprint card.
The success and value of the FBI's fingerprint files to all law enforcement
agencies are dependent, in a large measure, on the legibly inked fingerprints
taken by law enforcement agencies.
Figure 386 shows an enlarged portion of the bulb of a finger revealing the
microscopic structure of the friction skin. The epidermis consists of two
main layers, namely, the stratum corneum, which covers the surface, and the
stratum mucosum, which is just beneath the covering surface. The stratum
mucosum is folded under the surface so as to form ridges which will run
lengthwise and correspond to the surface ridges. However, these are twice as
numerous since the deeper ridges which correspond to the middle of the
surface ridges alternate with smaller ones which correspond to the furrows.
The sweat pores run in single rows along the ridges and communicate
through the sweat ducts with the coil sweat glands which are below the
entire epidermis. The friction ridges result from the fusion in rows of
separate epidermic elements, such as the dot shown on the left. Generally
speaking, when an individual bruises or slightly cuts the outer layer or
stratum corneum of the bulb of the finger, the ridges will not be permanently
defaced. However, if a more serious injury is inflicted on the bulb of the
finger, thereby damaging the stratum mucosum, the friction skin will heal,
but not in its original formation. The serious injury will result in a permanent
scar appearing on the bulb of the finger.
General
These problems have dealt with the mechanical or operational processes.
However, there are other problems dealing with the completing of the
descriptive information. The fingerprint card may be returned because of the
lack of information in the spaces provided, such as name, sex, race, height,
weight, etc. Any discrepancies in this information may necessitate the return
of the fingerprint card.
The success and value of the FBI's fingerprint files to all law enforcement
agencies are dependent, in a large measure, on the legibly inked fingerprints
taken by law enforcement agencies.
Figure 386 shows an enlarged portion of the bulb of a finger revealing the
microscopic structure of the friction skin. The epidermis consists of two
main layers, namely, the stratum corneum, which covers the surface, and the
stratum mucosum, which is just beneath the covering surface. The stratum
mucosum is folded under the surface so as to form ridges which will run
lengthwise and correspond to the surface ridges. However, these are twice as
numerous since the deeper ridges which correspond to the middle of the
surface ridges alternate with smaller ones which correspond to the furrows.
The sweat pores run in single rows along the ridges and communicate
through the sweat ducts with the coil sweat glands which are below the
entire epidermis. The friction ridges result from the fusion in rows of
separate epidermic elements, such as the dot shown on the left. Generally
speaking, when an individual bruises or slightly cuts the outer layer or
stratum corneum of the bulb of the finger, the ridges will not be permanently
defaced. However, if a more serious injury is inflicted on the bulb of the
finger, thereby damaging the stratum mucosum, the friction skin will heal,
but not in its original formation. The serious injury will result in a permanent
scar appearing on the bulb of the finger.
Page 209
[Fig. 386]
Page 210
CHAPTER X
Page 211
Problems and Practices in Fingerprinting the Dead
Each year new graves are opened in potter's fields all over the United States.
Into many of them are placed the unknown dead—those who have lived
anonymously or who, through accident or otherwise, lose their lives under
such circumstances that identification seems impossible. In a majority of
such cases, after the burial of the body, no single item or clue remains to
effect subsequent identification. As a result, active investigation usually
ceases and the cases are forgotten, unless, of course, it is definitely
established that a murder has been committed.
Reliance is too often placed on visual inspection in establishing the identity
of the deceased. This includes having the remains viewed by individuals
seeking to locate a lost friend or relative. The body is often decomposed. If
death was caused by burning, the victim may be unrecognizable. As a result
of many fatal accidents the deceased is often mutilated, particularly about
the face, so that visual identification is impossible. Yet, in many cases, the
only attempt at identification is by having persons view the remains and the
personal effects.
The recorded instances of erroneous visual identifications are numerous. In
one case a body, burned beyond recognition, was identified by relatives as
that of a 21-year-old man; yet fingerprints later proved that the corpse was
that of a 55-year-old man.
Fingerprints have frequently been instrumental in establishing the correct
identity of persons killed in airplane crashes and incorrectly "identified" by
close relatives.
In one instance a woman found dead in a hotel room was "positively"
identified by several close friends. The body was shipped to the father of the
alleged deceased in another state where again it was "identified" by close
friends. Burial followed. Approximately one month later the persons who
had first identified the body as that of their friend were sitting in a tavern
Each year new graves are opened in potter's fields all over the United States.
Into many of them are placed the unknown dead—those who have lived
anonymously or who, through accident or otherwise, lose their lives under
such circumstances that identification seems impossible. In a majority of
such cases, after the burial of the body, no single item or clue remains to
effect subsequent identification. As a result, active investigation usually
ceases and the cases are forgotten, unless, of course, it is definitely
established that a murder has been committed.
Reliance is too often placed on visual inspection in establishing the identity
of the deceased. This includes having the remains viewed by individuals
seeking to locate a lost friend or relative. The body is often decomposed. If
death was caused by burning, the victim may be unrecognizable. As a result
of many fatal accidents the deceased is often mutilated, particularly about
the face, so that visual identification is impossible. Yet, in many cases, the
only attempt at identification is by having persons view the remains and the
personal effects.
The recorded instances of erroneous visual identifications are numerous. In
one case a body, burned beyond recognition, was identified by relatives as
that of a 21-year-old man; yet fingerprints later proved that the corpse was
that of a 55-year-old man.
Fingerprints have frequently been instrumental in establishing the correct
identity of persons killed in airplane crashes and incorrectly "identified" by
close relatives.
In one instance a woman found dead in a hotel room was "positively"
identified by several close friends. The body was shipped to the father of the
alleged deceased in another state where again it was "identified" by close
friends. Burial followed. Approximately one month later the persons who
had first identified the body as that of their friend were sitting in a tavern
Page 212
when the "dead" woman walked into the room. Authorities were
immediately advised of the error; they in turn advised the authorities in the
neighboring state of the erroneous identification and steps were taken
immediately to rectify the mistake. After permission had been granted by the
State Health Board to exhume the body of the dead woman, fingerprints
were taken and copies were forwarded to the FBI Identification Division.
The finger impressions were searched through the fingerprint files and the
true identity of the deceased was established.
During a 12-month period, the FBI Identification Division received the
fingerprints of 1,708 unknown dead. Of these, 1,298, or almost 76 percent,
were identified. The remaining 410 were not identified simply because
fingerprints of these individuals were not in the FBI files. It should be noted
that in these 1,708 cases, it was possible to secure legible fingerprints of the
deceased in the usual manner by inking the fingers in those instances in
which decomposition had not injured the ridge detail.
[Fig. 387]
In addition to the fingerprints of 1,708 unknown dead, the Identification
Division received the fingers and/or the hands of 85 unknown dead
immediately advised of the error; they in turn advised the authorities in the
neighboring state of the erroneous identification and steps were taken
immediately to rectify the mistake. After permission had been granted by the
State Health Board to exhume the body of the dead woman, fingerprints
were taken and copies were forwarded to the FBI Identification Division.
The finger impressions were searched through the fingerprint files and the
true identity of the deceased was established.
During a 12-month period, the FBI Identification Division received the
fingerprints of 1,708 unknown dead. Of these, 1,298, or almost 76 percent,
were identified. The remaining 410 were not identified simply because
fingerprints of these individuals were not in the FBI files. It should be noted
that in these 1,708 cases, it was possible to secure legible fingerprints of the
deceased in the usual manner by inking the fingers in those instances in
which decomposition had not injured the ridge detail.
[Fig. 387]
In addition to the fingerprints of 1,708 unknown dead, the Identification
Division received the fingers and/or the hands of 85 unknown dead
Page 213
individuals. In these cases, decomposition was so far advanced that it was
not possible to secure inked fingerprints in the regular manner. Of these, 68
bodies, or 80 percent of the group, were identified. Of the 17 unidentified,
the fingerprints of 14 were not in the FBI files. In three cases decomposition
was so far advanced that all ridge detail had been destroyed.
In order to emphasize what can be accomplished, it is pointed out that in
those cases in which hands and fingers were submitted, the time which
elapsed from death until the specimens were received ranged from a week to
3 years. Incredible as it may seem, it has been possible to secure identifiable
impressions 3 years after death.
These statistics of achievement in the field of identifying unknown dead re-
emphasize the fact that in all cases involving the identification of a deceased
person, fingerprints should be used as the medium for establishing a
conclusive and positive identification.
Generally speaking, in the course of their work fingerprint operators find it
necessary to take the impressions of three classes of deceased persons.
They are:
● Those who have died recently, in which cases the task is relatively simple.
● Those dead for a longer period, in which cases difficulty is experienced
due to pronounced stiffening of the fingers, the early stages of
decomposition, or both.
● Those cases in which extreme difficulty is encountered because of
maceration, desiccation, or advanced decay of the skin.
These problems will be considered separately.
1. Fingerprinting the Newly Dead.
When the fingers are flexible it is often possible to secure inked fingerprint
impressions of a deceased person through the regular inking process on a
standard fingerprint card. Experience has proved that this task can be made
easier if the deceased is laid face down and palms down on a table (fig. 388).
not possible to secure inked fingerprints in the regular manner. Of these, 68
bodies, or 80 percent of the group, were identified. Of the 17 unidentified,
the fingerprints of 14 were not in the FBI files. In three cases decomposition
was so far advanced that all ridge detail had been destroyed.
In order to emphasize what can be accomplished, it is pointed out that in
those cases in which hands and fingers were submitted, the time which
elapsed from death until the specimens were received ranged from a week to
3 years. Incredible as it may seem, it has been possible to secure identifiable
impressions 3 years after death.
These statistics of achievement in the field of identifying unknown dead re-
emphasize the fact that in all cases involving the identification of a deceased
person, fingerprints should be used as the medium for establishing a
conclusive and positive identification.
Generally speaking, in the course of their work fingerprint operators find it
necessary to take the impressions of three classes of deceased persons.
They are:
● Those who have died recently, in which cases the task is relatively simple.
● Those dead for a longer period, in which cases difficulty is experienced
due to pronounced stiffening of the fingers, the early stages of
decomposition, or both.
● Those cases in which extreme difficulty is encountered because of
maceration, desiccation, or advanced decay of the skin.
These problems will be considered separately.
1. Fingerprinting the Newly Dead.
When the fingers are flexible it is often possible to secure inked fingerprint
impressions of a deceased person through the regular inking process on a
standard fingerprint card. Experience has proved that this task can be made
easier if the deceased is laid face down and palms down on a table (fig. 388).
Page 214
[Fig. 388]
In all cases where inked impressions are to be made, care should be
exercised to see that the fingers are clean and dry before inking. If necessary,
wash the digits with soap and water and dry thoroughly.
In the event difficulty is encountered in trying to procure fingerprints by the
regular method, it may prove more convenient to cut the 10 "squares"
numbered for the rolled impressions from a fingerprint card. After the finger
is inked, the square is rolled around the finger without letting it slip. Extreme
caution should be exercised to see that each square bears the correct
fingerprint impression. After all the inked impressions are properly taken,
the ten squares bearing the impressions are pasted or stapled to a standard
fingerprint card in their proper positions, i.e., right thumb, right index, right
middle, etc. Whenever possible the "plain" or "simultaneous" impressions
should also be taken.
In some cases it will be found necessary to obtain or improvise a tool similar
to a broad-bladed putty knife or spatula to be used as an inking instrument.
The ink is rolled evenly and thinly on the knife or spatula and applied to the
finger by passing the inked knife or spatula around it. The tool, of course,
replaces the usual glass inking slab or plate, the use of which is extremely
difficult or awkward when printing a deceased person.
In all cases where inked impressions are to be made, care should be
exercised to see that the fingers are clean and dry before inking. If necessary,
wash the digits with soap and water and dry thoroughly.
In the event difficulty is encountered in trying to procure fingerprints by the
regular method, it may prove more convenient to cut the 10 "squares"
numbered for the rolled impressions from a fingerprint card. After the finger
is inked, the square is rolled around the finger without letting it slip. Extreme
caution should be exercised to see that each square bears the correct
fingerprint impression. After all the inked impressions are properly taken,
the ten squares bearing the impressions are pasted or stapled to a standard
fingerprint card in their proper positions, i.e., right thumb, right index, right
middle, etc. Whenever possible the "plain" or "simultaneous" impressions
should also be taken.
In some cases it will be found necessary to obtain or improvise a tool similar
to a broad-bladed putty knife or spatula to be used as an inking instrument.
The ink is rolled evenly and thinly on the knife or spatula and applied to the
finger by passing the inked knife or spatula around it. The tool, of course,
replaces the usual glass inking slab or plate, the use of which is extremely
difficult or awkward when printing a deceased person.
Page 215
2. Fingerprinting the Dead, Where Stiffening of the Fingers and/or Early
Decomposition Are Present.
This second group consists of cases in which the hands of the deceased are
clenched, or the finger tips are wrinkled, or decomposition has begun, and/or
where there are combinations of these three conditions. Cases of this sort
may necessitate cutting off the skin. Legal authority is necessary before
cutting a corpse. Such authority may be granted by state law or by an official
having authority to grant such a right.
In cases where rigor mortis (stiffening of the muscles) has set in and the
fingers are tightly clenched, the fingers may be forcibly straightened by
"breaking the rigor." This is done by holding the hand of the deceased person
firmly with one hand, grasping the finger to be straightened with the four
fingers of the other hand and placing the thumb, which is used as a lever, on
the knuckle of the finger and forcing it straight (fig. 389). The inking tool
and "squares," as previously explained, are then used to secure the
fingerprint.
[Fig. 389]
Decomposition Are Present.
This second group consists of cases in which the hands of the deceased are
clenched, or the finger tips are wrinkled, or decomposition has begun, and/or
where there are combinations of these three conditions. Cases of this sort
may necessitate cutting off the skin. Legal authority is necessary before
cutting a corpse. Such authority may be granted by state law or by an official
having authority to grant such a right.
In cases where rigor mortis (stiffening of the muscles) has set in and the
fingers are tightly clenched, the fingers may be forcibly straightened by
"breaking the rigor." This is done by holding the hand of the deceased person
firmly with one hand, grasping the finger to be straightened with the four
fingers of the other hand and placing the thumb, which is used as a lever, on
the knuckle of the finger and forcing it straight (fig. 389). The inking tool
and "squares," as previously explained, are then used to secure the
fingerprint.
[Fig. 389]
Page 216
In the event the rigor cannot be completely overcome, it will be most helpful
to improvise or secure a spoon-shaped tool for holding the cut squares or cut
strips while printing the fingers, similar to the tool mentioned briefly in the
discussion of crippled fingers. This tool, somewhat resembling a gouge
without the sharp edge, should have a handle, a concave end, and a frame or
clamp to hold the cardboard squares or strips. In Figure 390, one type of tool
is illustrated. This tool eliminates the necessity of rolling the deceased's
finger, since the "square" assumes the concave shape of the tool, and the
gentle pressure applied to the inked finger when it is brought in contact with
the square results in a "rolled" impression without actually rolling the finger.
[Fig. 390]
Another problem encountered in this second group includes cases in which
the tips of the fingers are fairly pliable and intact, yet due to the presence of
wrinkles in the skin, complete impressions cannot be obtained. This
condition can be corrected by the injection of a tissue builder, procurable
to improvise or secure a spoon-shaped tool for holding the cut squares or cut
strips while printing the fingers, similar to the tool mentioned briefly in the
discussion of crippled fingers. This tool, somewhat resembling a gouge
without the sharp edge, should have a handle, a concave end, and a frame or
clamp to hold the cardboard squares or strips. In Figure 390, one type of tool
is illustrated. This tool eliminates the necessity of rolling the deceased's
finger, since the "square" assumes the concave shape of the tool, and the
gentle pressure applied to the inked finger when it is brought in contact with
the square results in a "rolled" impression without actually rolling the finger.
[Fig. 390]
Another problem encountered in this second group includes cases in which
the tips of the fingers are fairly pliable and intact, yet due to the presence of
wrinkles in the skin, complete impressions cannot be obtained. This
condition can be corrected by the injection of a tissue builder, procurable
Page 217
from a dealer in undertaker's supplies. If this is not available, glycerin or
water may be used.
The method is simple. Injection of the tissue builder, glycerin, or water, is
accomplished by the use of a hypodermic syringe. The hypodermic needle is
injected at the joint of the finger up into the tip of the finger, care being used
to keep the needle below the skin surface (fig. 391). The solution is injected
until the finger "bulbs" are rounded out, after which they are inked and
printed.
[Fig. 391]
Occasionally, in stubborn cases, entry of the needle at the joint and injection
of the fluid will not completely fill the finger bulb. It may be necessary,
therefore, to inject the fluid at other points of the finger such as the extreme
tip or sides, until suitable results are achieved (fig. 392). The tissue builder
has a distinct advantage over glycerin or water, inasmuch as the builder
hardens after a short time and is not lost, whereas glycerin and water
water may be used.
The method is simple. Injection of the tissue builder, glycerin, or water, is
accomplished by the use of a hypodermic syringe. The hypodermic needle is
injected at the joint of the finger up into the tip of the finger, care being used
to keep the needle below the skin surface (fig. 391). The solution is injected
until the finger "bulbs" are rounded out, after which they are inked and
printed.
[Fig. 391]
Occasionally, in stubborn cases, entry of the needle at the joint and injection
of the fluid will not completely fill the finger bulb. It may be necessary,
therefore, to inject the fluid at other points of the finger such as the extreme
tip or sides, until suitable results are achieved (fig. 392). The tissue builder
has a distinct advantage over glycerin or water, inasmuch as the builder
hardens after a short time and is not lost, whereas glycerin and water
Page 218
sometimes seep out when pressure is applied in printing. To offset seepage at
the point where the hypodermic needle is injected, whenever possible, tie a
piece of string tightly around the finger just above the point of entry of the
needle.
[Fig. 392]
When the tissue builder is purchased, a solvent for cleaning the hypodermic
syringe and needle should be acquired, inasmuch as the builder will harden
in the syringe and needle.
Those cases in which decomposition in its early stage is present belong in
this group also. Frequently, the outer layer of skin has begun to peel from the
fingers. A careful examination should be made to determine if the peeling
skin is intact or if a part of it has been lost. If the skin is in one piece, an
effort should be made to secure prints just as though it were attached
normally to the finger. Or, if it is deemed advisable, the skin may be peeled
off in one piece, placed over the finger of the operator, and inked and printed
as though it were his own finger.
the point where the hypodermic needle is injected, whenever possible, tie a
piece of string tightly around the finger just above the point of entry of the
needle.
[Fig. 392]
When the tissue builder is purchased, a solvent for cleaning the hypodermic
syringe and needle should be acquired, inasmuch as the builder will harden
in the syringe and needle.
Those cases in which decomposition in its early stage is present belong in
this group also. Frequently, the outer layer of skin has begun to peel from the
fingers. A careful examination should be made to determine if the peeling
skin is intact or if a part of it has been lost. If the skin is in one piece, an
effort should be made to secure prints just as though it were attached
normally to the finger. Or, if it is deemed advisable, the skin may be peeled
off in one piece, placed over the finger of the operator, and inked and printed
as though it were his own finger.
Page 219
Occasionally the first layer of skin is missing. There remains the dermis or
second layer of skin which is also of value for identification purposes. This
second layer would be dealt with as though it were the outside skin, using
the techniques described above. The ridge detail of the second layer of skin
is less pronounced than that of the outer skin, however, and more attention
and care are needed in order to obtain suitable impressions.
So far this discussion has dealt with the taking of impressions of fingers
when the flesh is fairly firm and the ridge detail intact. A different problem
arises when the fingers are in various stages of decay. The techniques of
treating the fingers in such cases vary greatly, depending upon the condition
of the fingers with respect to decomposition, desiccation, or maceration.
3. Fingerprinting the Dead in Difficult Cases.
In cases involving badly decomposed bodies the first thing to do is to
examine the fingers to see if all are present. If they are not, an effort should
be made to determine whether the missing finger or fingers or even a hand
was amputated during the person's lifetime, or whether the loss was due to
other causes such as destruction by animal or marine life. Deductions from
this examination should be noted on the fingerprint record. This point is
made in view of the fact that in the fingerprint files of the FBI and some
police departments, the fingerprint cards reflecting amputations are filed
separately. Noting amputations may lessen to a great extent a search through
the fingerprint files.
In making the initial examination, attention should be given to the removal
of dirt, silt, grease and other foreign matter from the fingers. Soap and water
are good cleansing agents. So is xylene, a chemical which will readily clean
grease and fatty matter from the fingers. Good results can be achieved by
utilizing a child's soft-bristled toothbrush in cases where the skin is fairly
firm. The brushing should be done lightly and the strokes should follow the
ridge design in order to clean not only the ridges but the depressions as well.
In the event that the skin is not firm enough to use the toothbrush, a cotton
swab may be used. The fingers should be wiped very lightly with either soap
and water or xylene, always following the ridge contours.
At this point the fingers are again examined to determine the condition they
are in, based upon the circumstances in which the body was found. Study
second layer of skin which is also of value for identification purposes. This
second layer would be dealt with as though it were the outside skin, using
the techniques described above. The ridge detail of the second layer of skin
is less pronounced than that of the outer skin, however, and more attention
and care are needed in order to obtain suitable impressions.
So far this discussion has dealt with the taking of impressions of fingers
when the flesh is fairly firm and the ridge detail intact. A different problem
arises when the fingers are in various stages of decay. The techniques of
treating the fingers in such cases vary greatly, depending upon the condition
of the fingers with respect to decomposition, desiccation, or maceration.
3. Fingerprinting the Dead in Difficult Cases.
In cases involving badly decomposed bodies the first thing to do is to
examine the fingers to see if all are present. If they are not, an effort should
be made to determine whether the missing finger or fingers or even a hand
was amputated during the person's lifetime, or whether the loss was due to
other causes such as destruction by animal or marine life. Deductions from
this examination should be noted on the fingerprint record. This point is
made in view of the fact that in the fingerprint files of the FBI and some
police departments, the fingerprint cards reflecting amputations are filed
separately. Noting amputations may lessen to a great extent a search through
the fingerprint files.
In making the initial examination, attention should be given to the removal
of dirt, silt, grease and other foreign matter from the fingers. Soap and water
are good cleansing agents. So is xylene, a chemical which will readily clean
grease and fatty matter from the fingers. Good results can be achieved by
utilizing a child's soft-bristled toothbrush in cases where the skin is fairly
firm. The brushing should be done lightly and the strokes should follow the
ridge design in order to clean not only the ridges but the depressions as well.
In the event that the skin is not firm enough to use the toothbrush, a cotton
swab may be used. The fingers should be wiped very lightly with either soap
and water or xylene, always following the ridge contours.
At this point the fingers are again examined to determine the condition they
are in, based upon the circumstances in which the body was found. Study
Page 220
and actual experience have shown that there are three general types of
conditions to be considered: Decomposition or putrefaction, prevalent in
bodies found in brush or buried in earth; desiccation or mummification (that
is, dried out), noted in bodies which have been found in the open (ridge
detail not in contact with the ground) in dry protected places, or bodies
subjected to severe heat; and the group involving maceration (water
soaking), which ordinarily results from being immersed in water.
The degree of decomposition, desiccation, or maceration varies from a
comparatively early stage to an extremely advanced stage. Accordingly, each
case must be considered individually. For example, what is done
successfully in one case of desiccation may not show favorable results in
another. Hence, the techniques outlined below point out generally what can
be done, and has been done, with success.
When a body is found, the hands usually will be tightly clenched. The first
problem will be to straighten the fingers. If rigor mortis has set in and an
effort to straighten the fingers as previously explained fails, the difficulty
can be overcome easily. Using a scalpel, make a deep cut at the second joint
on the inner side of each of the four fingers. They can now be straightened
with the application of force (fig. 393). The thumb, if it is cramped or bent,
can generally be straightened by making a deep cut between the thumb and
the index finger. These incisions are made for the obvious purpose of
examining the fingers to determine if there is any ridge detail. Before this
fact can be definitely ascertained it may be necessary to cleanse the pattern
areas with soap and water or xylene, as previously explained.
conditions to be considered: Decomposition or putrefaction, prevalent in
bodies found in brush or buried in earth; desiccation or mummification (that
is, dried out), noted in bodies which have been found in the open (ridge
detail not in contact with the ground) in dry protected places, or bodies
subjected to severe heat; and the group involving maceration (water
soaking), which ordinarily results from being immersed in water.
The degree of decomposition, desiccation, or maceration varies from a
comparatively early stage to an extremely advanced stage. Accordingly, each
case must be considered individually. For example, what is done
successfully in one case of desiccation may not show favorable results in
another. Hence, the techniques outlined below point out generally what can
be done, and has been done, with success.
When a body is found, the hands usually will be tightly clenched. The first
problem will be to straighten the fingers. If rigor mortis has set in and an
effort to straighten the fingers as previously explained fails, the difficulty
can be overcome easily. Using a scalpel, make a deep cut at the second joint
on the inner side of each of the four fingers. They can now be straightened
with the application of force (fig. 393). The thumb, if it is cramped or bent,
can generally be straightened by making a deep cut between the thumb and
the index finger. These incisions are made for the obvious purpose of
examining the fingers to determine if there is any ridge detail. Before this
fact can be definitely ascertained it may be necessary to cleanse the pattern
areas with soap and water or xylene, as previously explained.
Page 221
[Fig. 393]
Advanced decomposition
If the case is one involving decomposition, the operator is confronted with
the problem of dealing with flesh which is rotted or putrefied. The flesh may
be soft or flabby and very fragile. If this is so, an examination is made of the
finger tips to see if the outer skin is present. If the outer skin is present and
intact, it may be possible, using extreme care, to ink and print in the regular
manner. Sometimes, the outer skin, although present, will be too soft and
fragile to ink and roll in the regular way. In such cases, when the ridge detail
is discernible, the skin, if it is easily removed from the finger, or the finger
itself may be cut off at the second joint and placed in a 10- to 15-percent
solution of formaldehyde for approximately an hour to harden it. Skin placed
in a formaldehyde solution usually turns a grayish white and becomes firm.
However, it will be brittle and may split if not handled carefully. The skin is
placed in the solution only until it hardens sufficiently, after which it is
removed and carefully wiped dry with a piece of cloth. Then the skin, placed
over the operator's own thumb or index finger and held in place by his other
hand, is inked and rolled as though the operator were printing his own finger.
If a legible print is not obtainable in this manner, the operator should
examine the underside of the skin.
Advanced decomposition
If the case is one involving decomposition, the operator is confronted with
the problem of dealing with flesh which is rotted or putrefied. The flesh may
be soft or flabby and very fragile. If this is so, an examination is made of the
finger tips to see if the outer skin is present. If the outer skin is present and
intact, it may be possible, using extreme care, to ink and print in the regular
manner. Sometimes, the outer skin, although present, will be too soft and
fragile to ink and roll in the regular way. In such cases, when the ridge detail
is discernible, the skin, if it is easily removed from the finger, or the finger
itself may be cut off at the second joint and placed in a 10- to 15-percent
solution of formaldehyde for approximately an hour to harden it. Skin placed
in a formaldehyde solution usually turns a grayish white and becomes firm.
However, it will be brittle and may split if not handled carefully. The skin is
placed in the solution only until it hardens sufficiently, after which it is
removed and carefully wiped dry with a piece of cloth. Then the skin, placed
over the operator's own thumb or index finger and held in place by his other
hand, is inked and rolled as though the operator were printing his own finger.
If a legible print is not obtainable in this manner, the operator should
examine the underside of the skin.
Page 222
In many instances, where the ridge detail on the outer surface has been
destroyed or is not discernible, the ridge detail is clearly visible on the
underside (fig. 394). If this is the case, the skin is inverted (turned inside out)
very carefully to prevent splitting or breaking and then is inked and printed
in the usual way. It must be borne in mind, however, that when the underside
of the skin is printed the resulting impression will be in reverse color and
position; that is, the ink is actually adhering to what would be furrows of the
pattern when viewed from the proper or outer side. If it is deemed
inadvisable to try to invert or turn the skin inside out for fear of damaging it,
a photograph of the inner ridge detail is made and the negative is printed to
give an "as is" position photograph for proper classification and comparison
purposes. In order to secure good photographs of the ridge detail it may be
advisable to trim the skin, flatten it out between two pieces of glass, and
photograph it in that position (fig. 395).
destroyed or is not discernible, the ridge detail is clearly visible on the
underside (fig. 394). If this is the case, the skin is inverted (turned inside out)
very carefully to prevent splitting or breaking and then is inked and printed
in the usual way. It must be borne in mind, however, that when the underside
of the skin is printed the resulting impression will be in reverse color and
position; that is, the ink is actually adhering to what would be furrows of the
pattern when viewed from the proper or outer side. If it is deemed
inadvisable to try to invert or turn the skin inside out for fear of damaging it,
a photograph of the inner ridge detail is made and the negative is printed to
give an "as is" position photograph for proper classification and comparison
purposes. In order to secure good photographs of the ridge detail it may be
advisable to trim the skin, flatten it out between two pieces of glass, and
photograph it in that position (fig. 395).
Page 223
[Figs. 394-395]
When the entire finger is placed in the solution during the hardening process,
the skin, in absorbing the formalin solution, may swell and come loose from
the finger. Should this occur, the skin must be removed carefully and the
procedure outlined above followed. If, however, the skin still adheres to the
finger and is not too wrinkled, ink is applied and prints made. Should the
skin be too wrinkled to secure a satisfactory impression, consideration is
given to the injection of the tissue builder under the skin as previously
mentioned, in order to distend the pattern area. If successful, the finger is
inked and printed. This, of course, can be done only when the skin is intact.
Should part of the skin be destroyed to the extent that tissue builder cannot
be injected effectively, while examination discloses that the pattern area is
present but wrinkled, cut off the entire pattern area from the joint to the tip
of the finger (fig. 396). Care must be exercised to insure getting the
complete fingerprint pattern as well as cutting deep enough to avoid injury to
the skin.
When the entire finger is placed in the solution during the hardening process,
the skin, in absorbing the formalin solution, may swell and come loose from
the finger. Should this occur, the skin must be removed carefully and the
procedure outlined above followed. If, however, the skin still adheres to the
finger and is not too wrinkled, ink is applied and prints made. Should the
skin be too wrinkled to secure a satisfactory impression, consideration is
given to the injection of the tissue builder under the skin as previously
mentioned, in order to distend the pattern area. If successful, the finger is
inked and printed. This, of course, can be done only when the skin is intact.
Should part of the skin be destroyed to the extent that tissue builder cannot
be injected effectively, while examination discloses that the pattern area is
present but wrinkled, cut off the entire pattern area from the joint to the tip
of the finger (fig. 396). Care must be exercised to insure getting the
complete fingerprint pattern as well as cutting deep enough to avoid injury to
the skin.
Page 224
[Fig. 396]
After excision, the flesh is carefully and meticulously removed from the
inside by scraping, cutting, and trimming until only the skin remains, or until
the specimen is so thin it can be flattened out to remove most of the
wrinkles. If the skin is fairly pliable, the operator should attempt to place it
over one of his own fingers and try several prints. If the prints secured are
not suitable, the piece of skin (exert care to avoid breaking or splitting) is
flattened out between two pieces of glass and photographed (figs. 397, 398,
399).
After excision, the flesh is carefully and meticulously removed from the
inside by scraping, cutting, and trimming until only the skin remains, or until
the specimen is so thin it can be flattened out to remove most of the
wrinkles. If the skin is fairly pliable, the operator should attempt to place it
over one of his own fingers and try several prints. If the prints secured are
not suitable, the piece of skin (exert care to avoid breaking or splitting) is
flattened out between two pieces of glass and photographed (figs. 397, 398,
399).
Page 225
[Figs. 397-399]
The foregoing outline covers the procedures followed in cases involving
decomposition in which the outer skin is still present. In many instances of
decomposition the outer skin has been destroyed or is in such a condition as
to be of no value. It must be emphasized again that the second layer of skin
possesses the same ridge detail as the outer layer and this, though finer and
less pronounced, is just as effective for identification purposes.
The foregoing outline covers the procedures followed in cases involving
decomposition in which the outer skin is still present. In many instances of
decomposition the outer skin has been destroyed or is in such a condition as
to be of no value. It must be emphasized again that the second layer of skin
possesses the same ridge detail as the outer layer and this, though finer and
less pronounced, is just as effective for identification purposes.
Page 226
If, from examination, it is apparent that the outer layer of skin is missing and
the second layer is intact, the finger should be cleansed, dried, inked, and
printed in the usual manner. If the specimen is wrinkled but pliable it may be
possible to inject tissue builder, as previously mentioned, to round out the
finger, then ink and print it.
Occasionally, some of the outer skin is still attached but is of no value. This
skin should be removed by carefully picking or prying it off with a scalpel in
such a manner as not to destroy or injure the ridge detail of the second layer.
After the outer fragments have been removed, the second layer is cleaned,
inked, and printed. In the event the resultant impressions are not suitable for
classification and identification purposes, the most likely reason for it is that
the ridge detail is too fine to print even though there are few if any wrinkles
in it. If this is the case, the finger should be cut off at the second joint and
photographed. Should wrinkles which cannot be removed by injecting tissue
builder, and which also preclude the taking of suitable photographs, be
present, the pattern area is cut off with a scalpel from the first joint to the tip.
The flesh is then cut and scraped out as previously described, until the
specimen is thin enough to flatten out between two pieces of glass which
may be held together by scotch tape. The skin is then photographed.
Occasionally, even after the flattening process it will be noted in the ground
glass of the camera that the skin may be seen plainly but the ridge detail is
very poor. This difficulty may be due to the poor contrast of the ridges and
furrows when using direct lighting. If so, it can be overcome by scraping the
skin to transparency and then photographing it by transmitted light (i.e.,
passing light through the skin). Sometimes, due to the condition of the skin,
even though it is tissue thin, it will not be transparent. This can be overcome
by soaking the skin in xylene for a few minutes and then photographing it by
transmitted light while it is still impregnated with the xylene. If the
substance dries too fast to permit proper photographing, the skin should be
photographed while immersed in the xylene. (See subtopic of this chapter
pertaining to "general photography.") Of course, after the skin has been
photographed the negative should be printed to give a reverse position so
that the print will be comparable with inked impressions on fingerprint
cards.
Desiccation and charring
the second layer is intact, the finger should be cleansed, dried, inked, and
printed in the usual manner. If the specimen is wrinkled but pliable it may be
possible to inject tissue builder, as previously mentioned, to round out the
finger, then ink and print it.
Occasionally, some of the outer skin is still attached but is of no value. This
skin should be removed by carefully picking or prying it off with a scalpel in
such a manner as not to destroy or injure the ridge detail of the second layer.
After the outer fragments have been removed, the second layer is cleaned,
inked, and printed. In the event the resultant impressions are not suitable for
classification and identification purposes, the most likely reason for it is that
the ridge detail is too fine to print even though there are few if any wrinkles
in it. If this is the case, the finger should be cut off at the second joint and
photographed. Should wrinkles which cannot be removed by injecting tissue
builder, and which also preclude the taking of suitable photographs, be
present, the pattern area is cut off with a scalpel from the first joint to the tip.
The flesh is then cut and scraped out as previously described, until the
specimen is thin enough to flatten out between two pieces of glass which
may be held together by scotch tape. The skin is then photographed.
Occasionally, even after the flattening process it will be noted in the ground
glass of the camera that the skin may be seen plainly but the ridge detail is
very poor. This difficulty may be due to the poor contrast of the ridges and
furrows when using direct lighting. If so, it can be overcome by scraping the
skin to transparency and then photographing it by transmitted light (i.e.,
passing light through the skin). Sometimes, due to the condition of the skin,
even though it is tissue thin, it will not be transparent. This can be overcome
by soaking the skin in xylene for a few minutes and then photographing it by
transmitted light while it is still impregnated with the xylene. If the
substance dries too fast to permit proper photographing, the skin should be
photographed while immersed in the xylene. (See subtopic of this chapter
pertaining to "general photography.") Of course, after the skin has been
photographed the negative should be printed to give a reverse position so
that the print will be comparable with inked impressions on fingerprint
cards.
Desiccation and charring
Page 227
The problem confronting the fingerprint examiner in treating fingers which
are desiccated or dried and shriveled is that of distending and softening the
skin. Desiccated fingers are generally found to have the outer layer of skin
intact and the ridge detail fairly clear. However, due to the shrinking,
numerous wrinkles will be present, and as the drying process continues the
skin and flesh harden until the fingers become almost as hard as stone.
It is sometimes possible to distend or swell the flesh by utilizing a 1- to 3-
percent solution of sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, sometimes
referred to as caustic potash. As a matter of caution, this process should be
tried with one finger before using it for the remaining fingers. This point of
caution is made because of the reaction of the potassium or sodium
hydroxide, which is actually one of destruction. While absorption and
swelling of the flesh occur, the disintegrating action of the fluid may result
in total destruction of the flesh.
The finger to be distended is cut from the hand at the second joint and placed
in the hydroxide. When it has resumed its normal size by the absorption of
the solution, it is inked and printed. There is no set time for this process. The
procedure may require a few hours or as much as several days until suitable
results are obtained.
After the finger has been in the solution for about 30 minutes, it should be
removed and examined in order to note the extent of the swelling and the
reaction of the flesh to the solution. If no material change is noted, the finger
is returned to the solution. A close watch is maintained and the finger is
examined from time to time.
The solution may cause thin layers of skin to peel from the finger. Should
this occur, the loose skin is carefully scraped off and the finger rinsed in
water for a few minutes. It is then returned to the hydroxide for continuation
of the process.
If, during the course of an inspection, it is seen that the flesh is becoming too
soft, the finger should be placed in a 1- to 3-percent solution of
formaldehyde or alcohol for several minutes in order to harden it.
If, after several hours in the hydroxide, the finger has not reached its normal
size, it should be placed in water for an hour or two. This has a tendency to
hasten the swelling. When the finger is removed, it will be noted that a film
are desiccated or dried and shriveled is that of distending and softening the
skin. Desiccated fingers are generally found to have the outer layer of skin
intact and the ridge detail fairly clear. However, due to the shrinking,
numerous wrinkles will be present, and as the drying process continues the
skin and flesh harden until the fingers become almost as hard as stone.
It is sometimes possible to distend or swell the flesh by utilizing a 1- to 3-
percent solution of sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, sometimes
referred to as caustic potash. As a matter of caution, this process should be
tried with one finger before using it for the remaining fingers. This point of
caution is made because of the reaction of the potassium or sodium
hydroxide, which is actually one of destruction. While absorption and
swelling of the flesh occur, the disintegrating action of the fluid may result
in total destruction of the flesh.
The finger to be distended is cut from the hand at the second joint and placed
in the hydroxide. When it has resumed its normal size by the absorption of
the solution, it is inked and printed. There is no set time for this process. The
procedure may require a few hours or as much as several days until suitable
results are obtained.
After the finger has been in the solution for about 30 minutes, it should be
removed and examined in order to note the extent of the swelling and the
reaction of the flesh to the solution. If no material change is noted, the finger
is returned to the solution. A close watch is maintained and the finger is
examined from time to time.
The solution may cause thin layers of skin to peel from the finger. Should
this occur, the loose skin is carefully scraped off and the finger rinsed in
water for a few minutes. It is then returned to the hydroxide for continuation
of the process.
If, during the course of an inspection, it is seen that the flesh is becoming too
soft, the finger should be placed in a 1- to 3-percent solution of
formaldehyde or alcohol for several minutes in order to harden it.
If, after several hours in the hydroxide, the finger has not reached its normal
size, it should be placed in water for an hour or two. This has a tendency to
hasten the swelling. When the finger is removed, it will be noted that a film
Page 228
has coated the surface. This coating is carefully scraped off and the finger is
replaced in the hydroxide solution for an hour or so, again scraped if coated,
soaked in clean water, etc. This process of alternating from solution to water,
scraping, and replacing in hydroxide is continued until desirable results are
obtained. The finger is then inked and printed.
The above process will so saturate the finger with solution that it may be too
wet to print properly. Accordingly, the finger may be dipped into acetone for
several seconds, removed, and be permitted to dry, after which it is inked
and printed.
The complete process may take from several hours to as much as 10 days to
secure suitable results. If the final results of the above procedure are
satisfactory with the one finger being tested, the remaining fingers are given
the same treatment. Care must be taken to identify each finger properly as to
right index, right middle, etc., to avoid any mixup.
In the event that the reaction of the solution on the first finger treated is not
satisfactory and the operator feels that it would be futile to continue the
process, the finger should be removed from the solution immediately,
washed carefully in water, and placed in formaldehyde to harden sufficiently
for it to be handled without causing injury to the ridges. The pattern area is
cut off in such a manner that sufficient surrounding surface permits the skin
to be trimmed. Then from the cut side the skin is carefully scraped and cut to
remove the excess flesh. While the cutting and scraping are being done, from
time to time the skin should be soaked in xylene and massaged for purposes
of softening to remove wrinkles. When the skin is thin enough and
sufficiently pliable, the operator places the skin on his own finger, inks and
prints it in the usual manner.
If the results are satisfactory, the same procedure is followed with the
remaining fingers. In the event the resultant inked prints are not suitable, the
skin should be scraped until it is sufficiently thin to be flattened between two
pieces of glass and photographed.
Here again it is pointed out that should there be a poor contrast between the
ridges and furrows when using direct lighting, the skin is scraped as thin as
possible without tearing and it is then photographed by transmitted light.
replaced in the hydroxide solution for an hour or so, again scraped if coated,
soaked in clean water, etc. This process of alternating from solution to water,
scraping, and replacing in hydroxide is continued until desirable results are
obtained. The finger is then inked and printed.
The above process will so saturate the finger with solution that it may be too
wet to print properly. Accordingly, the finger may be dipped into acetone for
several seconds, removed, and be permitted to dry, after which it is inked
and printed.
The complete process may take from several hours to as much as 10 days to
secure suitable results. If the final results of the above procedure are
satisfactory with the one finger being tested, the remaining fingers are given
the same treatment. Care must be taken to identify each finger properly as to
right index, right middle, etc., to avoid any mixup.
In the event that the reaction of the solution on the first finger treated is not
satisfactory and the operator feels that it would be futile to continue the
process, the finger should be removed from the solution immediately,
washed carefully in water, and placed in formaldehyde to harden sufficiently
for it to be handled without causing injury to the ridges. The pattern area is
cut off in such a manner that sufficient surrounding surface permits the skin
to be trimmed. Then from the cut side the skin is carefully scraped and cut to
remove the excess flesh. While the cutting and scraping are being done, from
time to time the skin should be soaked in xylene and massaged for purposes
of softening to remove wrinkles. When the skin is thin enough and
sufficiently pliable, the operator places the skin on his own finger, inks and
prints it in the usual manner.
If the results are satisfactory, the same procedure is followed with the
remaining fingers. In the event the resultant inked prints are not suitable, the
skin should be scraped until it is sufficiently thin to be flattened between two
pieces of glass and photographed.
Here again it is pointed out that should there be a poor contrast between the
ridges and furrows when using direct lighting, the skin is scraped as thin as
possible without tearing and it is then photographed by transmitted light.
Page 229
There are also included, as cases of desiccation, bodies which have been
burned or subjected to severe heat. Often there are cases where the skin has
become loose but is hard and crisp, or where the finger has been severely
burned and is reduced almost to carbon, yet is firm. In these instances the
ridge detail usually has not been destroyed.
When a body which has been severely burned is located, the problems of
identification should be anticipated. Accordingly, before the body is
removed, a careful examination of the fingers should be made in order to
determine if the removal would, in any way, cause damage to the fingers.
Should it be felt that because of the condition of the body removal would
cause injury to the ridge detail, securing of fingerprints at the scene, or
possibly the cutting off of the hands or fingers to avoid destruction of the
skin, should be considered. An examination of the fingers may disclose that
the outer skin is hardened and is partially loosened from the flesh. It is
sometimes possible, by twisting back and forth, to remove this outer skin
intact. If this is done, the operator may place the skin on his own finger, ink
and print in the usual way.
If the skin is intact on the finger and is not wrinkled, of course there is no
problem and the usual method is employed to secure impressions.
Should wrinkles be present and the skin pliable, tissue builder is injected
into the bulbs, which are then inked and printed.
In the event the wrinkles cannot be removed in this fashion, the pattern area
is cut off and the excess flesh scraped out as before. While the scraping and
cutting are being accomplished, the skin should be soaked and massaged in
xylene to soften. The skin is then placed on the operator's finger, inked and
printed. Should prints made in this manner be unsatisfactory, the next
recourse is photography.
In some instances the fingers of burned bodies will be charred. Such cases
require very careful handling as there is a probability of destroying or
disturbing the ridge detail through mistreatment. In these instances the
procedure is determined by the degree of charring. In extreme cases the only
method of recording is by photographing, using side lighting to secure the
proper contrast of ridges and depressions. Obviously, no attempt should be
burned or subjected to severe heat. Often there are cases where the skin has
become loose but is hard and crisp, or where the finger has been severely
burned and is reduced almost to carbon, yet is firm. In these instances the
ridge detail usually has not been destroyed.
When a body which has been severely burned is located, the problems of
identification should be anticipated. Accordingly, before the body is
removed, a careful examination of the fingers should be made in order to
determine if the removal would, in any way, cause damage to the fingers.
Should it be felt that because of the condition of the body removal would
cause injury to the ridge detail, securing of fingerprints at the scene, or
possibly the cutting off of the hands or fingers to avoid destruction of the
skin, should be considered. An examination of the fingers may disclose that
the outer skin is hardened and is partially loosened from the flesh. It is
sometimes possible, by twisting back and forth, to remove this outer skin
intact. If this is done, the operator may place the skin on his own finger, ink
and print in the usual way.
If the skin is intact on the finger and is not wrinkled, of course there is no
problem and the usual method is employed to secure impressions.
Should wrinkles be present and the skin pliable, tissue builder is injected
into the bulbs, which are then inked and printed.
In the event the wrinkles cannot be removed in this fashion, the pattern area
is cut off and the excess flesh scraped out as before. While the scraping and
cutting are being accomplished, the skin should be soaked and massaged in
xylene to soften. The skin is then placed on the operator's finger, inked and
printed. Should prints made in this manner be unsatisfactory, the next
recourse is photography.
In some instances the fingers of burned bodies will be charred. Such cases
require very careful handling as there is a probability of destroying or
disturbing the ridge detail through mistreatment. In these instances the
procedure is determined by the degree of charring. In extreme cases the only
method of recording is by photographing, using side lighting to secure the
proper contrast of ridges and depressions. Obviously, no attempt should be
Page 230
made to ink and roll as the pressure necessary to secure the prints would
cause the skin to crumble.
In instances where the charring has not reached the extreme stage the
procedures previously set forth should be applied; that is, treatment of the
skin by cleaning, softening, inking and printing, or, finally, by photographing
(fig. 400).
[Fig. 400]
Water-soaked fingers
The third and final type of case which may confront the identification officer
concerns the problem of maceration, that is, long immersion of the fingers in
water.
One of the cardinal rules for securing legible impressions is that the fingers
must be dry. Accordingly, in these cases it becomes a matter of drying the
fingers in addition to contending with other difficulties. Usually the skin on
cause the skin to crumble.
In instances where the charring has not reached the extreme stage the
procedures previously set forth should be applied; that is, treatment of the
skin by cleaning, softening, inking and printing, or, finally, by photographing
(fig. 400).
[Fig. 400]
Water-soaked fingers
The third and final type of case which may confront the identification officer
concerns the problem of maceration, that is, long immersion of the fingers in
water.
One of the cardinal rules for securing legible impressions is that the fingers
must be dry. Accordingly, in these cases it becomes a matter of drying the
fingers in addition to contending with other difficulties. Usually the skin on
Page 231
the fingers absorbs water, swells and loosens from the flesh within a few
hours after immersion.
If an examination discloses the skin to be water-soaked, wrinkled and
pliable, but intact, the first step is to cleanse the skin carefully as previously
described. Next, wipe the fingertip with alcohol, benzine or acetone, waiting
a few seconds for it to dry. The skin is pulled or drawn tight across the
pattern area so that a large wrinkle is formed on the back of the finger, then
the bulb is inked and printed.
If the skin is broken and hanging loose, but its pattern area is intact, it should
be removed from the finger, cleansed and placed in alcohol or benzine (not
acetone) for about a minute, then stretched carefully over the operator's
finger so as to remove any wrinkles. It may then be printed.
Sometimes the skin is intact on the finger but so wrinkled and hard that it is
not possible to draw it tight for inking. In this case it may be advisable to
inject tissue builder to round out the bulbs for inking and printing. Should
this fail, the ridge detail is photographed on the finger; or the skin is cut off,
flattened between two pieces of glass and then photographed. Here, again, it
must be pointed out that when the ridge detail does not show on the surface
of the outer skin the underside should be examined, for many times the detail
can be seen clearly. Should this be true, of course, the underside is
photographed.
In cases where it is noted that the outer skin is gone and the finger is not
saturated with water, it is possible to dry the surface sufficiently for inking
and printing purposes by rolling the finger on a blotter. If this fails, the finger
is wiped off with a piece of cloth which has been saturated with alcohol,
benzine or acetone, after which it may be inked and printed.
Drying the fingers
In many instances it will be found that the outer skin is gone and the fingers
themselves are saturated with water. A quick method of drying out the
fingers is to place them in full strength acetone for approximately 30
minutes. The fingers are then placed in xylene for about an hour or until the
xylene has overcome the reaction of the acetone. After removal from the
hours after immersion.
If an examination discloses the skin to be water-soaked, wrinkled and
pliable, but intact, the first step is to cleanse the skin carefully as previously
described. Next, wipe the fingertip with alcohol, benzine or acetone, waiting
a few seconds for it to dry. The skin is pulled or drawn tight across the
pattern area so that a large wrinkle is formed on the back of the finger, then
the bulb is inked and printed.
If the skin is broken and hanging loose, but its pattern area is intact, it should
be removed from the finger, cleansed and placed in alcohol or benzine (not
acetone) for about a minute, then stretched carefully over the operator's
finger so as to remove any wrinkles. It may then be printed.
Sometimes the skin is intact on the finger but so wrinkled and hard that it is
not possible to draw it tight for inking. In this case it may be advisable to
inject tissue builder to round out the bulbs for inking and printing. Should
this fail, the ridge detail is photographed on the finger; or the skin is cut off,
flattened between two pieces of glass and then photographed. Here, again, it
must be pointed out that when the ridge detail does not show on the surface
of the outer skin the underside should be examined, for many times the detail
can be seen clearly. Should this be true, of course, the underside is
photographed.
In cases where it is noted that the outer skin is gone and the finger is not
saturated with water, it is possible to dry the surface sufficiently for inking
and printing purposes by rolling the finger on a blotter. If this fails, the finger
is wiped off with a piece of cloth which has been saturated with alcohol,
benzine or acetone, after which it may be inked and printed.
Drying the fingers
In many instances it will be found that the outer skin is gone and the fingers
themselves are saturated with water. A quick method of drying out the
fingers is to place them in full strength acetone for approximately 30
minutes. The fingers are then placed in xylene for about an hour or until the
xylene has overcome the reaction of the acetone. After removal from the
Page 232
xylene the fingers should be placed on a blotter until the surface of the
fingers appears dry. They are then ready to be inked and printed.
It will be noted in this procedure that when the fingers are removed from the
acetone they dry and harden in a matter of seconds. The purpose of the
xylene is to resoften the fingers. After this treatment, should the resulting
inked impressions be unsuitable for classification purposes, the ridge detail
should be photographed.
X-ray photography
The use of X-ray photographs (radiography) has been advocated by some for
purposes of recording the ridge details in decomposed, desiccated, or
macerated cases. Briefly, the procedure involves the covering of the fingers
with heavy salts such as bismuth or lead carbonate, in a thin, even film over
the pattern area and then, by the use of the X-ray, reproducing the ridge
detail. This procedure necessitates the use of X-ray equipment and a
technician skilled in making radiographs. It is, therefore, an expensive
operation. The results of the radiograph in no way compensate for the
expense, time, and skill required inasmuch as in those cases where many
wrinkles and creases appear in the fingers, especially desiccated specimens,
the results have been very poor. In instances where there are no wrinkles or
only a few, and where the creases are not too deep, the ridge detail is
reproduced very well in the radiograph. In these cases, however, it is usually
possible to secure impressions by inking and rolling in the regular way or,
should this fail, ordinary photography will certainly give satisfactory results.
For economical and practical purposes the use of the X-ray is not
recommended.
General photography
In the foregoing instances in which it has been impossible to obtain suitable
inked impressions it will be noted that the last resort has always been
photography. In all probability in advanced cases of decomposition,
desiccation, and maceration it may not be possible to secure inked
impressions which can be properly classified. Hence, it will be necessary to
photograph the ridge detail. Accordingly, there are outlined below several
methods of photographing the ridges which have been used with success.
fingers appears dry. They are then ready to be inked and printed.
It will be noted in this procedure that when the fingers are removed from the
acetone they dry and harden in a matter of seconds. The purpose of the
xylene is to resoften the fingers. After this treatment, should the resulting
inked impressions be unsuitable for classification purposes, the ridge detail
should be photographed.
X-ray photography
The use of X-ray photographs (radiography) has been advocated by some for
purposes of recording the ridge details in decomposed, desiccated, or
macerated cases. Briefly, the procedure involves the covering of the fingers
with heavy salts such as bismuth or lead carbonate, in a thin, even film over
the pattern area and then, by the use of the X-ray, reproducing the ridge
detail. This procedure necessitates the use of X-ray equipment and a
technician skilled in making radiographs. It is, therefore, an expensive
operation. The results of the radiograph in no way compensate for the
expense, time, and skill required inasmuch as in those cases where many
wrinkles and creases appear in the fingers, especially desiccated specimens,
the results have been very poor. In instances where there are no wrinkles or
only a few, and where the creases are not too deep, the ridge detail is
reproduced very well in the radiograph. In these cases, however, it is usually
possible to secure impressions by inking and rolling in the regular way or,
should this fail, ordinary photography will certainly give satisfactory results.
For economical and practical purposes the use of the X-ray is not
recommended.
General photography
In the foregoing instances in which it has been impossible to obtain suitable
inked impressions it will be noted that the last resort has always been
photography. In all probability in advanced cases of decomposition,
desiccation, and maceration it may not be possible to secure inked
impressions which can be properly classified. Hence, it will be necessary to
photograph the ridge detail. Accordingly, there are outlined below several
methods of photographing the ridges which have been used with success.
Page 233
In photographing the ridge detail on fingers it has been determined to be
most practicable to photograph the finger natural, or 1/1, size inasmuch as
comparisons will usually be made with inked impressions which are natural
size. Any camera built or adjusted to taking 1/1 size pictures, and with which
the lighting may be arranged to best advantage, may be used.
There is a wide choice of film which can be used for this purpose. The so-
called soft films are all good for photographing ridge detail on fingers.
Process film is not recommended inasmuch as the film presents too much of
a contrast. Consequently, if it is used, some of the ridge detail will be lost,
especially if wrinkles are present in the skin.
Lighting is accomplished by the use of gooseneck lamps, floodlights, or a
spotlight. If a fingerprint camera is used, its lights may be sufficient.
The manner of lighting may be by direct light, side light, transmitted light or
reflected light, depending upon the prevailing condition of the finger or skin.
Direct light is used in those cases in which the ridge detail is fairly clear and
there are no wrinkles present; or, if wrinkles are present, they are not deep
enough to interfere with photographing the ridges.
Side lighting is used when there are no wrinkles of any consequence and the
ridge detail is clear but because of discoloration the ridges are not readily
seen in the ground glass as there is lack of contrast between ridges and
depressions. Accordingly, the lights, instead of being focused directly on the
skin or finger, are placed to the side of the object so that the light is directed
across the skin or finger, thus highlighting the ridges and shading the
depressions.
In side lighting, two lights may be used. Better results are often obtained,
however, by using only one light, such as a spotlight, the beam of which can
be controlled to best advantage.
Transmitted light is used in cases in which the skin has peeled off or in
which the dermis has been removed, cut, and scraped thin so that light will
go through. The prepared skin is placed between two pieces of glass pressed
together in order to flatten the skin or dermis and remove creases. By
trimming some of the surplus skin or dermis, especially at the top, it may be
more easily flattened. After the glass is properly mounted in front of the
most practicable to photograph the finger natural, or 1/1, size inasmuch as
comparisons will usually be made with inked impressions which are natural
size. Any camera built or adjusted to taking 1/1 size pictures, and with which
the lighting may be arranged to best advantage, may be used.
There is a wide choice of film which can be used for this purpose. The so-
called soft films are all good for photographing ridge detail on fingers.
Process film is not recommended inasmuch as the film presents too much of
a contrast. Consequently, if it is used, some of the ridge detail will be lost,
especially if wrinkles are present in the skin.
Lighting is accomplished by the use of gooseneck lamps, floodlights, or a
spotlight. If a fingerprint camera is used, its lights may be sufficient.
The manner of lighting may be by direct light, side light, transmitted light or
reflected light, depending upon the prevailing condition of the finger or skin.
Direct light is used in those cases in which the ridge detail is fairly clear and
there are no wrinkles present; or, if wrinkles are present, they are not deep
enough to interfere with photographing the ridges.
Side lighting is used when there are no wrinkles of any consequence and the
ridge detail is clear but because of discoloration the ridges are not readily
seen in the ground glass as there is lack of contrast between ridges and
depressions. Accordingly, the lights, instead of being focused directly on the
skin or finger, are placed to the side of the object so that the light is directed
across the skin or finger, thus highlighting the ridges and shading the
depressions.
In side lighting, two lights may be used. Better results are often obtained,
however, by using only one light, such as a spotlight, the beam of which can
be controlled to best advantage.
Transmitted light is used in cases in which the skin has peeled off or in
which the dermis has been removed, cut, and scraped thin so that light will
go through. The prepared skin is placed between two pieces of glass pressed
together in order to flatten the skin or dermis and remove creases. By
trimming some of the surplus skin or dermis, especially at the top, it may be
more easily flattened. After the glass is properly mounted in front of the
Page 234
camera, the lights are placed behind it and light is directed through the skin.
The ridge detail is brought into focus on the ground glass. Before the picture
is actually taken it is suggested that the ground glass be checked by first
using one light and then two lights to see which is more effective.
There will be instances in which the second layer of skin, cut and scraped
thin enough to flatten out, fails when dry to have a sufficient contrast
between ridges and depressions for purposes of photographing. The same
piece of skin when soaked in xylene will show a marked contrast, which it
loses on drying. This difficulty is overcome by photographing the skin while
in solution, which can be done by placing the skin in a test tube or a small
bottle of a size to keep the skin upright and the ridges toward the camera.
The test tube or bottle is then filled with xylene.
If the skin is sufficiently thin, transmitted light may be used. Should it be
found, however, that transmitted light is not effective, then direct light may
be tried and the results checked in the ground glass (fig. 401).
[Fig. 401]
The ridge detail is brought into focus on the ground glass. Before the picture
is actually taken it is suggested that the ground glass be checked by first
using one light and then two lights to see which is more effective.
There will be instances in which the second layer of skin, cut and scraped
thin enough to flatten out, fails when dry to have a sufficient contrast
between ridges and depressions for purposes of photographing. The same
piece of skin when soaked in xylene will show a marked contrast, which it
loses on drying. This difficulty is overcome by photographing the skin while
in solution, which can be done by placing the skin in a test tube or a small
bottle of a size to keep the skin upright and the ridges toward the camera.
The test tube or bottle is then filled with xylene.
If the skin is sufficiently thin, transmitted light may be used. Should it be
found, however, that transmitted light is not effective, then direct light may
be tried and the results checked in the ground glass (fig. 401).
[Fig. 401]
Page 235
When photographing a small curved surface such as a test tube, direct
lighting will usually create a high light. If the high light as shown in the
ground glass is over the ridge detail on the skin, a poor photograph will
result. If the high light cannot be removed by rearranging the lights, then
reflected light should be tried.
In order to effect reflected light a large piece of white paper, cardboard, or
similar material is used. A hole is cut in the center of the paper or cardboard.
This must be big enough for the camera lens to protrude through. The ends
of the paper or board are curved toward the skin or finger to be
photographed. The lamps which are to be used are placed facing the curved
paper or cardboard in such fashion that the light will strike the paper or
board and be reflected by the curved surface to the object.
The lamps should be close enough to the paper or board to give the
maximum light. Care should be exercised, however, not to place them too
close, because of the fire hazard.
Any arrangement of lamps and reflectors giving a similar effect as the above
should prove suitable.
Fingers or skin which have a mottled, reddish-brown color because of
decomposition, exposure to severe heat, or diffusion with blood present a
problem of lack of contrast between ridges and depressions for photographic
purposes. This lack of contrast can be overcome to a large extent by the use
of a yellow or light red filter. Sometimes, in those cases where the
discoloration is due to the diffusion of blood throughout the tissues, the
blood can be washed out by saturating and rinsing the specimen in a 10- to
20-percent solution of citric acid. If, of course, the blood is not removed
satisfactorily, the photographing should be done with the filter.
As previously stated, the fingerprint camera can be readily adapted to the use
of photographing fingers or skin specimens for ridge detail. Sometimes it is
possible to photograph the skin or finger in the same manner as one does a
latent print. There will be instances, however, in which the standard use of
the fingerprint camera will not be possible or effective, such as for side light,
reflected light, and sometimes transmitted light, or instances in which it is
not possible to get the finger or skin flush with the opening of the camera. In
these instances the lights of the camera are not used, so the batteries should
lighting will usually create a high light. If the high light as shown in the
ground glass is over the ridge detail on the skin, a poor photograph will
result. If the high light cannot be removed by rearranging the lights, then
reflected light should be tried.
In order to effect reflected light a large piece of white paper, cardboard, or
similar material is used. A hole is cut in the center of the paper or cardboard.
This must be big enough for the camera lens to protrude through. The ends
of the paper or board are curved toward the skin or finger to be
photographed. The lamps which are to be used are placed facing the curved
paper or cardboard in such fashion that the light will strike the paper or
board and be reflected by the curved surface to the object.
The lamps should be close enough to the paper or board to give the
maximum light. Care should be exercised, however, not to place them too
close, because of the fire hazard.
Any arrangement of lamps and reflectors giving a similar effect as the above
should prove suitable.
Fingers or skin which have a mottled, reddish-brown color because of
decomposition, exposure to severe heat, or diffusion with blood present a
problem of lack of contrast between ridges and depressions for photographic
purposes. This lack of contrast can be overcome to a large extent by the use
of a yellow or light red filter. Sometimes, in those cases where the
discoloration is due to the diffusion of blood throughout the tissues, the
blood can be washed out by saturating and rinsing the specimen in a 10- to
20-percent solution of citric acid. If, of course, the blood is not removed
satisfactorily, the photographing should be done with the filter.
As previously stated, the fingerprint camera can be readily adapted to the use
of photographing fingers or skin specimens for ridge detail. Sometimes it is
possible to photograph the skin or finger in the same manner as one does a
latent print. There will be instances, however, in which the standard use of
the fingerprint camera will not be possible or effective, such as for side light,
reflected light, and sometimes transmitted light, or instances in which it is
not possible to get the finger or skin flush with the opening of the camera. In
these instances the lights of the camera are not used, so the batteries should
Page 236
be removed and gooseneck lamps or other suitable lighting equipment and
ground glass utilized when the finger or skin is prepared for photographing
(fig. 402).
[Fig. 402]
The camera is opened either at the point where the lights are housed or at the
lens point, whichever is most effective. Then, opening the shutter, the
operator moves the camera either toward or away from the finger or skin to
the point where the ridge detail is sharpest in the ground glass. The camera is
held firmly, the ground glass is removed, the film is inserted and the
photograph taken.
With respect to exposure time, it is possible only to generalize and point out
that each case will have its own individual aspects. Controlling features for
consideration will be the type of film, the type and size of lights, the method
of lighting (direct, side, transmitted or reflected) and also whether or not
filters are used. Accordingly, there may be a wide variation of exposure time
in different cases.
The best approach for arriving at the proper exposure time is merely to make
a test exposure, develop the film, and from an examination determine if it is
ground glass utilized when the finger or skin is prepared for photographing
(fig. 402).
[Fig. 402]
The camera is opened either at the point where the lights are housed or at the
lens point, whichever is most effective. Then, opening the shutter, the
operator moves the camera either toward or away from the finger or skin to
the point where the ridge detail is sharpest in the ground glass. The camera is
held firmly, the ground glass is removed, the film is inserted and the
photograph taken.
With respect to exposure time, it is possible only to generalize and point out
that each case will have its own individual aspects. Controlling features for
consideration will be the type of film, the type and size of lights, the method
of lighting (direct, side, transmitted or reflected) and also whether or not
filters are used. Accordingly, there may be a wide variation of exposure time
in different cases.
The best approach for arriving at the proper exposure time is merely to make
a test exposure, develop the film, and from an examination determine if it is
Page 237
underexposed or overexposed. Time the next exposure accordingly, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
As has been mentioned previously, when photographing the ridges on
fingers or skin, the ridge detail will be in reverse position, the opposite from
an inked impression made from the same skin or finger. (This is true except
in those cases in which the underside of the epidermis is photographed.)
Accordingly, when the negative is printed, it should be printed gloss side to
sensitive side of paper to give the position comparable to an inked print
made from the same skin or finger. In order to avoid error or confusion a
notation should be made on the photograph of each finger, or, if they are cut
and mounted on a fingerprint card, point out that the position has been
reversed and that the prints are in their correct position for classifying and
searching. Otherwise, it is possible that the right hand may be mistaken for
the left hand and vice versa.
If the underside of the epidermis or outer skin is being photographed, the
negative should be printed in the normal manner, that is, emulsion side of
negative to sensitized side of paper. Here, reversal of position is not
necessary for when the ridge detail is viewed from the underside it appears
to be in the same position as the inked impression normally is reflected on a
fingerprint card.
Care should be taken to see that each photograph is labeled correctly to
indicate the finger it represents, such as right thumb, right index, right ring,
etc. It is imperative that no error occurs in such labeling, inasmuch as it is
highly probable that the resultant classification would be incorrect and
failure to make an identification might very easily follow.
Deceased infants
The foregoing has dealt with the securing of fingerprints of unknown
deceased persons for identification purposes. The basis for such action is the
presumptive possibility that the unknowns had been fingerprinted previously
and through this medium might be identified.
Another type of problem, however, arises with the finding of a deceased
infant. It can be safely assumed that the possibility of there being in
existence a set of known fingerprints of the infant is extremely remote.
satisfactory results are obtained.
As has been mentioned previously, when photographing the ridges on
fingers or skin, the ridge detail will be in reverse position, the opposite from
an inked impression made from the same skin or finger. (This is true except
in those cases in which the underside of the epidermis is photographed.)
Accordingly, when the negative is printed, it should be printed gloss side to
sensitive side of paper to give the position comparable to an inked print
made from the same skin or finger. In order to avoid error or confusion a
notation should be made on the photograph of each finger, or, if they are cut
and mounted on a fingerprint card, point out that the position has been
reversed and that the prints are in their correct position for classifying and
searching. Otherwise, it is possible that the right hand may be mistaken for
the left hand and vice versa.
If the underside of the epidermis or outer skin is being photographed, the
negative should be printed in the normal manner, that is, emulsion side of
negative to sensitized side of paper. Here, reversal of position is not
necessary for when the ridge detail is viewed from the underside it appears
to be in the same position as the inked impression normally is reflected on a
fingerprint card.
Care should be taken to see that each photograph is labeled correctly to
indicate the finger it represents, such as right thumb, right index, right ring,
etc. It is imperative that no error occurs in such labeling, inasmuch as it is
highly probable that the resultant classification would be incorrect and
failure to make an identification might very easily follow.
Deceased infants
The foregoing has dealt with the securing of fingerprints of unknown
deceased persons for identification purposes. The basis for such action is the
presumptive possibility that the unknowns had been fingerprinted previously
and through this medium might be identified.
Another type of problem, however, arises with the finding of a deceased
infant. It can be safely assumed that the possibility of there being in
existence a set of known fingerprints of the infant is extremely remote.
Page 238
Nevertheless, in view of the fact that many hospitals throughout the country,
as part of the general routine of recording a birth, secure the infant's
footprints, it would follow that there could be a remote possibility of
identifying the deceased infant through its footprints. The foregoing
principles and procedures would then apply in securing the foot impression
of a deceased infant. It is fully realized that in practically all cases involving
the finding of an abandoned infant corpse the infant is probably illegitimate
issue and delivery did not occur in a hospital, but there have been instances
where such was not the case.
The importance of securing footprints of deceased infants killed in a
common disaster cannot be overemphasized. Such disasters may involve the
death of infants of lawful issue, and in many instances there are hospital
footprint records available which may prove of value as a positive means of
identification.
Technical consideration
The methods described are intended to record, either by printing with ink or
by photographing as legibly as possible, the ridge details of the tips of the
fingers of unknown dead for identification purposes. The securing of the
impressions enables the fingerprint examiner to classify and search them
through a file. This "search," of course, means merely to make a comparison
of the deceased's prints with the prints of known individuals.
It is well to bear in mind the fact that the dermis or epidermis may have
undergone certain physical changes and that in order for the fingerprint
examiner to make a proper comparison he must know the changes which can
and do occur. Otherwise, he may fail to make an identification (fig. 403).
as part of the general routine of recording a birth, secure the infant's
footprints, it would follow that there could be a remote possibility of
identifying the deceased infant through its footprints. The foregoing
principles and procedures would then apply in securing the foot impression
of a deceased infant. It is fully realized that in practically all cases involving
the finding of an abandoned infant corpse the infant is probably illegitimate
issue and delivery did not occur in a hospital, but there have been instances
where such was not the case.
The importance of securing footprints of deceased infants killed in a
common disaster cannot be overemphasized. Such disasters may involve the
death of infants of lawful issue, and in many instances there are hospital
footprint records available which may prove of value as a positive means of
identification.
Technical consideration
The methods described are intended to record, either by printing with ink or
by photographing as legibly as possible, the ridge details of the tips of the
fingers of unknown dead for identification purposes. The securing of the
impressions enables the fingerprint examiner to classify and search them
through a file. This "search," of course, means merely to make a comparison
of the deceased's prints with the prints of known individuals.
It is well to bear in mind the fact that the dermis or epidermis may have
undergone certain physical changes and that in order for the fingerprint
examiner to make a proper comparison he must know the changes which can
and do occur. Otherwise, he may fail to make an identification (fig. 403).
Page 239
[Fig. 403]
Consider first the epidermis or outer layer of skin in cases of maceration (the
skin is water soaked). There may be considerable swelling. The ridges
become broader and are more distinct. An inked impression in such an
instance may show a pattern larger in area than a print made from the same
finger when the person was alive. Also, if the skin is on the finger but is
loose, inking and rolling could distort the impression so that some of the
ridge formations would seem to be in a different alignment from
corresponding details in a print made during life. When decomposition
commences, what are really solid ridges may be broken, giving rise to the
possibility that there appear to be more characteristics than there actually are
(figs. 404 and 405).
Consider first the epidermis or outer layer of skin in cases of maceration (the
skin is water soaked). There may be considerable swelling. The ridges
become broader and are more distinct. An inked impression in such an
instance may show a pattern larger in area than a print made from the same
finger when the person was alive. Also, if the skin is on the finger but is
loose, inking and rolling could distort the impression so that some of the
ridge formations would seem to be in a different alignment from
corresponding details in a print made during life. When decomposition
commences, what are really solid ridges may be broken, giving rise to the
possibility that there appear to be more characteristics than there actually are
(figs. 404 and 405).
Page 240
[Figs. 404-405]
The existence of wrinkles may also cause the impression to acquire an
appearance of dissimilarity when compared with the original inked print.
With respect to cases of desiccation, there will probably be shrinkage, hence,
the impressions made may appear smaller than in life and the ridges will be
finer. In cases in which the epidermis has been lost and there remains only
the dermis or second layer, there will usually be shrinkage with the same
The existence of wrinkles may also cause the impression to acquire an
appearance of dissimilarity when compared with the original inked print.
With respect to cases of desiccation, there will probably be shrinkage, hence,
the impressions made may appear smaller than in life and the ridges will be
finer. In cases in which the epidermis has been lost and there remains only
the dermis or second layer, there will usually be shrinkage with the same
Page 241
results. Here also, wrinkles, if present, may cause a difference in appearance
from the normal print.
In addition to shrinkage and wrinkles in cases involving the second layer of
skin, there is a radical change in the appearance of the ridges themselves.
The second or dermal layer of skin is composed of what are called dermal
papillae which have the appearance of minute blunt pegs or nipples. The
dermal papillae are arranged in double rows (fig. 406). Each double row lies
deep in a ridge of the surface or epidermal layer and presents the same
variations of ridge characteristics as are on the outer layer of skin except that
they are double. Accordingly, when the second layer of skin is printed or
photographed, the ridge detail will appear in double. That is, the ridges will
appear as though they were split. This may well confuse the fingerprint
examiner in that what may be a loop having 10 ridge counts may appear to
be a loop having 20 ridge counts when the impression is made from the
second or dermal layer of skin. These double rows of ridges are finer and not
as sharp as the detail on the outer skin, which adds to the difficulty of
arriving at a correct classification and making a proper comparison.
[Fig. 406]
from the normal print.
In addition to shrinkage and wrinkles in cases involving the second layer of
skin, there is a radical change in the appearance of the ridges themselves.
The second or dermal layer of skin is composed of what are called dermal
papillae which have the appearance of minute blunt pegs or nipples. The
dermal papillae are arranged in double rows (fig. 406). Each double row lies
deep in a ridge of the surface or epidermal layer and presents the same
variations of ridge characteristics as are on the outer layer of skin except that
they are double. Accordingly, when the second layer of skin is printed or
photographed, the ridge detail will appear in double. That is, the ridges will
appear as though they were split. This may well confuse the fingerprint
examiner in that what may be a loop having 10 ridge counts may appear to
be a loop having 20 ridge counts when the impression is made from the
second or dermal layer of skin. These double rows of ridges are finer and not
as sharp as the detail on the outer skin, which adds to the difficulty of
arriving at a correct classification and making a proper comparison.
[Fig. 406]
Page 242
FBI aid
The above techniques and procedures have been dealt with upon the basis
that the law enforcement officers would, when a corpse has been found,
attempt to secure a set of finger impressions in an effort to identify the
unknown dead. If, however, the officer feels that the job is too difficult or is
beyond his scope, consideration should be given to cutting off the hands or
fingers of the deceased and forwarding them to the Identification Division of
the FBI for processing. If this course is decided upon, it is reiterated that
local statutes governing the cutting of the dead must be complied with and
proper authorization must be secured.
In order to facilitate the transmission of such specimens to the FBI the
following suggestions are made:
First, it is deemed most desirable, when possible, to have both of the hands,
severed at the wrist, forwarded in their entirety (fig. 407). It is desired that
the hands, rather than each separate finger, be sent inasmuch as it eliminates
the possibility of getting the fingers mixed up or incorrectly labeled. If,
however, it is not possible to send the hands for some reason, then, of
course, the fingers should be cut off and forwarded. In cutting, the fingers
should be cut off at the palm beginning with the right thumb, then the right
index, ring, etc., just as though they were to be printed. As soon as each
finger is cut off it should be placed in an individual container, such as a
small glass jar, and immediately marked as to which particular finger it is.
The above techniques and procedures have been dealt with upon the basis
that the law enforcement officers would, when a corpse has been found,
attempt to secure a set of finger impressions in an effort to identify the
unknown dead. If, however, the officer feels that the job is too difficult or is
beyond his scope, consideration should be given to cutting off the hands or
fingers of the deceased and forwarding them to the Identification Division of
the FBI for processing. If this course is decided upon, it is reiterated that
local statutes governing the cutting of the dead must be complied with and
proper authorization must be secured.
In order to facilitate the transmission of such specimens to the FBI the
following suggestions are made:
First, it is deemed most desirable, when possible, to have both of the hands,
severed at the wrist, forwarded in their entirety (fig. 407). It is desired that
the hands, rather than each separate finger, be sent inasmuch as it eliminates
the possibility of getting the fingers mixed up or incorrectly labeled. If,
however, it is not possible to send the hands for some reason, then, of
course, the fingers should be cut off and forwarded. In cutting, the fingers
should be cut off at the palm beginning with the right thumb, then the right
index, ring, etc., just as though they were to be printed. As soon as each
finger is cut off it should be placed in an individual container, such as a
small glass jar, and immediately marked as to which particular finger it is.
Page 243
[Fig. 407]
In the event that the hands or fingers of more than one dead are being
transmitted, it is absolutely necessary that not only the fingers be properly
labeled but that each body also be given an identifying number or symbol
which must be indicated on the hands or fingers cut from that body as well,
in order to avoid the embarrassing situation of identifying the hands and not
knowing from which body they were cut.
In shipping, the hands, fingers, or skins may be placed in preserving
solutions such as 5-percent solution of formaldehyde, 5-percent solution of
alcohol, or embalming fluid. When hands or fingers are desiccated (dried
out), however, it is most desirable that they be placed in airtight containers
and sent without any preservative. If glass containers are used, the
specimens should be packed in such a manner as to avoid breakage. Dry ice
is a suitable preservative for transmitting such specimens but it should not be
used when shipping will take more than 24 hours.
In making up a package using dry ice, the hands or fingers, properly tagged,
should be placed in cellophane or paper bags. A material such as sawdust,
shavings or similar packing which acts as an insulation is placed around the
specimens. A sufficient amount of dry ice is then placed in the package
In the event that the hands or fingers of more than one dead are being
transmitted, it is absolutely necessary that not only the fingers be properly
labeled but that each body also be given an identifying number or symbol
which must be indicated on the hands or fingers cut from that body as well,
in order to avoid the embarrassing situation of identifying the hands and not
knowing from which body they were cut.
In shipping, the hands, fingers, or skins may be placed in preserving
solutions such as 5-percent solution of formaldehyde, 5-percent solution of
alcohol, or embalming fluid. When hands or fingers are desiccated (dried
out), however, it is most desirable that they be placed in airtight containers
and sent without any preservative. If glass containers are used, the
specimens should be packed in such a manner as to avoid breakage. Dry ice
is a suitable preservative for transmitting such specimens but it should not be
used when shipping will take more than 24 hours.
In making up a package using dry ice, the hands or fingers, properly tagged,
should be placed in cellophane or paper bags. A material such as sawdust,
shavings or similar packing which acts as an insulation is placed around the
specimens. A sufficient amount of dry ice is then placed in the package
Page 244
which is then packed tight with more sawdust or shavings. The dry ice
should not be in direct contact with the cellophane or paper bags which
contain the hands or fingers.
A letter covering transmittal of the specimens should be prepared in
duplicate. It should, of course, indicate the sender. The names of any
probable victims, sex, race and approximate age of the deceased should, if
such information is available, be secured from the coroner or medical
examiner and be included in the letter. A copy of the letter should be placed
in the package. The original should be mailed separately. Both letter and
package should be addressed as follows:
should not be in direct contact with the cellophane or paper bags which
contain the hands or fingers.
A letter covering transmittal of the specimens should be prepared in
duplicate. It should, of course, indicate the sender. The names of any
probable victims, sex, race and approximate age of the deceased should, if
such information is available, be secured from the coroner or medical
examiner and be included in the letter. A copy of the letter should be placed
in the package. The original should be mailed separately. Both letter and
package should be addressed as follows:
Page 245
Director
Federal Bureau of Investigation
U.S. Department of Justice
Washington 25, D.C.
Attention: Identification Division—Latent Fingerprint Section.
If the package contains glass jars it should be marked "Fragile" to insure
careful handling in transit.
The package should be sent railway express, prepaid, or, where there is
need for speed, by air express, prepaid. When they are received by the
Identification Division, the specimens will undergo various treatments
which may necessitate further cutting, scraping, etc. In all cases, regardless
of condition, the specimens will be returned after examination.
All of the foregoing matter has dealt with instances in which it has been
assumed that all ten fingers are available, or a sufficient number of the
fingers of a deceased have been secured and impressions suitable for
searching through the fingerprint files of the FBI have been recorded.
There will be cases, however, where only a few, or possibly only one, of the
fingers has sufficient ridge detail for identification. In such instances a
search through the FBI files would be impractical. This, however, does not
preclude the possibility of making a positive identification by the use of the
one finger. Though a search through the file is not possible, a comparison
can be made with the fingerprints of individuals who it is thought the
deceased may be or, in some instances, with the fingerprints of missing
persons.
In this connection, where one or only a few fingers are forwarded to the
FBI, the names of all possible victims should also be submitted. The
fingerprints of those individuals, if available, will then be taken out of file
and compared with the ridge detail on the finger of the deceased in an
endeavor to establish a positive identification. Many such identifications
have been effected.
In conjunction with the usual services afforded authorized law enforcement
agencies, the services of an FBI fingerprint expert are also made available
Federal Bureau of Investigation
U.S. Department of Justice
Washington 25, D.C.
Attention: Identification Division—Latent Fingerprint Section.
If the package contains glass jars it should be marked "Fragile" to insure
careful handling in transit.
The package should be sent railway express, prepaid, or, where there is
need for speed, by air express, prepaid. When they are received by the
Identification Division, the specimens will undergo various treatments
which may necessitate further cutting, scraping, etc. In all cases, regardless
of condition, the specimens will be returned after examination.
All of the foregoing matter has dealt with instances in which it has been
assumed that all ten fingers are available, or a sufficient number of the
fingers of a deceased have been secured and impressions suitable for
searching through the fingerprint files of the FBI have been recorded.
There will be cases, however, where only a few, or possibly only one, of the
fingers has sufficient ridge detail for identification. In such instances a
search through the FBI files would be impractical. This, however, does not
preclude the possibility of making a positive identification by the use of the
one finger. Though a search through the file is not possible, a comparison
can be made with the fingerprints of individuals who it is thought the
deceased may be or, in some instances, with the fingerprints of missing
persons.
In this connection, where one or only a few fingers are forwarded to the
FBI, the names of all possible victims should also be submitted. The
fingerprints of those individuals, if available, will then be taken out of file
and compared with the ridge detail on the finger of the deceased in an
endeavor to establish a positive identification. Many such identifications
have been effected.
In conjunction with the usual services afforded authorized law enforcement
agencies, the services of an FBI fingerprint expert are also made available
Page 246
in those cases where expert testimony is necessary to establish the identity
of the deceased through fingerprints, providing, of course, such an
identification has been made.
Extreme caution should be exercised in the case of the chemicals previously
mentioned in this article. Acetone, alcohol, benzine, and xylene are highly
inflammable and should neither be used near open flames nor while the
operator is smoking. The fumes given off by acetone, benzine, xylene, and
formaldehyde are toxic and may cause sickness. They should be used in a
well-ventilated room only. It is also suggested that the fingerprint examiner
wear rubber gloves when using acetone, benzine, xylene, formaldehyde,
potassium hydroxide, or sodium hydroxide. These chemicals will cause the
skin to peel. Strong concentrations may cause burns.
In conclusion, it is pointed out that the procedures and techniques which
have been described are those currently being used by the fingerprint
experts of the FBI. These methods are fast and the results have been most
satisfactory. This Bureau does not claim, however, that satisfactory results
cannot be achieved through variations thereof or different methods.
of the deceased through fingerprints, providing, of course, such an
identification has been made.
Extreme caution should be exercised in the case of the chemicals previously
mentioned in this article. Acetone, alcohol, benzine, and xylene are highly
inflammable and should neither be used near open flames nor while the
operator is smoking. The fumes given off by acetone, benzine, xylene, and
formaldehyde are toxic and may cause sickness. They should be used in a
well-ventilated room only. It is also suggested that the fingerprint examiner
wear rubber gloves when using acetone, benzine, xylene, formaldehyde,
potassium hydroxide, or sodium hydroxide. These chemicals will cause the
skin to peel. Strong concentrations may cause burns.
In conclusion, it is pointed out that the procedures and techniques which
have been described are those currently being used by the fingerprint
experts of the FBI. These methods are fast and the results have been most
satisfactory. This Bureau does not claim, however, that satisfactory results
cannot be achieved through variations thereof or different methods.
Page 247
CHAPTER XI
Page 248
Establishment of a Local Fingerprint Identification
Bureau
For the information and assistance of officials who desire to establish a
local fingerprint identification bureau, the following suggestions are being
made to indicate the principal materials necessary to equip such a bureau:
Fingerprinting equipment
For the purpose of taking fingerprints there should be a stand with a clamp
for holding the fingerprint cards steady. This latter item is necessary to
prevent smudging the prints. A tube of printer's ink is used. The ink is
applied by a roller to a glass plate upon which the fingers are inked before
being rolled on the cards. The complete equipment for the above process
may be secured from a number of commercial sources or it can be made.
Figure 408 depicts an inking stand.
Bureau
For the information and assistance of officials who desire to establish a
local fingerprint identification bureau, the following suggestions are being
made to indicate the principal materials necessary to equip such a bureau:
Fingerprinting equipment
For the purpose of taking fingerprints there should be a stand with a clamp
for holding the fingerprint cards steady. This latter item is necessary to
prevent smudging the prints. A tube of printer's ink is used. The ink is
applied by a roller to a glass plate upon which the fingers are inked before
being rolled on the cards. The complete equipment for the above process
may be secured from a number of commercial sources or it can be made.
Figure 408 depicts an inking stand.
Page 249
[Fig. 408]
Fingerprint files
It is suggested that the fingerprint card be white, light cardboard, 8 by 8
inches, slightly glazed. This size is convenient, as it allows all the space
necessary for recording the classification of the prints and general
descriptive information concerning the individual. In the event the new
Fingerprint files
It is suggested that the fingerprint card be white, light cardboard, 8 by 8
inches, slightly glazed. This size is convenient, as it allows all the space
necessary for recording the classification of the prints and general
descriptive information concerning the individual. In the event the new
Page 250
bureau desires to contribute copies of its fingerprints to the Federal Bureau
of Investigation, the latter will, upon request, gladly furnish fingerprint
cards for the purpose together with envelopes and instructions on how to
take fingerprints. It is suggested that the new bureau design its cards similar
to those furnished by the Federal Bureau of Investigation, as these have
been designed after special study and have been found to be satisfactory
over a long period of time. Figures 409 and 410 show the fingerprint side
and reverse side of the criminal fingerprint card used by the Federal Bureau
of Investigation.
[Fig. 409]
[Enlarge]
of Investigation, the latter will, upon request, gladly furnish fingerprint
cards for the purpose together with envelopes and instructions on how to
take fingerprints. It is suggested that the new bureau design its cards similar
to those furnished by the Federal Bureau of Investigation, as these have
been designed after special study and have been found to be satisfactory
over a long period of time. Figures 409 and 410 show the fingerprint side
and reverse side of the criminal fingerprint card used by the Federal Bureau
of Investigation.
[Fig. 409]
[Enlarge]
Page 251
[Fig. 410]
[Enlarge]
In classifying and comparing fingerprints it is necessary to use a
magnifying or fingerprint glass. Such instruments can be obtained from
various commercial sources. Figure 411 shows the type of magnifying glass
used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation.
[Enlarge]
In classifying and comparing fingerprints it is necessary to use a
magnifying or fingerprint glass. Such instruments can be obtained from
various commercial sources. Figure 411 shows the type of magnifying glass
used by the Federal Bureau of Investigation.
Page 252
[Fig. 411]
The fingerprint cards should be filed according to fingerprint classification
sequence in cabinets, preferably steel. It is further suggested that the
cabinets be three drawers high, with each drawer divided into three rows for
filing. Such cabinets or similar ones can be obtained from various
commercial sources. Figure 412 shows the type of fingerprint cabinet used
in the Federal Bureau of Investigation.
The fingerprint cards should be filed according to fingerprint classification
sequence in cabinets, preferably steel. It is further suggested that the
cabinets be three drawers high, with each drawer divided into three rows for
filing. Such cabinets or similar ones can be obtained from various
commercial sources. Figure 412 shows the type of fingerprint cabinet used
in the Federal Bureau of Investigation.
Page 253
[Fig. 412]
In order to facilitate the location of classification groups, it is suggested that
guide cards be placed in the rows of fingerprint cards at frequent intervals.
These guide cards should be slightly longer and heavier than the fingerprint
cards and should have small tabs on the top to hold classification
identifying symbols. Figure 413 shows the type of guide card used by the
Federal Bureau of Investigation.
In order to facilitate the location of classification groups, it is suggested that
guide cards be placed in the rows of fingerprint cards at frequent intervals.
These guide cards should be slightly longer and heavier than the fingerprint
cards and should have small tabs on the top to hold classification
identifying symbols. Figure 413 shows the type of guide card used by the
Federal Bureau of Investigation.
Page 254
[Fig. 413]
A practice which has been of the utmost benefit in the Federal Bureau of
Investigation is as follows: When a fingerprint card is taken out of its
regular file for any reason, a substitute card is put in its place, to remain
until the return of the card. This substitute card, or "charge-out" card, is of a
different color from the fingerprint card and slightly longer. On it are
recorded the name, the classification formula, and peculiar characteristics,
such as scars and peculiar pattern formations, appearing on the original
card. By indicating the date and reason for charging out the original card,
the Bureau is able to keep an accurate check on the whereabouts of all
prints at all times. It is suggested that the local bureaus adopt a practice of
this kind whenever a fingerprint card is drawn from the files and it is known
that it may be out for a period of time longer than the remainder of the day
on which it is drawn. Figure 414 shows the type of charge-out card used in
the FBI.
A practice which has been of the utmost benefit in the Federal Bureau of
Investigation is as follows: When a fingerprint card is taken out of its
regular file for any reason, a substitute card is put in its place, to remain
until the return of the card. This substitute card, or "charge-out" card, is of a
different color from the fingerprint card and slightly longer. On it are
recorded the name, the classification formula, and peculiar characteristics,
such as scars and peculiar pattern formations, appearing on the original
card. By indicating the date and reason for charging out the original card,
the Bureau is able to keep an accurate check on the whereabouts of all
prints at all times. It is suggested that the local bureaus adopt a practice of
this kind whenever a fingerprint card is drawn from the files and it is known
that it may be out for a period of time longer than the remainder of the day
on which it is drawn. Figure 414 shows the type of charge-out card used in
the FBI.
Page 255
[Fig. 414]
[Enlarge]
Each fingerprint card handled by the bureau should receive a fingerprint
number and these numbers can be assigned in consecutive order.
As the bureau increases in size, it will be found a source of much
convenience to have fingerprints of males and females kept in separate
files.
Name files
There will be times when it may be necessary to locate an individual's
fingerprints when no current fingerprints are available, but the name with a
police number or the classification is known. In order to facilitate work of
this nature, as well as to keep a complete record and check on each set of
fingerprints, it is necessary that the files be indexed in a manner similar to
that in which books in a library are indexed.
In this connection, for each fingerprint card there is prepared an index card.
On this the name of the individual is placed, with all known aliases, the
fingerprint classification formula, the police or arrest number, the date of
arrest or other action. It is desirable, also, to have on this card such general
information as age, height, weight and race. Figure 415 shows the front of a
suggested type of 3- by 5-inch index card.
[Enlarge]
Each fingerprint card handled by the bureau should receive a fingerprint
number and these numbers can be assigned in consecutive order.
As the bureau increases in size, it will be found a source of much
convenience to have fingerprints of males and females kept in separate
files.
Name files
There will be times when it may be necessary to locate an individual's
fingerprints when no current fingerprints are available, but the name with a
police number or the classification is known. In order to facilitate work of
this nature, as well as to keep a complete record and check on each set of
fingerprints, it is necessary that the files be indexed in a manner similar to
that in which books in a library are indexed.
In this connection, for each fingerprint card there is prepared an index card.
On this the name of the individual is placed, with all known aliases, the
fingerprint classification formula, the police or arrest number, the date of
arrest or other action. It is desirable, also, to have on this card such general
information as age, height, weight and race. Figure 415 shows the front of a
suggested type of 3- by 5-inch index card.
Page 256
[Fig. 415]
[Enlarge]
Figure 416 shows the reverse side of the 3- by 5-inch index card. These are
filed alphabetically in special cabinets. An index card also should be made
for every alias which an individual has used. Figure 417 shows an
electrically operated file cabinet in which the index cards are filed. It is
suggested that the alias cards be of a different color from the one bearing
the correct name, known as the "Master." Each alias card also should have
typed on it the correct name of the individual, for purposes of reference and
cross-checking. For convenience and accuracy these files, as in the
fingerprint files, should also have suitable guide cards.
[Enlarge]
Figure 416 shows the reverse side of the 3- by 5-inch index card. These are
filed alphabetically in special cabinets. An index card also should be made
for every alias which an individual has used. Figure 417 shows an
electrically operated file cabinet in which the index cards are filed. It is
suggested that the alias cards be of a different color from the one bearing
the correct name, known as the "Master." Each alias card also should have
typed on it the correct name of the individual, for purposes of reference and
cross-checking. For convenience and accuracy these files, as in the
fingerprint files, should also have suitable guide cards.
Page 257
[Fig. 416]
[Fig. 417]
It is advisable to make use of charge-out cards when original index cards
are drawn from the files. Figure 418 shows a charge-out card.
[Fig. 417]
It is advisable to make use of charge-out cards when original index cards
are drawn from the files. Figure 418 shows a charge-out card.
Page 258
[Fig. 418]
[Enlarge]
To supplant the 3- by 5-inch index cards mentioned above, many law
enforcement agencies have found it desirable to use a separate sheet,
sometimes referred to as a "History Sheet" or "Information Sheet,"
containing the complete case history of the subject involved. These separate
sheets can be filed by fingerprint number sequence and contain not only the
data such as the known aliases, the fingerprint classification formula, the
arrest number, and other essential items which are set out on the 3- by 5-
inch cards as heretofore described, but also contain a concise summary of
the subject's arrest history, particularly with reference to his criminal
activities in the particular city. They may also contain a summarized case
history with respect to each arrest or commitment, including such items as
the date and place of arrest, complete home address, relatives, the essential
facts concerning the prosecution of charges, and the ultimate disposition.
Jacket folder file
When an identification bureau receives prints of individuals on whom it
already has prints, it is not practical to keep more than one set of prints per
[Enlarge]
To supplant the 3- by 5-inch index cards mentioned above, many law
enforcement agencies have found it desirable to use a separate sheet,
sometimes referred to as a "History Sheet" or "Information Sheet,"
containing the complete case history of the subject involved. These separate
sheets can be filed by fingerprint number sequence and contain not only the
data such as the known aliases, the fingerprint classification formula, the
arrest number, and other essential items which are set out on the 3- by 5-
inch cards as heretofore described, but also contain a concise summary of
the subject's arrest history, particularly with reference to his criminal
activities in the particular city. They may also contain a summarized case
history with respect to each arrest or commitment, including such items as
the date and place of arrest, complete home address, relatives, the essential
facts concerning the prosecution of charges, and the ultimate disposition.
Jacket folder file
When an identification bureau receives prints of individuals on whom it
already has prints, it is not practical to keep more than one set of prints per
Page 259
person in what may be called the active fingerprint file. In these instances
the better print should be designated a "Master" print by having the word
"Master" stamped thereon. It should be given a number, to be known as the
master number, which number should also be placed on all other sets of
prints which may be found to be identical with the "Master" print. The
"Master" print is placed in the active files. The extra prints are placed
together in a heavy folder with their master number stamped thereon. This
jacket folder is then filed in a separate cabinet. Also, if copies of all
information regarding an individual, photographs, and FBI transcript of
record are kept in this folder, his complete record will always be assembled
in an easily accessible unit. The "Master" number should also be placed on
the index card and all the alias cards of the individual. Also, each new alias
and arrest number should be placed on the original index card. The
additional records are kept in folders which are arranged in numerical order,
beginning with Nos. 1, 2, 3, and so on.
A further suggestion in connection with the maintenance of this folder file,
besides the use of a separate "Master" numbering system, is the use of the
arrest fingerprint number. As indicated previously, each person arrested and
fingerprinted is assigned a number. This number appears on the fingerprint
card, name-index card, and photograph. The practice of handling every new
arrest fingerprint card in the bureau should include searching the fingerprint
card in the fingerprint file to ascertain if the subject has a previous record. If
the subject does not have a previous record, a new number should be
assigned. In this connection it is noted that only one copy of the fingerprint
card should be maintained in the file by fingerprint classification. To
indicate the new arrest on the old index card, the date of the new arrest can
be shown. Whether the bureau follows the "Master" numbering system or
the "previous arrest" numbering system should make very little difference
in the ultimate purpose. All extra copies of fingerprint cards, complete
record sheets, photographs, and all information pertaining to the individual
are filed away in the folder file. This complete record is readily accessible
at all times. It will now be found that the bureau has a complete record of
each individual who has an arrest record on file, with provision made for
accurate cross-referencing and checking between names and fingerprints.
Dispositions
the better print should be designated a "Master" print by having the word
"Master" stamped thereon. It should be given a number, to be known as the
master number, which number should also be placed on all other sets of
prints which may be found to be identical with the "Master" print. The
"Master" print is placed in the active files. The extra prints are placed
together in a heavy folder with their master number stamped thereon. This
jacket folder is then filed in a separate cabinet. Also, if copies of all
information regarding an individual, photographs, and FBI transcript of
record are kept in this folder, his complete record will always be assembled
in an easily accessible unit. The "Master" number should also be placed on
the index card and all the alias cards of the individual. Also, each new alias
and arrest number should be placed on the original index card. The
additional records are kept in folders which are arranged in numerical order,
beginning with Nos. 1, 2, 3, and so on.
A further suggestion in connection with the maintenance of this folder file,
besides the use of a separate "Master" numbering system, is the use of the
arrest fingerprint number. As indicated previously, each person arrested and
fingerprinted is assigned a number. This number appears on the fingerprint
card, name-index card, and photograph. The practice of handling every new
arrest fingerprint card in the bureau should include searching the fingerprint
card in the fingerprint file to ascertain if the subject has a previous record. If
the subject does not have a previous record, a new number should be
assigned. In this connection it is noted that only one copy of the fingerprint
card should be maintained in the file by fingerprint classification. To
indicate the new arrest on the old index card, the date of the new arrest can
be shown. Whether the bureau follows the "Master" numbering system or
the "previous arrest" numbering system should make very little difference
in the ultimate purpose. All extra copies of fingerprint cards, complete
record sheets, photographs, and all information pertaining to the individual
are filed away in the folder file. This complete record is readily accessible
at all times. It will now be found that the bureau has a complete record of
each individual who has an arrest record on file, with provision made for
accurate cross-referencing and checking between names and fingerprints.
Dispositions
Page 260
It is important to the bureau to have complete information concerning the
ultimate disposition on each arrest fingerprint card. If the disposition of a
charge is known at the time the person is fingerprinted, this fact should be
indicated in the space provided on the fingerprint card. For example, in the
case of an individual who is arrested, fingerprinted, and turned over to the
county jail, this disposition can be indicated on the fingerprint card which is
forwarded to the Federal Bureau of Investigation. The fingerprint card
should not be held by the bureau pending final disposition of the charge.
In those cases where the disposition is pending prosecutive or court action,
a separate 3- by 5-inch disposition file can be maintained. On these cards
information concerning the name, fingerprint number, race, sex, charge,
name of the arresting officers, and the fingerprint classification should
appear. These cards are filed in a pending-disposition file. The 3- by 5-inch
disposition cards are made at the time the fingerprints of the person are
taken. When the final disposition is obtained it should be noted on the card.
In those cases where there is only one fingerprint card in the bureau, the
disposition can be noted on the name-index card or the reverse side of the
bureau's fingerprint card. In those cases where there is a jacket-folder file
for the individual this disposition card can then be placed in the folder.
"Disposition Sheets" (No. R-84) can be obtained from the Federal Bureau
of Investigation for forwarding this information so that the files of the FBI
will have complete information concerning the arrests. At the time the final
disposition is obtained, these disposition sheets can be completed and
forwarded to the Federal Bureau of Investigation.
Death notices
When persons whose fingerprints are on file are reported as deceased, the
prints should be taken from the active file and assembled with any other
prints of the person concerned. These should be plainly marked "Dead" and
filed in a separate cabinet or section. All the index cards on this individual
should also be marked "Dead" and filed in a separate section. These should
be retained for possible future reference.
In this connection, "Death Notice" forms (No. R-88) can be obtained from
the Federal Bureau of Investigation so that information concerning these
ultimate disposition on each arrest fingerprint card. If the disposition of a
charge is known at the time the person is fingerprinted, this fact should be
indicated in the space provided on the fingerprint card. For example, in the
case of an individual who is arrested, fingerprinted, and turned over to the
county jail, this disposition can be indicated on the fingerprint card which is
forwarded to the Federal Bureau of Investigation. The fingerprint card
should not be held by the bureau pending final disposition of the charge.
In those cases where the disposition is pending prosecutive or court action,
a separate 3- by 5-inch disposition file can be maintained. On these cards
information concerning the name, fingerprint number, race, sex, charge,
name of the arresting officers, and the fingerprint classification should
appear. These cards are filed in a pending-disposition file. The 3- by 5-inch
disposition cards are made at the time the fingerprints of the person are
taken. When the final disposition is obtained it should be noted on the card.
In those cases where there is only one fingerprint card in the bureau, the
disposition can be noted on the name-index card or the reverse side of the
bureau's fingerprint card. In those cases where there is a jacket-folder file
for the individual this disposition card can then be placed in the folder.
"Disposition Sheets" (No. R-84) can be obtained from the Federal Bureau
of Investigation for forwarding this information so that the files of the FBI
will have complete information concerning the arrests. At the time the final
disposition is obtained, these disposition sheets can be completed and
forwarded to the Federal Bureau of Investigation.
Death notices
When persons whose fingerprints are on file are reported as deceased, the
prints should be taken from the active file and assembled with any other
prints of the person concerned. These should be plainly marked "Dead" and
filed in a separate cabinet or section. All the index cards on this individual
should also be marked "Dead" and filed in a separate section. These should
be retained for possible future reference.
In this connection, "Death Notice" forms (No. R-88) can be obtained from
the Federal Bureau of Investigation so that information concerning these
Page 261
deaths can be properly noted in its fingerprint file.
Record of additional arrest
It is not necessary for a bureau to send a regular fingerprint card to the
Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation on individuals
who have been arrested repeatedly and whose previous records are known
to the local law enforcement agency. In such cases the "Record of
Additional Arrest" form should be used.
Complete information must be given on this form. It is imperative that the
FBI number and the finger impressions be placed on this form. The
Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation will send no
answer upon receipt of this form.
The form will be placed in the FBI number folder on the individual and
later when a regular fingerprint card is received the arrest information from
all the forms will be compiled and included on the subject's record as
"supported by fingerprints."
"Record of Additional Arrest" forms (No. 1-1) can be obtained from the
Federal Bureau of Investigation.
Wanted notices
All wanted notices containing fingerprints, including the wanted notices
inserted in the FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, should be filed in the
fingerprint file by classification formula, and the names appearing on these
wanted notices should be indexed and placed in the name files. Concerning
the small wanted notices inserted in the FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, a
suggested procedure would be to paste each individual notice on a blank 8-
by 8-inch white card. The wanted notices are filed by the fingerprint
classification and the names indexed and placed in the name file. When an
apprehension notice is received concerning the wanted notice, a proper
notation should be made on the name card and the wanted notice in the
fingerprint file. If these canceled wanted notices endanger the efficiency of
the file, it is suggested that the name-index card and the fingerprint-wanted
notice be destroyed. Should the bureau adopt this practice it is suggested
Record of additional arrest
It is not necessary for a bureau to send a regular fingerprint card to the
Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation on individuals
who have been arrested repeatedly and whose previous records are known
to the local law enforcement agency. In such cases the "Record of
Additional Arrest" form should be used.
Complete information must be given on this form. It is imperative that the
FBI number and the finger impressions be placed on this form. The
Identification Division of the Federal Bureau of Investigation will send no
answer upon receipt of this form.
The form will be placed in the FBI number folder on the individual and
later when a regular fingerprint card is received the arrest information from
all the forms will be compiled and included on the subject's record as
"supported by fingerprints."
"Record of Additional Arrest" forms (No. 1-1) can be obtained from the
Federal Bureau of Investigation.
Wanted notices
All wanted notices containing fingerprints, including the wanted notices
inserted in the FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, should be filed in the
fingerprint file by classification formula, and the names appearing on these
wanted notices should be indexed and placed in the name files. Concerning
the small wanted notices inserted in the FBI Law Enforcement Bulletin, a
suggested procedure would be to paste each individual notice on a blank 8-
by 8-inch white card. The wanted notices are filed by the fingerprint
classification and the names indexed and placed in the name file. When an
apprehension notice is received concerning the wanted notice, a proper
notation should be made on the name card and the wanted notice in the
fingerprint file. If these canceled wanted notices endanger the efficiency of
the file, it is suggested that the name-index card and the fingerprint-wanted
notice be destroyed. Should the bureau adopt this practice it is suggested
Page 262
that the 8- by 8-inch cards be used again for other wanted notices. In this
manner it would be possible to use the blank card for eight of these notices.
The Federal Bureau of Investigation will make available to law
enforcement agencies a special "Wanted Notice" form (No. 1-12) in order
that they can place wanted notices against the fingerprints in the files of the
FBI.
Photographs
Arrangements should be made to procure a camera for taking photographs
of the persons fingerprinted. This is known as a "mugging" camera and
various types are on the market. It is believed that the photographs should
include a front and side view of the person. In most instances a scale for
indicating height can be made a part of the picture even though only the
upper portion of the individual photographed is taken. Of course, if the
scale is used, the person photographed should be standing even though only
the upper portion of the body appears in the photograph. The necessary
lights should be provided for obtaining photographs. A standard set of
scales should be obtained in order that the correct weight can be
ascertained.
The negatives and photographs can be filed by fingerprint number in a
separate file. In those cases where the individual has more than one arrest
all the photographs can be placed in the jacket-folder number file. The
negatives, in these instances, can remain in the photograph file.
Latent fingerprints
To adequately develop the latent prints at crime scenes, it is necessary that
the proper equipment be provided. This equipment includes latent
fingerprint powders, brushes, lifting tape, fingerprint camera, searchlight,
and scissors. All of this equipment can be obtained from commercial
fingerprint supply companies. Figure 419 shows some of the equipment
used by the FBI. The techniques of developing latent fingerprints and their
uses are more fully explained in the following chapters.
manner it would be possible to use the blank card for eight of these notices.
The Federal Bureau of Investigation will make available to law
enforcement agencies a special "Wanted Notice" form (No. 1-12) in order
that they can place wanted notices against the fingerprints in the files of the
FBI.
Photographs
Arrangements should be made to procure a camera for taking photographs
of the persons fingerprinted. This is known as a "mugging" camera and
various types are on the market. It is believed that the photographs should
include a front and side view of the person. In most instances a scale for
indicating height can be made a part of the picture even though only the
upper portion of the individual photographed is taken. Of course, if the
scale is used, the person photographed should be standing even though only
the upper portion of the body appears in the photograph. The necessary
lights should be provided for obtaining photographs. A standard set of
scales should be obtained in order that the correct weight can be
ascertained.
The negatives and photographs can be filed by fingerprint number in a
separate file. In those cases where the individual has more than one arrest
all the photographs can be placed in the jacket-folder number file. The
negatives, in these instances, can remain in the photograph file.
Latent fingerprints
To adequately develop the latent prints at crime scenes, it is necessary that
the proper equipment be provided. This equipment includes latent
fingerprint powders, brushes, lifting tape, fingerprint camera, searchlight,
and scissors. All of this equipment can be obtained from commercial
fingerprint supply companies. Figure 419 shows some of the equipment
used by the FBI. The techniques of developing latent fingerprints and their
uses are more fully explained in the following chapters.
Page 263
[Fig. 419]
It is believed that by following the basic ideas outlined, the officials of law
enforcement agencies can be assured of best results in establishing and
maintaining a small identification bureau. For further information, the
Federal Bureau of Investigation will furnish to duly constituted law
enforcement officials any additional data which may be of material
assistance in the maintenance of such a bureau.
It is believed that by following the basic ideas outlined, the officials of law
enforcement agencies can be assured of best results in establishing and
maintaining a small identification bureau. For further information, the
Federal Bureau of Investigation will furnish to duly constituted law
enforcement officials any additional data which may be of material
assistance in the maintenance of such a bureau.
Page 264
CHAPTER XII
Page 265
Latent Impressions
Each ridge of the fingers, palms, and soles bears a row of sweat pores
which in the average person constantly exude perspiration. Also, the ridges
of the fingers and palms are in intermittent contact with other parts of the
body, such as the hair and face, and with various objects, which may leave a
film of grease or moisture on the ridges. In touching an object, the film of
moisture and/or grease may be transferred to the object, thus leaving an
outline of the ridges of the fingers or palm thereon. This print is called a
latent impression, the word "latent" meaning hidden, that is, the print many
times is not readily visible.
Latent impressions, regardless of the area of the ridges present, are of the
greatest importance to the criminal investigator as identification of them
may solve the crime and result in successful prosecution of the subject.
Consequently, every effort should be made to preserve and identify them.
Visible prints in mediums such as blood, grease, dirt, or dust are equally
important to the investigator but, strictly speaking, are not latent
impressions.
A search of the crime scene should be conducted in a logical manner. Points
of entry and exit should be examined, along with surfaces or objects
disturbed or likely touched during the commission of the crime. The
examiner should wear a pair of light cloth gloves and handle an object only
insofar as is necessary and then only by edges or surfaces which are not
receptive to latent impressions. A record of the exact location of a print on
an object and of the object itself should be made, since these facts may be
of the utmost importance in any trial resulting from the investigation. No
one should handle an object other than the examiner himself.
Portable articles removed should be labeled or marked so that they may be
readily identified thereafter.
Each ridge of the fingers, palms, and soles bears a row of sweat pores
which in the average person constantly exude perspiration. Also, the ridges
of the fingers and palms are in intermittent contact with other parts of the
body, such as the hair and face, and with various objects, which may leave a
film of grease or moisture on the ridges. In touching an object, the film of
moisture and/or grease may be transferred to the object, thus leaving an
outline of the ridges of the fingers or palm thereon. This print is called a
latent impression, the word "latent" meaning hidden, that is, the print many
times is not readily visible.
Latent impressions, regardless of the area of the ridges present, are of the
greatest importance to the criminal investigator as identification of them
may solve the crime and result in successful prosecution of the subject.
Consequently, every effort should be made to preserve and identify them.
Visible prints in mediums such as blood, grease, dirt, or dust are equally
important to the investigator but, strictly speaking, are not latent
impressions.
A search of the crime scene should be conducted in a logical manner. Points
of entry and exit should be examined, along with surfaces or objects
disturbed or likely touched during the commission of the crime. The
examiner should wear a pair of light cloth gloves and handle an object only
insofar as is necessary and then only by edges or surfaces which are not
receptive to latent impressions. A record of the exact location of a print on
an object and of the object itself should be made, since these facts may be
of the utmost importance in any trial resulting from the investigation. No
one should handle an object other than the examiner himself.
Portable articles removed should be labeled or marked so that they may be
readily identified thereafter.
Page 266
The beam of a flashlight played over the surface of an object will frequently
show the location of latent impressions, although this is not an infallible test
for their presence.
Evidence should be examined as soon as feasible after its discovery.
Following the location of any latent prints at the scene of a crime, the prints
of all persons whose presence at the place under inspection has been for
legitimate purposes must be excluded from further attention. It is advisable,
therefore, during the initial stages of an investigation where latent prints are
found, to secure the inked prints of all members of the household, the
employees, and any police or other officials who may have touched the
objects on which the latent impressions were found. Inked prints taken for
this purpose are referred to as elimination prints.
Due to the fragmentary nature of most latent prints it is not possible to
derive a classification which makes a file search practicable. A latent
impression may be identified, however, by comparison with the prints of a
particular suspect.
Inked fingerprints taken for comparison with latent impressions should be
as legible and as complete as possible, including the areas not essential to
classification, since identifications are often made with these areas. Inked
palm prints taken should likewise be complete and clear and should include
impressions of the finger joints. Persons not experienced in latent print
comparisons should not attempt to evaluate latent fragments, since the area
necessary for an identification may be extremely small compared to that of
an average inked fingerprint.
Articles which are to be transported by mail or express should be so packed
that the surfaces bearing latent impressions are not in contact with other
surfaces. This may be accomplished by mounting the articles on a piece of
fiber board or plywood. The board should then be secured in a box so that
the objects will not touch or be shaken against the sides in transit. The
package should be plainly marked "Evidence," to prevent inadvertent
handling on opening. Cotton or cloth should never be placed in direct
contact with any surface bearing latent prints.
show the location of latent impressions, although this is not an infallible test
for their presence.
Evidence should be examined as soon as feasible after its discovery.
Following the location of any latent prints at the scene of a crime, the prints
of all persons whose presence at the place under inspection has been for
legitimate purposes must be excluded from further attention. It is advisable,
therefore, during the initial stages of an investigation where latent prints are
found, to secure the inked prints of all members of the household, the
employees, and any police or other officials who may have touched the
objects on which the latent impressions were found. Inked prints taken for
this purpose are referred to as elimination prints.
Due to the fragmentary nature of most latent prints it is not possible to
derive a classification which makes a file search practicable. A latent
impression may be identified, however, by comparison with the prints of a
particular suspect.
Inked fingerprints taken for comparison with latent impressions should be
as legible and as complete as possible, including the areas not essential to
classification, since identifications are often made with these areas. Inked
palm prints taken should likewise be complete and clear and should include
impressions of the finger joints. Persons not experienced in latent print
comparisons should not attempt to evaluate latent fragments, since the area
necessary for an identification may be extremely small compared to that of
an average inked fingerprint.
Articles which are to be transported by mail or express should be so packed
that the surfaces bearing latent impressions are not in contact with other
surfaces. This may be accomplished by mounting the articles on a piece of
fiber board or plywood. The board should then be secured in a box so that
the objects will not touch or be shaken against the sides in transit. The
package should be plainly marked "Evidence," to prevent inadvertent
handling on opening. Cotton or cloth should never be placed in direct
contact with any surface bearing latent prints.
Page 267
Any number of paper or cardboard specimens may be placed in a single
protective wrapper, since contact with other surfaces does not harm latents
on such objects. Lifts, negatives and photographs are readily enclosed with
letters.
An explanatory letter should accompany all evidence. If it is necessary to
pack the evidence separately, a copy of the letter should be placed in every
package so that the recipient will know immediately the import of the
contents. All items of evidence should be marked and described exactly in
the accompanying letter so that they will not be confused with packing
material of a similar nature, and to provide a check on what the package
should contain.
In addition, the letter should include for record purposes a brief outline of
the crime, i.e., type, date and place of occurrence, and names of victims and
subjects. If suspects are named for comparison, sufficient descriptive data
should be set out to permit location of their fingerprint records. This
information, in preferential order, comprises the individual's complete
name, aliases, FBI number, date of prior arrest or fingerprinting, fingerprint
classification, date and place of birth, and physical description.
Evidence is preferably forwarded by registered mail or railway express, as
these means provide records of dispatch and receipt.
Elimination or suspect fingerprints are best enclosed with the evidence
itself, with a notation as to the type of prints forwarded.
protective wrapper, since contact with other surfaces does not harm latents
on such objects. Lifts, negatives and photographs are readily enclosed with
letters.
An explanatory letter should accompany all evidence. If it is necessary to
pack the evidence separately, a copy of the letter should be placed in every
package so that the recipient will know immediately the import of the
contents. All items of evidence should be marked and described exactly in
the accompanying letter so that they will not be confused with packing
material of a similar nature, and to provide a check on what the package
should contain.
In addition, the letter should include for record purposes a brief outline of
the crime, i.e., type, date and place of occurrence, and names of victims and
subjects. If suspects are named for comparison, sufficient descriptive data
should be set out to permit location of their fingerprint records. This
information, in preferential order, comprises the individual's complete
name, aliases, FBI number, date of prior arrest or fingerprinting, fingerprint
classification, date and place of birth, and physical description.
Evidence is preferably forwarded by registered mail or railway express, as
these means provide records of dispatch and receipt.
Elimination or suspect fingerprints are best enclosed with the evidence
itself, with a notation as to the type of prints forwarded.
Page 268
CHAPTER XIII
Page 269
Powdering and Lifting Latent Impressions
The sole purpose in "developing" a latent impression is to make it visible so
that it may be preserved and compared. Various powders and chemicals are
used for this purpose. When a latent print is plainly visible, it should be
photographed before any effort is made to develop it.
No attempt should be made to brush or apply powder to prints in dust,
obviously greasy prints, or bloody prints, as this will almost surely destroy
them. Objects which have been wet or immersed in water may still bear
identifiable latent impressions. Before any examination is attempted,
however, the object must be dried.
Powder brushed lightly over a latent-bearing surface will cling to grease or
moisture in the ridges of a latent print, making it visible against the
background. Obviously, a powder should be used which will contrast with
the color of the surface. Photographic contrasts should also be considered.
A gray powder and a black powder are adequate for latent print work. Many
fingerprint powders of various colors and compositions are available from
fingerprint supply houses but none are superior to the gray and black.
A very small amount of powder is placed on the brush for application to the
surface. Once the contour of a print is visible, the brush strokes should
conform to the direction of the ridges. All excess powder should be brushed
from between the ridges. Too much powder and too little brushing are the
chief faults of beginners.
Gray powder is used on dark-colored surfaces. It is also used on mirrors and
metal surfaces which have been polished to a mirrorlike finish, since these
surfaces will photograph black with the fingerprint camera.
Black powder should be applied to white or light-colored surfaces.
The sole purpose in "developing" a latent impression is to make it visible so
that it may be preserved and compared. Various powders and chemicals are
used for this purpose. When a latent print is plainly visible, it should be
photographed before any effort is made to develop it.
No attempt should be made to brush or apply powder to prints in dust,
obviously greasy prints, or bloody prints, as this will almost surely destroy
them. Objects which have been wet or immersed in water may still bear
identifiable latent impressions. Before any examination is attempted,
however, the object must be dried.
Powder brushed lightly over a latent-bearing surface will cling to grease or
moisture in the ridges of a latent print, making it visible against the
background. Obviously, a powder should be used which will contrast with
the color of the surface. Photographic contrasts should also be considered.
A gray powder and a black powder are adequate for latent print work. Many
fingerprint powders of various colors and compositions are available from
fingerprint supply houses but none are superior to the gray and black.
A very small amount of powder is placed on the brush for application to the
surface. Once the contour of a print is visible, the brush strokes should
conform to the direction of the ridges. All excess powder should be brushed
from between the ridges. Too much powder and too little brushing are the
chief faults of beginners.
Gray powder is used on dark-colored surfaces. It is also used on mirrors and
metal surfaces which have been polished to a mirrorlike finish, since these
surfaces will photograph black with the fingerprint camera.
Black powder should be applied to white or light-colored surfaces.
Page 270
Aluminum powder affords the same contrast as the gray. Gold and red
bronze powders, although of a glittering appearance, will photograph dark
and should consequently be used on light-colored surfaces. Dragon's blood
powder is a photographically neutral powder and may be dusted on either a
light or dark surface.
On clear transparent glass, either gray or black powder may be used, it
being necessary only to use a contrasting black or white background when
photographing.
Prints should be lifted after photographing. Both rubber and transparent
tape are available for this purpose. Rubber lifting tape is procurable in black
or white 4" x 9" sheets and has the adhesive surface protected with a
celluloid cover. A black powder print should obviously be lifted on white
tape and a gray powder print on black tape.
Gold bronze and red bronze powders should be lifted on white tape,
aluminum on black. Dragon's blood may be lifted on either black or white.
After cutting a piece of tape sufficiently large to cover the entire latent
print, the celluloid covering is removed and the adhesive side applied to the
latent. The tape should be pressed evenly and firmly to the surface, taking
care not to shift its position. It is then peeled gently from the surface and the
piece of celluloid placed over the print to protect it. The operator should
handle the lift in such a manner that he will leave no prints of his own on
the adhesive surface. A small paper identification tag bearing the initials of
the operator, date, and object from which lifted should be placed under one
corner of the celluloid, or this information may be written on the back of the
lift itself if it can be done in a permanent, legible manner.
If an excessive amount of powder adheres to the latent print, a more legible
print may sometimes be obtained by lifting a second time (on a new piece
of tape, of course).
It should be noted that a print lifted on rubber tape is in a reverse position.
Consequently, in preparing a photograph of a print on such a lift, it will be
necessary to print the negative from the reverse side in order for the print to
appear in its correct position for comparison. Preparation of such
bronze powders, although of a glittering appearance, will photograph dark
and should consequently be used on light-colored surfaces. Dragon's blood
powder is a photographically neutral powder and may be dusted on either a
light or dark surface.
On clear transparent glass, either gray or black powder may be used, it
being necessary only to use a contrasting black or white background when
photographing.
Prints should be lifted after photographing. Both rubber and transparent
tape are available for this purpose. Rubber lifting tape is procurable in black
or white 4" x 9" sheets and has the adhesive surface protected with a
celluloid cover. A black powder print should obviously be lifted on white
tape and a gray powder print on black tape.
Gold bronze and red bronze powders should be lifted on white tape,
aluminum on black. Dragon's blood may be lifted on either black or white.
After cutting a piece of tape sufficiently large to cover the entire latent
print, the celluloid covering is removed and the adhesive side applied to the
latent. The tape should be pressed evenly and firmly to the surface, taking
care not to shift its position. It is then peeled gently from the surface and the
piece of celluloid placed over the print to protect it. The operator should
handle the lift in such a manner that he will leave no prints of his own on
the adhesive surface. A small paper identification tag bearing the initials of
the operator, date, and object from which lifted should be placed under one
corner of the celluloid, or this information may be written on the back of the
lift itself if it can be done in a permanent, legible manner.
If an excessive amount of powder adheres to the latent print, a more legible
print may sometimes be obtained by lifting a second time (on a new piece
of tape, of course).
It should be noted that a print lifted on rubber tape is in a reverse position.
Consequently, in preparing a photograph of a print on such a lift, it will be
necessary to print the negative from the reverse side in order for the print to
appear in its correct position for comparison. Preparation of such
Page 271
photographs should not be attempted by persons of inadequate knowledge
and experience.
Transparent tape with a durable adhesive surface is available in 1" to 2"
widths for fingerprint work. The common variety of transparent tape is not
suitable due to the deterioration (drying) of the adhesive surface. The print
on a piece of transparent tape is in correct position. Transparent lifts should
be affixed to a smooth, grainless, opaque background of a black or white
color contrasting with the powder used. Every effort should be made to
avoid air bubbles under such lifts. In no instance should a transparent lift
ever be folded back on itself or stuck to another piece of such tape as a
backing, since it is generally not possible to determine the correct position
of such a print.
Groups of latent impressions, such as those of adjacent fingers or fingers
and palms which appear to have been made simultaneously, should be lifted
as units, that is, on a single piece of tape, as this may facilitate the task of
making comparisons.
and experience.
Transparent tape with a durable adhesive surface is available in 1" to 2"
widths for fingerprint work. The common variety of transparent tape is not
suitable due to the deterioration (drying) of the adhesive surface. The print
on a piece of transparent tape is in correct position. Transparent lifts should
be affixed to a smooth, grainless, opaque background of a black or white
color contrasting with the powder used. Every effort should be made to
avoid air bubbles under such lifts. In no instance should a transparent lift
ever be folded back on itself or stuck to another piece of such tape as a
backing, since it is generally not possible to determine the correct position
of such a print.
Groups of latent impressions, such as those of adjacent fingers or fingers
and palms which appear to have been made simultaneously, should be lifted
as units, that is, on a single piece of tape, as this may facilitate the task of
making comparisons.
Page 272
CHAPTER XIV
Page 273
Chemical Development of Latent Impressions
Chemical treatment in the development of latent finger impressions on
paper, cardboard, and newly finished or unpainted wood may involve a
slightly more complicated technique than that in which powders are
utilized, but the results justify the additional effort.
It is very strongly recommended that powders not be applied to articles of
the above types. This recommendation is made for several reasons. First,
powders cannot be removed from paper and possibly may interfere with
some types of document examinations. In this connection, they are likely to
prevent restoration of the specimen to a legible condition. Powders will not
develop as many latent impressions as chemicals on paper or cardboard. In
some cases they will obscure latent impressions subsequently developed
chemically.
Neither scientific training nor complete knowledge of the chemical
processes involved is necessary for one to become proficient in the use of
chemical developers, two of which will be discussed more fully. These two,
iodine and silver nitrate, are the most commonly used, inasmuch as they are
relatively inexpensive, readily procurable, effective, and easy to apply.
All specimens which are treated should be handled with tweezers or gloves.
When iodine crystals are subjected to a slight amount of heat they vaporize
rapidly, producing violet fumes. These fumes are absorbed by fatty or oily
matter with which they come in contact. If the specimen treated bears latent
impressions which contain oil or fat, the print is developed or made visible
by the absorption of the iodine fumes and the ridges of the print appear
yellowish-brown against the background.
Iodine prints are not permanent and begin to fade once the fuming is
stopped. It is necessary, therefore, for the operator to have a camera ready to
photograph the prints immediately.
Chemical treatment in the development of latent finger impressions on
paper, cardboard, and newly finished or unpainted wood may involve a
slightly more complicated technique than that in which powders are
utilized, but the results justify the additional effort.
It is very strongly recommended that powders not be applied to articles of
the above types. This recommendation is made for several reasons. First,
powders cannot be removed from paper and possibly may interfere with
some types of document examinations. In this connection, they are likely to
prevent restoration of the specimen to a legible condition. Powders will not
develop as many latent impressions as chemicals on paper or cardboard. In
some cases they will obscure latent impressions subsequently developed
chemically.
Neither scientific training nor complete knowledge of the chemical
processes involved is necessary for one to become proficient in the use of
chemical developers, two of which will be discussed more fully. These two,
iodine and silver nitrate, are the most commonly used, inasmuch as they are
relatively inexpensive, readily procurable, effective, and easy to apply.
All specimens which are treated should be handled with tweezers or gloves.
When iodine crystals are subjected to a slight amount of heat they vaporize
rapidly, producing violet fumes. These fumes are absorbed by fatty or oily
matter with which they come in contact. If the specimen treated bears latent
impressions which contain oil or fat, the print is developed or made visible
by the absorption of the iodine fumes and the ridges of the print appear
yellowish-brown against the background.
Iodine prints are not permanent and begin to fade once the fuming is
stopped. It is necessary, therefore, for the operator to have a camera ready to
photograph the prints immediately.
Page 274
Control of the fumes is achieved by using the crystals in an iodine gun or
fuming cabinet. The iodine gun may be assembled by the individual
examiner, by a druggist, or it may be purchased through a fingerprint supply
house.
Material for making the iodine gun, as well as iodine crystals, may be
procured from a chemical supply house or through a druggist. The gun itself
consists essentially of two parts. One tube (the end of the gun through
which the breath is blown) contains a drying agent such as calcium
chloride, to remove moisture from the breath. Without this, the moisture
from the breath and saliva would condense at the end of the gun, drip onto
the specimen and cause stains which might prove indelible. The second tube
contains a small amount of iodine crystals which are vaporized by the heat
of the breath, augmented by the warmth of the hand cupped around the tube
containing the iodine. This vapor is blown onto the specimen (fig. 420).
Glass wool serves to hold the calcium chloride and iodine in place.
[Fig. 420]
Due to the amount of physical exertion involved, the gun is generally
limited to the examination of a few small specimens. Where a large number
fuming cabinet. The iodine gun may be assembled by the individual
examiner, by a druggist, or it may be purchased through a fingerprint supply
house.
Material for making the iodine gun, as well as iodine crystals, may be
procured from a chemical supply house or through a druggist. The gun itself
consists essentially of two parts. One tube (the end of the gun through
which the breath is blown) contains a drying agent such as calcium
chloride, to remove moisture from the breath. Without this, the moisture
from the breath and saliva would condense at the end of the gun, drip onto
the specimen and cause stains which might prove indelible. The second tube
contains a small amount of iodine crystals which are vaporized by the heat
of the breath, augmented by the warmth of the hand cupped around the tube
containing the iodine. This vapor is blown onto the specimen (fig. 420).
Glass wool serves to hold the calcium chloride and iodine in place.
[Fig. 420]
Due to the amount of physical exertion involved, the gun is generally
limited to the examination of a few small specimens. Where a large number
Page 275
of specimens are to be treated, the fuming cabinet, a box-shaped wooden
receptacle with a glass front and top permitting the operator to control the
amount of fumes in the cabinet and observe the development of the latent
impressions, is used (fig. 421). The fumes are generated by placing a small
alcohol burner under an evaporating dish containing the iodine crystals.
This is set in a hole cut in the bottom of the cabinet. As soon as the fumes
begin to appear in sufficient amounts, the burner is removed. The
specimens may be hung in the cabinet by wooden clothes pins fastened to a
removable stick which is supported by wooden strips affixed near the top
edges of the cabinet. The top of the cabinet is removable to permit access.
Diagrams for the construction of the iodine gun or fuming cabinet will be
furnished on request to members of the law enforcement profession.
[Fig. 421]
receptacle with a glass front and top permitting the operator to control the
amount of fumes in the cabinet and observe the development of the latent
impressions, is used (fig. 421). The fumes are generated by placing a small
alcohol burner under an evaporating dish containing the iodine crystals.
This is set in a hole cut in the bottom of the cabinet. As soon as the fumes
begin to appear in sufficient amounts, the burner is removed. The
specimens may be hung in the cabinet by wooden clothes pins fastened to a
removable stick which is supported by wooden strips affixed near the top
edges of the cabinet. The top of the cabinet is removable to permit access.
Diagrams for the construction of the iodine gun or fuming cabinet will be
furnished on request to members of the law enforcement profession.
[Fig. 421]
Page 276
Many specimens bear small, greasy areas which, in addition to any latent
impressions of a greasy nature, will also appear yellowish-brown after
exposure to iodine fumes. All these stains will eventually disappear if the
specimen is placed in a current of air from a fan or vent. All latent
impressions on an object will not be developed by the iodine process but
only those containing fat or oil. Due to this fact and the fact that iodine
evaporates from the surface, it is used prior to (it cannot be used afterward),
and in conjunction with, the silver nitrate process.
No ill effects have been noted from contact with small amounts of iodine
vapor but prolonged or excessive contact will produce irritation of the skin
and respiratory passages. To prevent gradual loss of the chemical through
evaporation and the corrosion of surrounding metal surfaces, iodine crystals
should be kept in an airtight container when not being used.
The development of latent impressions with silver nitrate is dependent on
the fact that the sodium chloride (the same substance as common table salt)
present in the perspiration which forms the ridges in most latent
impressions reacts with the silver nitrate solution to form silver chloride.
Silver chloride is white but is unstable on exposure to light and breaks
down into its components, silver and chlorine. The ridges of the fingerprints
developed in this manner appear reddish-brown against the background.
Immersion in the silver nitrate solution will wash traces of fat and oil from
the paper; consequently, it is necessary to fume the specimen for latents of
such a nature prior to treatment with silver nitrate.
Once the requisite equipment is assembled, the steps in the process are
these:
Dip the specimen in the solution, blot and dry it, expose to light, and
photograph latents when contrast is good.
Chemically standardized solutions are not required for the successful
application of this process. It has been determined through long practice
that a 3-percent solution of silver nitrate is adequate for the purpose,
although concentrations up to 10 percent are sometimes used. A solution of
approximately 3 percent may be prepared by dissolving 4 ounces of silver
nitrate in 1 gallon of distilled water. Smaller quantities of 3-percent solution
are made by using the components in the same proportion. For instance, one
impressions of a greasy nature, will also appear yellowish-brown after
exposure to iodine fumes. All these stains will eventually disappear if the
specimen is placed in a current of air from a fan or vent. All latent
impressions on an object will not be developed by the iodine process but
only those containing fat or oil. Due to this fact and the fact that iodine
evaporates from the surface, it is used prior to (it cannot be used afterward),
and in conjunction with, the silver nitrate process.
No ill effects have been noted from contact with small amounts of iodine
vapor but prolonged or excessive contact will produce irritation of the skin
and respiratory passages. To prevent gradual loss of the chemical through
evaporation and the corrosion of surrounding metal surfaces, iodine crystals
should be kept in an airtight container when not being used.
The development of latent impressions with silver nitrate is dependent on
the fact that the sodium chloride (the same substance as common table salt)
present in the perspiration which forms the ridges in most latent
impressions reacts with the silver nitrate solution to form silver chloride.
Silver chloride is white but is unstable on exposure to light and breaks
down into its components, silver and chlorine. The ridges of the fingerprints
developed in this manner appear reddish-brown against the background.
Immersion in the silver nitrate solution will wash traces of fat and oil from
the paper; consequently, it is necessary to fume the specimen for latents of
such a nature prior to treatment with silver nitrate.
Once the requisite equipment is assembled, the steps in the process are
these:
Dip the specimen in the solution, blot and dry it, expose to light, and
photograph latents when contrast is good.
Chemically standardized solutions are not required for the successful
application of this process. It has been determined through long practice
that a 3-percent solution of silver nitrate is adequate for the purpose,
although concentrations up to 10 percent are sometimes used. A solution of
approximately 3 percent may be prepared by dissolving 4 ounces of silver
nitrate in 1 gallon of distilled water. Smaller quantities of 3-percent solution
are made by using the components in the same proportion. For instance, one
Page 277
quart of water will require 1 ounce of the crystals. For a 10-percent
solution, use 13-1/3 ounces of crystals per gallon.
An alcohol solution may be preferred. This is prepared by mixing 4 ounces
of silver nitrate crystals, 4 ounces of distilled water, and 1 gallon of grain
alcohol, 190 proof. The alcoholic solution dries faster, and when treating
paper bearing writing in ink, it is less likely to cause the ink to run. On the
other hand, the alcoholic solution is much more expensive and there is some
loss by evaporation while in use.
The solutions may be used several times before losing their strength and
when not in use should be kept in brown bottles in cupboards to retard
deterioration. If the strength of the solution is doubtful, the operator should
attempt to develop test latent impressions before proceeding on evidence.
Silver nitrate crystals and distilled water in small amounts are obtainable
from druggists or in large amounts from chemical supply houses. Dealers in
distilled water are located in many communities.
Tap water should not be used in the preparation of the solution because it
generally contains chemicals which will partially neutralize the silver
nitrate.
It is suggested that the solution be placed in a glass or enamelware tray
approximately 18 by 12 by 5 inches for use, a size used in photographic
development. Treatment with this solution is called "silvering." The
specimen is immersed in the solution so that the surfaces are completely
moistened, then taken out, placed between blotters to remove the excess
solution, and dried. The drying is readily accomplished with an electric hair
dryer. Blotters may be dried and used several times before discarding. It is
not necessary to work in a dark room. Work in an illuminated room but not
in direct sunlight. Soaking the specimen in the solution does not aid
development and is actually undesirable as it requires a longer drying time.
The specimen should be reasonably dry before exposing to the light,
otherwise the latent prints may be developed while the paper is still wet,
thus necessitating drying in subdued light to prevent darkening.
Development of the latent impressions occurs rapidly when the specimen is
exposed to a blue or violet light source. A 1,000-watt blue or daylight
solution, use 13-1/3 ounces of crystals per gallon.
An alcohol solution may be preferred. This is prepared by mixing 4 ounces
of silver nitrate crystals, 4 ounces of distilled water, and 1 gallon of grain
alcohol, 190 proof. The alcoholic solution dries faster, and when treating
paper bearing writing in ink, it is less likely to cause the ink to run. On the
other hand, the alcoholic solution is much more expensive and there is some
loss by evaporation while in use.
The solutions may be used several times before losing their strength and
when not in use should be kept in brown bottles in cupboards to retard
deterioration. If the strength of the solution is doubtful, the operator should
attempt to develop test latent impressions before proceeding on evidence.
Silver nitrate crystals and distilled water in small amounts are obtainable
from druggists or in large amounts from chemical supply houses. Dealers in
distilled water are located in many communities.
Tap water should not be used in the preparation of the solution because it
generally contains chemicals which will partially neutralize the silver
nitrate.
It is suggested that the solution be placed in a glass or enamelware tray
approximately 18 by 12 by 5 inches for use, a size used in photographic
development. Treatment with this solution is called "silvering." The
specimen is immersed in the solution so that the surfaces are completely
moistened, then taken out, placed between blotters to remove the excess
solution, and dried. The drying is readily accomplished with an electric hair
dryer. Blotters may be dried and used several times before discarding. It is
not necessary to work in a dark room. Work in an illuminated room but not
in direct sunlight. Soaking the specimen in the solution does not aid
development and is actually undesirable as it requires a longer drying time.
The specimen should be reasonably dry before exposing to the light,
otherwise the latent prints may be developed while the paper is still wet,
thus necessitating drying in subdued light to prevent darkening.
Development of the latent impressions occurs rapidly when the specimen is
exposed to a blue or violet light source. A 1,000-watt blue or daylight
Page 278
photographer's lamp, a mercury arc (most ultraviolet lamps are of this type),
or carbon arc is excellent for the purpose (fig. 422). If a weaker light is
used, a stronger mixture of the solution should be prepared. For instance, if
a 300-watt bulb is used, the 10-percent solution would be preferable. Direct
sunlight will cause the latent impressions to appear very rapidly and if
several specimens are exposed at once it is not possible for a single operator
to properly control the development. Sunlight coming through a window
pane will serve for development. Where fingerprints containing sodium
chloride (normally exuded from the sweat pores in the ridges) have been
deposited, the silver chloride formed will darken against the background.
[Fig. 422]
As soon as the ridge detail of the prints is clearly visible, the paper should
be removed from the light. Continued exposure will darken the paper and
the contrast will be lost.
Paper so treated should be kept in darkness; that is, in a heavy envelope or
drawer until ready to photograph.
or carbon arc is excellent for the purpose (fig. 422). If a weaker light is
used, a stronger mixture of the solution should be prepared. For instance, if
a 300-watt bulb is used, the 10-percent solution would be preferable. Direct
sunlight will cause the latent impressions to appear very rapidly and if
several specimens are exposed at once it is not possible for a single operator
to properly control the development. Sunlight coming through a window
pane will serve for development. Where fingerprints containing sodium
chloride (normally exuded from the sweat pores in the ridges) have been
deposited, the silver chloride formed will darken against the background.
[Fig. 422]
As soon as the ridge detail of the prints is clearly visible, the paper should
be removed from the light. Continued exposure will darken the paper and
the contrast will be lost.
Paper so treated should be kept in darkness; that is, in a heavy envelope or
drawer until ready to photograph.
Page 279
Immediate photographing, as in the case of iodine prints, is not always
essential, since the prints are permanent and become illegible only through
eventual clouding of the background. Prompt photographing is
recommended, however, as, in exceptional instances, silver-nitrate prints
have become illegible in a matter of hours. Darkening ordinarily will occur
slowly if the paper is preserved in absolute darkness, and silver-nitrate
prints so preserved more than 10 years have been observed to be quite clear.
Items such as cardboard cartons, newspapers, road maps, large pieces of
wrapping paper, or smooth, unpainted wood surfaces, too large for dipping,
may be treated by brushing the solution over the surface with a paint brush
(fig. 423). Brushing does not damage or destroy latent impressions on
surfaces of this type. Cardboard boxes may be slit down the edges and
flattened out to permit easy placement under the light.
[Fig. 423]
Wet paper should be handled with extreme care to prevent tearing. In
treating very thin types of paper the solution is best applied with a cotton
essential, since the prints are permanent and become illegible only through
eventual clouding of the background. Prompt photographing is
recommended, however, as, in exceptional instances, silver-nitrate prints
have become illegible in a matter of hours. Darkening ordinarily will occur
slowly if the paper is preserved in absolute darkness, and silver-nitrate
prints so preserved more than 10 years have been observed to be quite clear.
Items such as cardboard cartons, newspapers, road maps, large pieces of
wrapping paper, or smooth, unpainted wood surfaces, too large for dipping,
may be treated by brushing the solution over the surface with a paint brush
(fig. 423). Brushing does not damage or destroy latent impressions on
surfaces of this type. Cardboard boxes may be slit down the edges and
flattened out to permit easy placement under the light.
[Fig. 423]
Wet paper should be handled with extreme care to prevent tearing. In
treating very thin types of paper the solution is best applied with a cotton
Page 280
swab or brush.
Photographs, Photostats, and blueprints of any value should not be treated
with silver nitrate, since the developed prints or stains cannot be removed
without destroying them.
In working with silver nitrate, wear rubber gloves or handle all specimens
with tweezers; avoid spilling it on clothing. It will cause dark brown stains
on clothing, skin, and fingernails. Such stains are not easily removed. Areas
of the skin subjected to prolonged contact are deadened, will turn black and
peel.
If removal of silver nitrate prints (called "de-silvering") is desired, this may
be accomplished by placing the specimen in a 2-percent solution of
mercuric nitrate in a tray similar to that used for the silver nitrate.
To prepare a small amount of this solution, dissolve two-thirds of an ounce
of mercuric nitrate crystals in 1 quart of distilled water and add one-third of
a fluid ounce of nitric acid. Shake well. This solution, too, may be used
several times before losing its strength and is not necessarily discarded after
each use. It is not necessary to keep it in a dark bottle.
The specimen bearing silver nitrate prints is immersed in this solution until
all traces of the prints disappear. It should then be rinsed thoroughly in
water to remove all mercuric nitrate. If this is not done the paper
deteriorates, becoming brittle and crumbly. A tray of distilled water may be
used for rinsing or a tray of ordinary tap water changed several times during
the rinsing. The specimen is then laid out flat to dry.
Wrinkles, such as are left in paper after ordinary drying, may be prevented
by ironing with a moderately hot iron. An electric iron with a temperature
control is desirable. If kept too hot it will scorch or wrinkle the paper
somewhat. The bottom of the iron should be clean so that unremovable
smudges will not be left on the paper.
No ill effects have been noted from working in the 2-percent mercuric
nitrate solution with bare hands for very short periods, but it is a caustic
solution and it is suggested that the specimens be handled with tweezers or
that rubber gloves be worn if contact is prolonged.
Photographs, Photostats, and blueprints of any value should not be treated
with silver nitrate, since the developed prints or stains cannot be removed
without destroying them.
In working with silver nitrate, wear rubber gloves or handle all specimens
with tweezers; avoid spilling it on clothing. It will cause dark brown stains
on clothing, skin, and fingernails. Such stains are not easily removed. Areas
of the skin subjected to prolonged contact are deadened, will turn black and
peel.
If removal of silver nitrate prints (called "de-silvering") is desired, this may
be accomplished by placing the specimen in a 2-percent solution of
mercuric nitrate in a tray similar to that used for the silver nitrate.
To prepare a small amount of this solution, dissolve two-thirds of an ounce
of mercuric nitrate crystals in 1 quart of distilled water and add one-third of
a fluid ounce of nitric acid. Shake well. This solution, too, may be used
several times before losing its strength and is not necessarily discarded after
each use. It is not necessary to keep it in a dark bottle.
The specimen bearing silver nitrate prints is immersed in this solution until
all traces of the prints disappear. It should then be rinsed thoroughly in
water to remove all mercuric nitrate. If this is not done the paper
deteriorates, becoming brittle and crumbly. A tray of distilled water may be
used for rinsing or a tray of ordinary tap water changed several times during
the rinsing. The specimen is then laid out flat to dry.
Wrinkles, such as are left in paper after ordinary drying, may be prevented
by ironing with a moderately hot iron. An electric iron with a temperature
control is desirable. If kept too hot it will scorch or wrinkle the paper
somewhat. The bottom of the iron should be clean so that unremovable
smudges will not be left on the paper.
No ill effects have been noted from working in the 2-percent mercuric
nitrate solution with bare hands for very short periods, but it is a caustic
solution and it is suggested that the specimens be handled with tweezers or
that rubber gloves be worn if contact is prolonged.
Page 281
Page 282
CHAPTER XV
Page 283
The Use of the Fingerprint Camera
If a fingerprint is visible, an effort should be made to photograph it before
any attempt is made to develop it. In every case a print developed with
powder should be photographed before lifting. It sometimes happens that
the print does not lift properly although it may be quite clear after
development.
The camera which is especially adapted to the purpose and which is easiest
to handle and operate is the fingerprint camera, one type of which is shown
in figure 424. This camera has several advantages in photographing
fingerprints:
It photographs the prints in natural size.
It contains its own light source.
It has a fixed focus.
[Fig. 424]
If a fingerprint is visible, an effort should be made to photograph it before
any attempt is made to develop it. In every case a print developed with
powder should be photographed before lifting. It sometimes happens that
the print does not lift properly although it may be quite clear after
development.
The camera which is especially adapted to the purpose and which is easiest
to handle and operate is the fingerprint camera, one type of which is shown
in figure 424. This camera has several advantages in photographing
fingerprints:
It photographs the prints in natural size.
It contains its own light source.
It has a fixed focus.
[Fig. 424]
Page 284
Cameras of this type are available in models operated by batteries and 110-
volt current. It is believed that the battery-operated type has the greater
utility, since house current may not be available at the crime scene. When
not in use the batteries should be removed as they will eventually
deteriorate and corrode the brass contacts in the camera.
The camera is of the box type and has three button controls which will
open: (1) The metal flap covering the aperture, (2) the front portion of the
frame providing access to the self-contained light bulbs, and (3) the camera
in half, providing access to the batteries and the shutter as shown below in
figure 425.
[Fig. 425]
A 2-1/4 x 3-1/4 film pack adapter or a 2-1/4 x 3-1/4 cut film holder holds
the film in the camera. The film pack adapter will hold a pack of 12 sheets
of film, and accordingly, will permit the taking of 12 pictures. The cut film
holder is a unit which holds two sheets of film utilizing each side of the
holder.
It is pointed out that the FBI uses the film pack exclusively in view of the
fact that practically all latent examinations will necessitate the taking of
more than two pictures. Further, the film pack is made so that it may be
volt current. It is believed that the battery-operated type has the greater
utility, since house current may not be available at the crime scene. When
not in use the batteries should be removed as they will eventually
deteriorate and corrode the brass contacts in the camera.
The camera is of the box type and has three button controls which will
open: (1) The metal flap covering the aperture, (2) the front portion of the
frame providing access to the self-contained light bulbs, and (3) the camera
in half, providing access to the batteries and the shutter as shown below in
figure 425.
[Fig. 425]
A 2-1/4 x 3-1/4 film pack adapter or a 2-1/4 x 3-1/4 cut film holder holds
the film in the camera. The film pack adapter will hold a pack of 12 sheets
of film, and accordingly, will permit the taking of 12 pictures. The cut film
holder is a unit which holds two sheets of film utilizing each side of the
holder.
It is pointed out that the FBI uses the film pack exclusively in view of the
fact that practically all latent examinations will necessitate the taking of
more than two pictures. Further, the film pack is made so that it may be
Page 285
loaded into the adapter in the open light. Also, the films are numbered 1
through 12, which is a valuable feature in that in maintaining notes
concerning the latent examinations it is a simple matter to note by the
number of the negative where the latent impression was developed and
photographed. Should it happen that during a latent examination all twelve
of the films are not used, the film pack, with the slide in place, is taken into
the darkroom and only those films which have been exposed are removed
and developed. The unexposed films remain in the film pack adapter with
the slide in and may be used later.
As was previously mentioned, the camera has a fixed focus; that is, the
camera will take a legible picture only when the latent print is at the focal
point, or exactly flush with the opening of the camera. The latent print must
not be inside the open end of the camera, nor must it be beyond; otherwise,
the picture will be blurred.
Since the camera has its own light source, any leakage of outside light will
cause overexposure of the film. Consequently, if the surface of the object
bearing the latent print which is to be photographed is uneven or does not
cover the entire front of the camera opening, it will be necessary to use
some opaque material such as a focusing cloth or heavy dark material to
cover the front of the camera so as to exclude all outside light (fig. 426). If
a latent print on a pane of glass or an automobile window is being
photographed, it will be necessary to back up the latent so that there will be
no light leakage. Material showing a pattern or grain should not be used for
this purpose as any such pattern will photograph in the background and
possibly obliterate the ridges of the latent print.
through 12, which is a valuable feature in that in maintaining notes
concerning the latent examinations it is a simple matter to note by the
number of the negative where the latent impression was developed and
photographed. Should it happen that during a latent examination all twelve
of the films are not used, the film pack, with the slide in place, is taken into
the darkroom and only those films which have been exposed are removed
and developed. The unexposed films remain in the film pack adapter with
the slide in and may be used later.
As was previously mentioned, the camera has a fixed focus; that is, the
camera will take a legible picture only when the latent print is at the focal
point, or exactly flush with the opening of the camera. The latent print must
not be inside the open end of the camera, nor must it be beyond; otherwise,
the picture will be blurred.
Since the camera has its own light source, any leakage of outside light will
cause overexposure of the film. Consequently, if the surface of the object
bearing the latent print which is to be photographed is uneven or does not
cover the entire front of the camera opening, it will be necessary to use
some opaque material such as a focusing cloth or heavy dark material to
cover the front of the camera so as to exclude all outside light (fig. 426). If
a latent print on a pane of glass or an automobile window is being
photographed, it will be necessary to back up the latent so that there will be
no light leakage. Material showing a pattern or grain should not be used for
this purpose as any such pattern will photograph in the background and
possibly obliterate the ridges of the latent print.
Page 286
[Fig. 426]
To insure an equal distribution of the light over the latents being
photographed, the impressions should be centered in the opening of the
camera. This is accomplished by opening the angular front section of the
camera after the metal plate covering the front has been opened, and setting
the aperture over the latent impressions so that they will be as near the
center as possible. Then, holding the camera firmly in place, it is carefully
closed (fig. 427).
To insure an equal distribution of the light over the latents being
photographed, the impressions should be centered in the opening of the
camera. This is accomplished by opening the angular front section of the
camera after the metal plate covering the front has been opened, and setting
the aperture over the latent impressions so that they will be as near the
center as possible. Then, holding the camera firmly in place, it is carefully
closed (fig. 427).
Page 287
[Fig. 427]
During exposure the camera must be held perfectly still. Any movement of
the camera or object will result in a fuzzy or double image.
In photographing a small, movable object such as a bottle or tumbler, the
camera should not be placed on its end and an attempt made to balance the
object across the opening. Instead, the camera should be placed on its side
and the bottle or tumbler built up to the opening so that there is no necessity
for holding the object (fig. 428). There will be, of course, instances where
the camera will have to be held, such as to the side of a wall, cabinet or
automobile. Here an extreme effort should be made to avoid moving the
camera or permitting it to slip during exposure.
During exposure the camera must be held perfectly still. Any movement of
the camera or object will result in a fuzzy or double image.
In photographing a small, movable object such as a bottle or tumbler, the
camera should not be placed on its end and an attempt made to balance the
object across the opening. Instead, the camera should be placed on its side
and the bottle or tumbler built up to the opening so that there is no necessity
for holding the object (fig. 428). There will be, of course, instances where
the camera will have to be held, such as to the side of a wall, cabinet or
automobile. Here an extreme effort should be made to avoid moving the
camera or permitting it to slip during exposure.
Page 288
[Fig. 428]
Anticipating the possible use of the photographic negatives in a court
proceeding, it becomes of paramount importance to be able to identify
them. This is done by using what is called an identification tag. The tag
consists of a small piece of paper bearing the date, initials of the examiner,
and possibly a case number, and it should be hand-written. The tag is placed
near the latent prints being photographed so that it will appear in the
picture. It should be borne in mind that concentration should be on the
latent impressions, which must be centered, and the identification tag
should be to one side and not covering any of the latent prints. Another
method of identification, if the surface permits, is to write the above-
mentioned data on the surface of the object bearing the latents so that the
information set out will also be a part of the picture. Too much emphasis
cannot be placed on the importance of the identification tag. The lack of
such data, by discretion of the court, may exclude the latents as evidence, in
the absence of the original specimen bearing the latents.
The following are suggested exposure times for Tri-X film (available in 2-
1/4" x 3-1/4" film packs) with battery-operated cameras having lenses
without diaphragms:
Black powder print on white or light background—snapshot
Gray or white powder print on black or dark background—1 second
Anticipating the possible use of the photographic negatives in a court
proceeding, it becomes of paramount importance to be able to identify
them. This is done by using what is called an identification tag. The tag
consists of a small piece of paper bearing the date, initials of the examiner,
and possibly a case number, and it should be hand-written. The tag is placed
near the latent prints being photographed so that it will appear in the
picture. It should be borne in mind that concentration should be on the
latent impressions, which must be centered, and the identification tag
should be to one side and not covering any of the latent prints. Another
method of identification, if the surface permits, is to write the above-
mentioned data on the surface of the object bearing the latents so that the
information set out will also be a part of the picture. Too much emphasis
cannot be placed on the importance of the identification tag. The lack of
such data, by discretion of the court, may exclude the latents as evidence, in
the absence of the original specimen bearing the latents.
The following are suggested exposure times for Tri-X film (available in 2-
1/4" x 3-1/4" film packs) with battery-operated cameras having lenses
without diaphragms:
Black powder print on white or light background—snapshot
Gray or white powder print on black or dark background—1 second
Page 289
These same exposure times can be used on some cameras having lenses
with diaphragms, provided the lens opening is set at f6.3.
The above exposure times are for cameras with batteries in average
condition. If batteries become weak the exposures may be increased
slightly.
In making snapshots the shutter mechanism should be manipulated as
rapidly as possible since slow motion will appreciably lengthen the
exposure. In making time exposures the camera shutter must be held open
for the desired time. Personnel with photographic experience may desire to
use cut film with the fingerprint camera. A few tests will determine the
optimum exposure times for any particular type of film.
Briefly, the procedure for taking photographs of latents is as follows: The
film pack is placed into the film pack adapter with the safety paper side of
the film pack to the slide side of the adapter, care being taken to see that all
of the paper tabs are outside of the adapter. The adapter is placed on the
camera in its proper position by opening a slide clamp attached to the
camera, fitting the side of the adapter into the slot away from the clamp and
pushing it down flat into the opening. Don't try to slide the adapter into the
opening from the top. The adapter is locked in position by closing the
clamp. Next the slide is removed and the tab marked "Safety Cover" pulled
out as far as it will come and torn off. The camera is placed in position and
the first exposure made; then the tab marked "1" is pulled and the next film
is in position for exposure. This procedure is followed with each succeeding
film until all have been exposed.
When the last tab has been pulled out, the pack can be removed from the
adapter in daylight. If all of the films have not been exposed the slide is
replaced into the adapter and the film pack removed from it in a darkroom,
as previously stated.
As a matter of regular policy, it is recommended that more than one
exposure be made of each latent, varying the normal exposure time to
insure satisfactory results, especially when the contrast is not a good black
on white or gray on black.
Before starting to photograph, note the following:
with diaphragms, provided the lens opening is set at f6.3.
The above exposure times are for cameras with batteries in average
condition. If batteries become weak the exposures may be increased
slightly.
In making snapshots the shutter mechanism should be manipulated as
rapidly as possible since slow motion will appreciably lengthen the
exposure. In making time exposures the camera shutter must be held open
for the desired time. Personnel with photographic experience may desire to
use cut film with the fingerprint camera. A few tests will determine the
optimum exposure times for any particular type of film.
Briefly, the procedure for taking photographs of latents is as follows: The
film pack is placed into the film pack adapter with the safety paper side of
the film pack to the slide side of the adapter, care being taken to see that all
of the paper tabs are outside of the adapter. The adapter is placed on the
camera in its proper position by opening a slide clamp attached to the
camera, fitting the side of the adapter into the slot away from the clamp and
pushing it down flat into the opening. Don't try to slide the adapter into the
opening from the top. The adapter is locked in position by closing the
clamp. Next the slide is removed and the tab marked "Safety Cover" pulled
out as far as it will come and torn off. The camera is placed in position and
the first exposure made; then the tab marked "1" is pulled and the next film
is in position for exposure. This procedure is followed with each succeeding
film until all have been exposed.
When the last tab has been pulled out, the pack can be removed from the
adapter in daylight. If all of the films have not been exposed the slide is
replaced into the adapter and the film pack removed from it in a darkroom,
as previously stated.
As a matter of regular policy, it is recommended that more than one
exposure be made of each latent, varying the normal exposure time to
insure satisfactory results, especially when the contrast is not a good black
on white or gray on black.
Before starting to photograph, note the following:
Page 290
● Check shutter action.
● Check bulbs, batteries, and lights.
● Center latents in opening of camera.
● Latent being photographed must be flush with opening of camera.
● Outside light must be excluded.
● Include identification tag in photograph.
● Remove slide and pull safety tab of film pack before making exposure.
● Hold camera still while making exposure.
● Pull correct number tab after each exposure (be careful not to pull more
than one).
● Do not use grained or uneven material as a backing when photographing
latents on transparent glass.
● Mirrors, polished chrome, and nickel plate will photograph black in the
fingerprint camera.
The foregoing has dealt with the standard use of the fingerprint camera
when the direct light afforded by the camera gives suitable results. There
will be cases, however, where the results from the use of the direct light
may not be adequate. Such cases may involve molded or embedded prints,
such as prints in putty, wax, soap, etc. Should direct light give poor results,
side lighting may prove effective. This can be done by loosening two of the
bulbs on one side so that they will not light. The light given by the other
two bulbs is directed so as to pass at right angles, as much as possible,
across the ridges of the embedded latent print. Adjustment of the exposure
time must be made when this is done.
● Check bulbs, batteries, and lights.
● Center latents in opening of camera.
● Latent being photographed must be flush with opening of camera.
● Outside light must be excluded.
● Include identification tag in photograph.
● Remove slide and pull safety tab of film pack before making exposure.
● Hold camera still while making exposure.
● Pull correct number tab after each exposure (be careful not to pull more
than one).
● Do not use grained or uneven material as a backing when photographing
latents on transparent glass.
● Mirrors, polished chrome, and nickel plate will photograph black in the
fingerprint camera.
The foregoing has dealt with the standard use of the fingerprint camera
when the direct light afforded by the camera gives suitable results. There
will be cases, however, where the results from the use of the direct light
may not be adequate. Such cases may involve molded or embedded prints,
such as prints in putty, wax, soap, etc. Should direct light give poor results,
side lighting may prove effective. This can be done by loosening two of the
bulbs on one side so that they will not light. The light given by the other
two bulbs is directed so as to pass at right angles, as much as possible,
across the ridges of the embedded latent print. Adjustment of the exposure
time must be made when this is done.
Page 291
CHAPTER XVI
Page 292
Preparation of Fingerprint Charts for Court
Testimony
In testifying to fingerprint identification, the expert often prepares charts to
visually aid the court and jury in understanding the nature of his testimony.
Many times it is undoubtedly difficult for the layman to perceive, from a
vocal explanation alone, the full import of an expert's testimony, due to its
technical nature; consequently, some graphic representation of the facts
presented is amply justified and rewarded. The preparation of the charts is
ultimately the sole responsibility of the expert using them. As a matter of
interest to law enforcement personnel engaged in fingerprint work, a brief
explanation of the preparation of such charts follows, along with
suggestions and remarks based on long experience in these matters.
To do the work conveniently, it will be necessary to have available, in
addition to the ordinary photographic developing and printing materials, a
projection enlarger which will enlarge preferably to at least ten diameters.
In the projection method of enlargement, the image is printed directly from
the original negative, and the preparation of an enlarged negative is
unnecessary.
Aside from the photographic equipment, the needed materials are: a roll of
scotch photographic tape 1 inch wide to outline the areas of the fingerprints
on the negatives to be used; some stiff cardboard approximately 1/32 inch
thick on which to mount the prepared charts; a tube of rubber cement; and a
bottle of translucent ink, other than black or white.
A light-box on which to view the negatives while blocking, and a lettering
set to draw the lines and numbers uniformly on the charts, while not
absolutely essential, are helpful conveniences. A light-box is basically a
frosted pane of glass with a light beneath it to produce soft, even, non-
glaring illumination. If no light-box is available, a clear window may be
utilized in "blocking" the negatives.
Testimony
In testifying to fingerprint identification, the expert often prepares charts to
visually aid the court and jury in understanding the nature of his testimony.
Many times it is undoubtedly difficult for the layman to perceive, from a
vocal explanation alone, the full import of an expert's testimony, due to its
technical nature; consequently, some graphic representation of the facts
presented is amply justified and rewarded. The preparation of the charts is
ultimately the sole responsibility of the expert using them. As a matter of
interest to law enforcement personnel engaged in fingerprint work, a brief
explanation of the preparation of such charts follows, along with
suggestions and remarks based on long experience in these matters.
To do the work conveniently, it will be necessary to have available, in
addition to the ordinary photographic developing and printing materials, a
projection enlarger which will enlarge preferably to at least ten diameters.
In the projection method of enlargement, the image is printed directly from
the original negative, and the preparation of an enlarged negative is
unnecessary.
Aside from the photographic equipment, the needed materials are: a roll of
scotch photographic tape 1 inch wide to outline the areas of the fingerprints
on the negatives to be used; some stiff cardboard approximately 1/32 inch
thick on which to mount the prepared charts; a tube of rubber cement; and a
bottle of translucent ink, other than black or white.
A light-box on which to view the negatives while blocking, and a lettering
set to draw the lines and numbers uniformly on the charts, while not
absolutely essential, are helpful conveniences. A light-box is basically a
frosted pane of glass with a light beneath it to produce soft, even, non-
glaring illumination. If no light-box is available, a clear window may be
utilized in "blocking" the negatives.
Page 293
If the expert finds it necessary to have an outside source prepare his
photographs, he should retain personal custody of the evidence during the
operation.
The original latent print and inked print with which it is identical should be
photographed actual size. This procedure eliminates guesswork in enlarging
both to the same degree. Whatever areas of the two prints are deemed
requisite to illustrate the method of identification are then outlined
(blocked) on the negatives with the masking tape, so that only those areas
will show in the subsequent enlargements. Generally, if the legible area of
the latent print is small, it is well to show the complete print. If the area is
large, however, as in a palm print, an area which will not make the chart too
bulky or unwieldy may be selected.
In blocking, the negative is affixed to the window pane or light-box by
means of strips of photographic tape across the corners, with the side to be
blocked up. This prevents constant shifting of the negative while it is being
prepared. The latent print should be blocked first. Corners of the blocked
areas should be square. Care should be exercised to have as nearly as
possible the same ridge formations shown and the ridge formations in the
same upright or horizontal positions. This may be facilitated by fixing a
negative, bearing ruled squares, between the negative being blocked and the
glass to which it is attached.
If the latent print was developed or photographed as a light print on a dark
background, a reverse-color negative should be prepared and blocked in
order that both prints may appear as black ridges on light backgrounds. This
is done by placing the original negative adjacent to a new sheet of film and
exposing it. The resultant negative contains the same image as the original
except that the color of the image has been reversed.
If the negative is a photograph of an opaque lift, the print appears in reverse
position; that is, as a mirror image, and the negative will accordingly have
to be blocked from the dull or emulsion side in order for it to appear in a
position comparable to that of the inked print.
Failure to present the prints in question in the same color and position may
possibly confuse the observer and nullify the purpose for which the chart is
made.
photographs, he should retain personal custody of the evidence during the
operation.
The original latent print and inked print with which it is identical should be
photographed actual size. This procedure eliminates guesswork in enlarging
both to the same degree. Whatever areas of the two prints are deemed
requisite to illustrate the method of identification are then outlined
(blocked) on the negatives with the masking tape, so that only those areas
will show in the subsequent enlargements. Generally, if the legible area of
the latent print is small, it is well to show the complete print. If the area is
large, however, as in a palm print, an area which will not make the chart too
bulky or unwieldy may be selected.
In blocking, the negative is affixed to the window pane or light-box by
means of strips of photographic tape across the corners, with the side to be
blocked up. This prevents constant shifting of the negative while it is being
prepared. The latent print should be blocked first. Corners of the blocked
areas should be square. Care should be exercised to have as nearly as
possible the same ridge formations shown and the ridge formations in the
same upright or horizontal positions. This may be facilitated by fixing a
negative, bearing ruled squares, between the negative being blocked and the
glass to which it is attached.
If the latent print was developed or photographed as a light print on a dark
background, a reverse-color negative should be prepared and blocked in
order that both prints may appear as black ridges on light backgrounds. This
is done by placing the original negative adjacent to a new sheet of film and
exposing it. The resultant negative contains the same image as the original
except that the color of the image has been reversed.
If the negative is a photograph of an opaque lift, the print appears in reverse
position; that is, as a mirror image, and the negative will accordingly have
to be blocked from the dull or emulsion side in order for it to appear in a
position comparable to that of the inked print.
Failure to present the prints in question in the same color and position may
possibly confuse the observer and nullify the purpose for which the chart is
made.
Page 294
The degree of enlargement is not important in itself, so long as the ridges of
the latent print are readily distinguishable by the eye. Ten diameters have
been found adequate, although any enlargement from 5 to 30 will serve. It
should be remembered, however, that small enlargements are difficult to see
a few feet away and that large ones lose some of the contrast between ridges
and background. A white border of at least 1-1/2 inches or a width equal to
about one-third the enlarged area should be left for charting purposes.
Any chart prepared must be technically correct; that is, the corresponding
ridge characteristics in the two prints must be similarly numbered and
indicated.
Several ways of pointing out the similar ridge formations have been
observed, but the one which appears soundest is also simplest and consists
of merely marking the characteristics with lines and numbers.
All of the ridge characteristics in the prints need not be charted. Twelve
characteristics are ample to illustrate an identification, but it is neither
claimed nor implied that this number is required.
All fingerprint identifications are made by observing that two impressions
have ridge characteristics of similar shapes which occupy the same relative
positions in the patterns.
Methods involving superimposition of the prints are not recommended
because such a procedure is possible only in a very few instances, due to the
distortion of ridges in most prints through pressure and twisting. Such a
procedure is not necessarily a test of identity.
Likewise, presenting charts with the shapes of the characteristics drawn in
the margin is not recommended. Individual ridge characteristics may vary
slightly in actual shape or physical position due to twisting, pressure,
incomplete inking, condition of latent print when developed, powder
adhering to background, etc. Identifications are based on a number of
characteristics viewed in a unit relationship and not on the microscopic
appearances of single characteristics.
Since the enlarged photographs appear in black and white, an ink other than
black or white should be used to line the chart. Such an ink should be
preferably translucent so that it will be possible to see the ridges which it
the latent print are readily distinguishable by the eye. Ten diameters have
been found adequate, although any enlargement from 5 to 30 will serve. It
should be remembered, however, that small enlargements are difficult to see
a few feet away and that large ones lose some of the contrast between ridges
and background. A white border of at least 1-1/2 inches or a width equal to
about one-third the enlarged area should be left for charting purposes.
Any chart prepared must be technically correct; that is, the corresponding
ridge characteristics in the two prints must be similarly numbered and
indicated.
Several ways of pointing out the similar ridge formations have been
observed, but the one which appears soundest is also simplest and consists
of merely marking the characteristics with lines and numbers.
All of the ridge characteristics in the prints need not be charted. Twelve
characteristics are ample to illustrate an identification, but it is neither
claimed nor implied that this number is required.
All fingerprint identifications are made by observing that two impressions
have ridge characteristics of similar shapes which occupy the same relative
positions in the patterns.
Methods involving superimposition of the prints are not recommended
because such a procedure is possible only in a very few instances, due to the
distortion of ridges in most prints through pressure and twisting. Such a
procedure is not necessarily a test of identity.
Likewise, presenting charts with the shapes of the characteristics drawn in
the margin is not recommended. Individual ridge characteristics may vary
slightly in actual shape or physical position due to twisting, pressure,
incomplete inking, condition of latent print when developed, powder
adhering to background, etc. Identifications are based on a number of
characteristics viewed in a unit relationship and not on the microscopic
appearances of single characteristics.
Since the enlarged photographs appear in black and white, an ink other than
black or white should be used to line the chart. Such an ink should be
preferably translucent so that it will be possible to see the ridges which it
Page 295
traverses. A translucent carmine drawing ink serves well. In placing the
lines on the chart, they should be arranged so that they do not cross or
touch.
The chart will present a clearer, neater, and more pleasing appearance if it is
numbered clockwise and the numbers are evenly spaced (fig. 429). It is not
necessary, however, to place the numbers evenly around the photograph.
[Fig. 429]
Ordinarily, the numbers are placed on three sides and the type of print
(latent or ink) noted at the bottom. In any case, the manner of numbering
should be subservient to an explanation of the characteristics in an orderly
sequence; and, if the situation warrants it, all of the points may be
illustrated on a single side of the photograph.
A single line should be drawn from each characteristic to a numbered point
on the margin. Care should be taken to draw the line exactly to the
characteristic point, not short of it, beyond it, or obscuring it. Erasures
should be avoided. If the ink runs or blots, it is sometimes possible to
remove it with a cloth dampened in denatured alcohol, without damaging
the photograph.
lines on the chart, they should be arranged so that they do not cross or
touch.
The chart will present a clearer, neater, and more pleasing appearance if it is
numbered clockwise and the numbers are evenly spaced (fig. 429). It is not
necessary, however, to place the numbers evenly around the photograph.
[Fig. 429]
Ordinarily, the numbers are placed on three sides and the type of print
(latent or ink) noted at the bottom. In any case, the manner of numbering
should be subservient to an explanation of the characteristics in an orderly
sequence; and, if the situation warrants it, all of the points may be
illustrated on a single side of the photograph.
A single line should be drawn from each characteristic to a numbered point
on the margin. Care should be taken to draw the line exactly to the
characteristic point, not short of it, beyond it, or obscuring it. Erasures
should be avoided. If the ink runs or blots, it is sometimes possible to
remove it with a cloth dampened in denatured alcohol, without damaging
the photograph.
Page 296
If the enlargement is great, that is, 25 or 30 diameters, it might be well to
draw a small circle around each characteristic and then draw the line from
the circle to the number, since the ridge will be much thicker than the
illustrating line. All lines and numbers should be checked for absolute
accuracy. The expert should also study the enlargements for apparent
discrepancies in the prints, which he might be called upon to explain.
The charted enlargements are readily mounted on stiff cardboard with
rubber cement, which may be purchased in small tubes. After cementing the
photograph to the cardboard, it should be placed under a heavy flat object
which will cover the entire surface until dry to prevent warping and
wrinkling. After drying, trim the two enlargements to the same square size
with heavy scissors, a pen knife or scalpel, and fasten them together, book-
fashion, with strips of the photographic tape used in blocking the negatives.
Of course, if charts are large, 20 to 36 inches square, mounting is
unnecessary and they will have to be supported in the courtroom with
thumbtacks or metal rings.
Some courts do not permit numbering or lining of the photographs and the
enlargements alone in these cases will have to suffice. If there is some
question about admissibility of the charted enlargements, it is well to
prepare an extra uncharted set.
draw a small circle around each characteristic and then draw the line from
the circle to the number, since the ridge will be much thicker than the
illustrating line. All lines and numbers should be checked for absolute
accuracy. The expert should also study the enlargements for apparent
discrepancies in the prints, which he might be called upon to explain.
The charted enlargements are readily mounted on stiff cardboard with
rubber cement, which may be purchased in small tubes. After cementing the
photograph to the cardboard, it should be placed under a heavy flat object
which will cover the entire surface until dry to prevent warping and
wrinkling. After drying, trim the two enlargements to the same square size
with heavy scissors, a pen knife or scalpel, and fasten them together, book-
fashion, with strips of the photographic tape used in blocking the negatives.
Of course, if charts are large, 20 to 36 inches square, mounting is
unnecessary and they will have to be supported in the courtroom with
thumbtacks or metal rings.
Some courts do not permit numbering or lining of the photographs and the
enlargements alone in these cases will have to suffice. If there is some
question about admissibility of the charted enlargements, it is well to
prepare an extra uncharted set.
Page 297
CHAPTER XVII
Page 298
Unidentified Latent Fingerprint File
From time to time the FBI is requested to conduct surveys and participate in
conferences and in police schools on the problem of fingerprint
identification.
As a result of its observations in the course of these activities it has been
found that many identification bureaus are not fully aware of the
importance which latent finger impressions can have in connection with the
ordinary handling of arrest fingerprint cards.
Many bureaus and departments spend considerable time in developing
latent impressions in a particular case. If no immediate results are
forthcoming, the latent impressions are filed for future reference.
Single fingerprint files have been maintained with success by some
departments. Many others do not attempt to keep a file because of either
limited personnel or lack of funds. In many departments, however, where
such a file is maintained, too often latent impressions are simply filed with
no regard to possible future use. Actually, these impressions should be
treated as evidence directly connecting the subject with the crime.
Active consideration should be given to the latent impressions until they are
identified or the case has been successfully prosecuted. It is definitely felt
that the following suggested procedure might have some decided
advantages.
It is suggested that in all cases where latent impressions are developed at
the crime scene, or on an object used in connection with the commission of
a crime, the impressions be properly photographed and lifted. The evidence,
where possible and practicable, should be properly packed, labeled, and
stored for future use in court (fig. 430).
From time to time the FBI is requested to conduct surveys and participate in
conferences and in police schools on the problem of fingerprint
identification.
As a result of its observations in the course of these activities it has been
found that many identification bureaus are not fully aware of the
importance which latent finger impressions can have in connection with the
ordinary handling of arrest fingerprint cards.
Many bureaus and departments spend considerable time in developing
latent impressions in a particular case. If no immediate results are
forthcoming, the latent impressions are filed for future reference.
Single fingerprint files have been maintained with success by some
departments. Many others do not attempt to keep a file because of either
limited personnel or lack of funds. In many departments, however, where
such a file is maintained, too often latent impressions are simply filed with
no regard to possible future use. Actually, these impressions should be
treated as evidence directly connecting the subject with the crime.
Active consideration should be given to the latent impressions until they are
identified or the case has been successfully prosecuted. It is definitely felt
that the following suggested procedure might have some decided
advantages.
It is suggested that in all cases where latent impressions are developed at
the crime scene, or on an object used in connection with the commission of
a crime, the impressions be properly photographed and lifted. The evidence,
where possible and practicable, should be properly packed, labeled, and
stored for future use in court (fig. 430).
Page 299
[Fig. 430]
Use care in wrapping the evidence to see that the latent impressions on the
objects are not destroyed. If the specimens are later used in court, the
impressions should still be clearly visible. In the same manner, all evidence
not of a bulky nature, such as photographic negatives, photographs, and lifts
of latent impressions, should be similarly preserved for future court use. It
is to be emphasized that all material in one case should bear a case number.
All specimens not of a bulky nature can be placed in an envelope and filed
by this case number (fig. 431).
Use care in wrapping the evidence to see that the latent impressions on the
objects are not destroyed. If the specimens are later used in court, the
impressions should still be clearly visible. In the same manner, all evidence
not of a bulky nature, such as photographic negatives, photographs, and lifts
of latent impressions, should be similarly preserved for future court use. It
is to be emphasized that all material in one case should bear a case number.
All specimens not of a bulky nature can be placed in an envelope and filed
by this case number (fig. 431).
Page 300
[Fig. 431]
The above procedure is the usual one followed by the majority of
identification bureaus in handling latent impressions. In order, however, to
keep the latents in an active state, the photographs of all the latent
impressions found in a particular case should be cut up and pasted on a 3 by
5 card bearing the case number and title of the case (fig. 432).
The above procedure is the usual one followed by the majority of
identification bureaus in handling latent impressions. In order, however, to
keep the latents in an active state, the photographs of all the latent
impressions found in a particular case should be cut up and pasted on a 3 by
5 card bearing the case number and title of the case (fig. 432).
Page 301
[Fig. 432]
If numerous latents are developed, several cards should be used, all having
the same number and title. These cards are then filed by case number in a
regular filing cabinet. Before this step is taken, every effort should be made
to secure and compare the fingerprints of individuals who may legitimately
have placed their prints on the objects which were examined. In addition, as
part of the case report bearing the same case number as the latent
impressions, there should be a notation pointing out that latent impressions
were developed in the case and that they are on file.
Fingerprint comparisons in this unidentified file can be made on the basis of
fingerprints taken from day to day of individuals fingerprinted for criminal
identification purposes. A routine may be set up whereby the fingerprints of
individuals arrested each day will be compared the following day with the
latent fingerprints filed in the unidentified latent file. It is most important
that this procedure be rigidly followed from day to day. It is to be borne in
mind that the comparisons are made whether the particular person is or is
not a suspect in a certain case. Special attention should be paid to
fingerprints of individuals charged with burglary, breaking and entering,
armed robbery, and other similar crimes.
Should an identification be made of some latent prints, and others in the
same case remain unidentified, the 3 by 5 card should remain in file until
the case is fully closed, inasmuch as more than one person may be involved
in the crime. Of course, if all the latents are identified, then the 3 by 5 card
is removed and placed with the negatives, lifts, etc.
It may be deemed advisable to remove these latents from the file in
instances where the statute of limitations covering the crime has run.
If the above procedure is rigidly followed, identification in many instances
will result—more than would be effected if the department maintained only
a single fingerprint file in which the latent prints were merely filed away.
Very often such a latent fingerprint file is a source of information when all
logical investigative leads have been exhausted.
If numerous latents are developed, several cards should be used, all having
the same number and title. These cards are then filed by case number in a
regular filing cabinet. Before this step is taken, every effort should be made
to secure and compare the fingerprints of individuals who may legitimately
have placed their prints on the objects which were examined. In addition, as
part of the case report bearing the same case number as the latent
impressions, there should be a notation pointing out that latent impressions
were developed in the case and that they are on file.
Fingerprint comparisons in this unidentified file can be made on the basis of
fingerprints taken from day to day of individuals fingerprinted for criminal
identification purposes. A routine may be set up whereby the fingerprints of
individuals arrested each day will be compared the following day with the
latent fingerprints filed in the unidentified latent file. It is most important
that this procedure be rigidly followed from day to day. It is to be borne in
mind that the comparisons are made whether the particular person is or is
not a suspect in a certain case. Special attention should be paid to
fingerprints of individuals charged with burglary, breaking and entering,
armed robbery, and other similar crimes.
Should an identification be made of some latent prints, and others in the
same case remain unidentified, the 3 by 5 card should remain in file until
the case is fully closed, inasmuch as more than one person may be involved
in the crime. Of course, if all the latents are identified, then the 3 by 5 card
is removed and placed with the negatives, lifts, etc.
It may be deemed advisable to remove these latents from the file in
instances where the statute of limitations covering the crime has run.
If the above procedure is rigidly followed, identification in many instances
will result—more than would be effected if the department maintained only
a single fingerprint file in which the latent prints were merely filed away.
Very often such a latent fingerprint file is a source of information when all
logical investigative leads have been exhausted.
Page 302
This résumé of latent impressions has been prepared by the Federal Bureau
of Investigation in the belief that it may be of possible interest to law
enforcement officers desiring to avail themselves of latent identification
evidence in connection with their investigative activities. It should be borne
in mind that the comments and expressions set out in this book are not
intended to convey the thought that the Federal Bureau of Investigation
believes the points emphasized are the only ones of moment, or that other
methods of developing latent impressions are not equally acceptable. The
Federal Bureau of Investigation will be glad to answer any questions on the
foregoing which may occur to any law enforcement officer who reads this
material.
of Investigation in the belief that it may be of possible interest to law
enforcement officers desiring to avail themselves of latent identification
evidence in connection with their investigative activities. It should be borne
in mind that the comments and expressions set out in this book are not
intended to convey the thought that the Federal Bureau of Investigation
believes the points emphasized are the only ones of moment, or that other
methods of developing latent impressions are not equally acceptable. The
Federal Bureau of Investigation will be glad to answer any questions on the
foregoing which may occur to any law enforcement officer who reads this
material.
Page 303
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SCIENCE OF
FINGERPRINTS: CLASSIFICATION AND USES ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
FINGERPRINTS: CLASSIFICATION AND USES ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
Page 304
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
Page 305
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
Page 306
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived from
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
Page 307
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing,
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
Page 308
Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
Page 309
you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
Page 310
efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
Page 311
including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
Page 312
copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
Page 313
back
Page 314
back
Page 315
back
Page 316
back
Page 317
back
Page 318
back
Page 319
back
Page 320
back
Page 321
back
Page 322
back
Page 323
back
Page 324
back
Page 325
back
Page 326
back
Page 327
back